Categories
Podcast episode

Carbon as an emerging, liquid asset class w/ Michael Azlen, Carbon Cap Management – EP212

With carbon prices becoming more common globally, carbon is an emerging, liquid asset class, according to Michael Azlen, CEO and co-portfolio manager of Carbon Cap Management. Michael shares his insights into investing in carbon markets with show host Gene Tunny. Michael, an experienced investment professional and regular speaker at investment conferences, shares his research on the benefits of diversifying investments across multiple carbon markets. Tune in to learn more about the potential of carbon markets as an investment opportunity. Disclaimer: This is for general information only, and does not constitute investment or financial advice. 
Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored.

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

What’s covered in EP212

  • Carbon markets and investing in an emerging asset class. (0:03)
  • Carbon markets and their correlation with other asset classes. (2:57)
  • Carbon markets and impact investing. (9:20)
  • Carbon markets and emissions trading schemes. (13:42)
  • Carbon market mechanisms and their effectiveness. (20:52)
  • Carbon markets and their potential for investment. (28:19)
  • Climate change impact on asset management industry. (33:35)
  • Final thoughts on carbon markets and investing with Michael Azlen. (38:25)

Links relevant to the conversation

About Michael Azlen and Carbon Cap:

https://www.carbon-cap.com/about-us

Michael’s article on “The Carbon Risk Premium”:

https://www.pm-research.com/content/iijaltinv/25/1/33

Transcript: Carbon as an emerging, liquid asset class w/ Michael Azlen, Carbon Cap Management – EP212

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It was then checked over by a human, Tim Hughes from Adept Economics, to see if the otter had missed anything, and with all respect to otters they do miss quite a bit. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Michael Azlen  00:03

By investing across all five of these markets, your overall portfolio volatility really comes down of course because your your nicely diversified, while it doesn’t necessarily impede your return expectations so that’s that’s one of the key observations of our research paper was this this very low cross correlation between carbon markets.

Gene Tunny  00:27

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory, evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show.

Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. In this episode, you’ll learn about carbon as a liquid emerging asset class. Emissions of carbon dioxide are increasingly being priced globally through various emissions trading schemes, or through other mechanisms that impose carbon prices. To explore carbon markets I talk to a fund manager who is investing in carbon markets globally. My guest is Michael Azlen, CEO and Co-Portfolio Manager of Carbon Cap Management. Michael has 25 years of experience as an investment professional, and he’s a regular speaker at investment conferences worldwide. Also he’s been a guest lecturer in graduate programmes at London Business School for more than 15 years. I’m really pleased to have been able to interview Michael because he has some great insights into carbon markets. For instance, he explains how carbon markets are generally uncorrelated with equities, bonds and real estate, and hence they can help investors diversify in uncertain times. For the lawyers, this is for general information only and none of this should be interpreted as investment or financial advice. Okay, let’s get into the episode. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Michael Azlen on carbon markets.

Michael Azlen from Carbon Cap. Thanks for joining me on the programme.

Michael Azlen  02:20

Pleased to be here Gene, thanks for inviting me.

Gene Tunny  02:22

Oh, of course. I’ve covered climate change quite a bit on the show. But I haven’t had anyone who has the expertise in the carbon markets and investing in carbon as an emerging asset class or, or another way I’ve seen it expressed as a liquid asset class. So Michael, to start off with, could you tell us a bit about Carbon Cap, please, you’re the CEO and Co-Portfolio Manager there. What does Carbon Cap do exactly?

Michael Azlen  02:57

Sure. So So Carbon Cap runs the World Carbon Fund. It’s a climate change impact fund. And the Fund invests into the regulated compliance carbon markets around the world. The fund has two objectives. The first objective is to generate a positive return over any rolling 12 month period. So we don’t want to be up every month or every quarter. But over every rolling 12 month period, the objective is to be positive, regardless of the performance of carbon itself. And the second objective of the fund is to have an impact, a direct impact on climate change. And we do this in a number of ways. But the hardest impact is achieved through our commitment to take 20% of the performance fees that are generated. And we use those to purchase compliance carbon permits, again in the regulated market Gene. And we cancel those permits. And in the fund has been running for three and a half years, the total return net of fees to our clients is in excess of 100% now, so very strong returns over this three and a half year period. And therefore, you know, the nice thing about performing it is aligned with direct climate impact. So higher performance means more impact. And that creates a nice alignment of interest between between the investors ourselves as the manager and having an impact on climate change. The fund has grown significantly from the launch, we launched with only 10 million the fund is now $280 million in size. So we’re approaching 300 million and our client base is now moving much more institutional in nature. In terms of impact allocators. The fund holds Article Nine status here in Europe and that that status, Article Nine is the highest level of impact under the European taxonomy. So it’s an uncorrelated absolute return fund with climate impact. So it’s quite a quite a unique fund and I think you know, more and more clients are seeking uncorrelated returns as we’re, you know, the global macro situation is becoming quite difficult. I think the forecast from here out.

Gene Tunny  05:14

Okay, so yeah, I’ve got a few questions based on that. Michael uncorrelated, do you mean uncorrelated with the business cycle with the stock market? What do you mean by uncorrelated?

Michael Azlen  05:24

Yeah, so the background to to Carbon Cap Gene was after I built and sold my previous asset management business to a public company, I then became deeply involved in research onto the into the science of climate change, so nothing to do with carbon. And that led me to enrolling at the London School of Economics and their climate change programme. And this is where I learned about carbon markets. At that time, this was in 2018, carbon was trading in the different markets around the world about half a billion dollars daily. So it’s quite liquid. And I was quite surprised by that. And my first question as an investment professionals was, was your question. What are the what are the statistical properties of the asset class, you know, return and volatility and correlation. When I looked for the research Gene, there was no research on carbon. So I hired a PhD student from the LSE, myself, we collected the data, and we analysed and wrote that up as a full research paper. Now, it did take three years in the peer review process with academic papers. But I’m very pleased to tell you the paper was published last year in the Journal of Alternative Investments. So, so coming back to your question, when you’re asking, you know, what do we mean by correlation? In this sense, if you take the, you know, the daily, weekly or monthly returns of carbon, which is a liquid tradable asset class now, I should mention that, that that liquidity where it was trading half a billion a day, that was in 2018, now we’re trading 4 billion per day. So the liquidity has increased significantly. And and when you look at those correlation numbers over rolling periods, carbon just exhibits effectively no correlation at all to equities, to bonds to real estate to other commodities, it has very unique correlation properties

Gene Tunny  07:18

Right and what about the volatility is it much more volatile than those other asset classes?

Michael Azlen  07:24

So it varies between markets. So you know, today in the World Carbon Fund, we invest in five different liquid regulated carbon markets. And those volatilities vary from probably the lowest volatility market is between 10 to 15% volatility, and the highest volatility market maybe is about a 60% volatility. So there’s quite a difference in volatility in the different carbon markets.

Gene Tunny  07:48

Okay, so I might ask you about those different carbon markets in a moment, there are just a few other things to clear up. You talked about institutional investors, so you’re talking about, what investment banks, so the Goldman Sachs, or Morgan Stanley, you’re not okay, who are you talking about there? Pension funds, perhaps?

Michael Azlen  08:10

Yeah, exactly. So generally, you know, high net worth investors, and then retail investors would be non institutional, and then kind of in the middle ground, you would have family offices and multifamily offices in the middle ground. And then you would move into more institutional, which would be, as you say, professional investment management organisations. So this, these could be other investment management firms that have maybe a multi asset product, or they might run a fund of hedge funds product, and they would be an investor into our fund. And finally, the classic, you know, asset holders like in Australia, the super funds and other big pension funds. So we’re seeing also interest from the bigger pension funds now, because there’s an interesting aspect, not only the return and the low correlation, but the climate impact, and the potential for carbon exposure to give you somewhat of a climate hedge in your portfolio is another another interesting aspect. If you understand that climate change is now impacting equity and bond portfolios by having some carbon it’s somewhat of a hedge against some of those impacts.

Gene Tunny  09:19

Yeah, that makes sense. And can you explain, you mentioned this Article Nine, in the European taxonomy? I’m completely unfamiliar with that. Sorry. Could you explain what what that’s about?

Michael Azlen  09:32

So, Europe a couple of years ago, launched a new taxonomy to identify the level of transparency and impact for funds and they set minimum standards, reporting standards in order to achieve those different article levels and the highest level there of impact is Article Nine. So you know, in an in an effort to create an environment that kind of weeded out greenwashing, they said, let’s put some standards in here. Because you know, I mean, three years ago, every single fund was green in some aspect, right? Even if it really wasn’t green, it could be labelled green. And so Europe brought in this taxonomy and said, now, unless you meet these very strict reporting requirements, you can’t make a green claim. Or more importantly, you know, your fund will be ranked Article Six, Article Seven, Article eight, Article Nine. So there’s a varying degree of reporting, and you it to achieve Article Nine, you must demonstrate meaningful impact in terms of the activities of the fund have to be reported in detail, and you have to demonstrate impact. And so in our case, we have now a three year audit trail where we have purchased carbon permits with those performance fee amounts, and then we just cancel them. And that’s all audited and documented.

Gene Tunny  10:57

Okay, okay I’ll have to look more into that, that’s interesting. I mean, yeah, there have been a bit of concerns about greenwashing, or concerns about just how effective some of these carbon offsets are, whether they’re actually legitimately reducing greenhouse gas emissions. So I think that’s, that’s fair enough. Righto! I’ve got to ask you about this $4 billion a day of trading. And I mean, you’re involved in this sort of thing. And oh, can I ask first? Actually, you might have mentioned it before. Assets under management, are you do you disclose the assets under management of your of your fund?

Michael Azlen  11:36

Yeah so as I mentioned, we are currently running 280, two eight zero million dollars in the World Carbon Fund.

Gene Tunny  11:44

Gotcha. Because I latched on to that there’s that four billion dollars a day that’s being traded, who’s trading it, and who ultimately needs these carbon permits or these assets? So we’ve got, I mean, what is it that’s being traded? There’s the permit. So in Australia, we I think we call them Australian carbon credit units. So they represent what is it a tonne of co2 equivalent? And then there are also offsets. Can you tell us a bit about that market, who’s in it and what’s been traded, please, Michael?

Michael Azlen  12:13

So this, this is a real area of confusion Gene. So it’s really important that we clarify the difference between various carbon markets because there are actually three very distinct carbon markets. And they’re very, very different. So this is very, very important. So the first market that most people are actually familiar with, and let’s leave the Australian ACCU market. Let’s leave that to the side for a minute. I’m talking globally now. Most people are familiar with what’s called the voluntary carbon market, voluntary, because it means it’s a voluntary participation, a corporate can choose to buy these credits, can choose to buy these offsets. And here Gene terminology, we use the term credit and offset. In the voluntary market, it’s a carbon credit or a carbon offset. In the markets in which we invest, we invest in a completely separate market, the regulated market, the compliance carbon market, where companies must comply, and those are called carbon allowance permits. So in the voluntary market, most it’s called a carbon credit or offset. The normal project here Gene is planting trees, or trying to protect a forest or a mangrove swamp. It’s some type of project related activity. And then an independent party will calculate how much carbon is sequestered from the activity. They give it a rating, and they calculate the tonnes and they issue these credits and offsets. I’m going to give you five key bullet points about this voluntary market very, very important. Number one, it is completely unregulated. Number two, it’s illiquid, it’s it’s not a liquid asset. Number three it’s very small in size. I’ll come back to that. Number four, because it’s all of these different methodologies. It’s very opaque and complex to figure out, well, how did they calculate these credits, how many credits? And number five, I think very important, in the voluntary market, there is effectively an unlimited supply of these credits. This is where Gene you mentioned in the last ,just the last nine months, this year alone, there have been a number of investigative journalist articles that have uncovered practices in that market that have proven to show that some of the projects have not actually sequestered any carbon at all. And I think the key here Gene is that in any market as an economist, you’ll know this when you have a financial asset without any financial oversight, this brings moral hazard into the equation right? So if we can create more credits or offsets through a different methodology, we all benefit within that ecosystem. But there’s no independent oversight of that. So the problem of over crediting and sort of supply has become an issue. And so I think what we’re seeing is corporate buyers of wanting to make a climate impact are now somewhat shying away from that market, because they don’t want to be involved in these in these scandals. So that’s the voluntary market. If I move the lens to the regulated markets Gene, I want to give you five key bullet points about the regulated market. The first one, of course, it is highly regulated, because it is run by governments. Number two, it’s it’s very liquid, it now trades $4 billion every day. Number three, it’s large. So when we compare the size, this market is traded, last year, about 1 trillion with a T dollars, and the voluntary market did about 1 billion. So this is a 1000 times difference in size, not 10 times or 100 times this is huge. And number four, it’s very transparent. Of course, these these markets, because they’re run by the government, so they put all the rules on the website, it’s transparent. And number five and most important Gene, in the regulated market the supply of the permits is capped and every year that supply lower and lower and lower. So in one market, unlimited supply just keeps increasing, and in this market it’s capped and it keeps going down. So it’s quite, there’s quite a big difference between these two markets.

Gene Tunny  16:28

Yeah, gotcha. So you’re talking about the permits that are part of emissions trading schemes, or cap and trade schemes or whatever you want to call it. So what are the major markets, Michael, which economies have these schemes and which economies therefore have these regulated markets, there are these permits that you’re involved in investing in and trading?

Michael Azlen  16:53

So the good news here, Gene, is that not only is there, are there current, currently multiple countries and jurisdictions, but there are at least a dozen new countries that have announced they’re going to launch full Emission Trading Systems, cap and trade systems as you as you correctly identified, so the growth of the asset class is going to be tremendous in the next five years. The current markets that we invest into today are the European emission trading system. Number two is the UK emission trading system, which was established after Brexit more than two years ago. When the UK left Europe, they launched their own emission trading system. The third market is the California carbon market, which is in the state of California. Fourth market is the regional greenhouse gas cap and trade market, which is on the east coast of the United States. And it consists of 11 states together on the East Coast in one block carbon market. And the fifth market we invest in is the New Zealand carbon market, which has been around for a long time, it’s gone through transformations. It’s a small market, but it’s we think it’s quite a well run market and and that’s the fifth market. Um, one thing I want to point out, Europe has is the most liquid market, it trades probably half of that 4 billion daily, 2 billion a day is the European market. So very, very liquid and it was launched in 2005. From 2005 until today, emissions in Europe have dropped by 1 billion metric tonnes per year. That is a big success. And and for this reason, I think because of that success, obviously without impeding economic growth. I mean, that’s quite important, right? I think that is why we’ve had these big announcements in the last well, even the last three months, Brazil is moving legislation to launch a full cap and trade market, India and Japan, Japan, the third biggest emitter in the world. China, of course, launched after doing extensive research on the European market and the California, China launched the world’s biggest cap and trade market two years ago, covers 4.5 billion tonnes of carbon. So it’s massive. South Korea, Mexico should go live next year, they finished the two years of their pilot programme. So we’re expecting that may be the next fund that we could add into the fund. But there’s there’s many more countries I was recently in Singapore three weeks ago and Indonesia just launched their cap and trade market. Most of the Asian Tigers, Vietnam, Malaysia, Indonesia, they’re they’re all have plans at various stages, it’s taking time to, but they all have plans to launch cap and trade carbon markets, which is great news.

Gene Tunny  19:51

Right. The US is obviously a major omission from that list of countries. Do you think there’s any prospect of the the US, there are some states out there that you mentioned, is that right? But the whole US there’s no federal cap and trade scheme in the US is there?

Michael Azlen  20:09

No, and I think it’s unlikely we’re going to get a federal scheme, because of the, you know, the polarisation, you know, at the federal level, but but what we’re seeing Gene is, you have the state of California, and then you have 11 states on the east coast. So we already have those 12 states. Three months ago, the state of Washington, the 13th US state launched its own carbon market. That market launched three months ago. And in the last six months, New York State has announced it’s going to launch a full blown cap and trade carbon market probably within 18 months. So things are happening at the individual state level, but I think it’s unlikely we’re going to get federal carbon pricing.

Gene Tunny  20:52

Gotcha. And where’s Australia sit in this? So do you have any thoughts about these, these A double C Us or ACCUs that we have here? Is that something you’re not interested in investing in?

Michael Azlen  21:04

So in the fund, we have a market entry framework that has a number of criteria that a carbon market must pass in order for us to onboard that into the fund. And there’s very practical considerations like access to that market. But then there’s there’s other considerations such as, you know, transparency, country risk, policy risk, currency risk, and items like that. So, you know, on many of those, of course, Australia being a, you know, a Western democracy, there’s no issue, but the actual structure of the ACCU market in Australia is somewhat of a hybrid between the regulated market which has, you know, a cap which gets lowered every year, and the voluntary market, which is unlimited supply effectively. And, and therefore, when we apply those market, market entry, that market entry framework against the Australian market, it simply doesn’t pass it, it’s it doesn’t meet the stringency test, because of the fact that it allows voluntary project supply units to come in of very questionable calculation methodologies. And and really the other thing is Gene, durability. When you have a project that it I think we can measure that it may have sequestered carbon, but but it what is the risk of reversal? And how long will that carbon be stored, if it’s only stored for 10 years and then released back into the atmosphere, well, then you know, that that perhaps hasn’t been a very valid carbon credit. So durability and risk of reversal of the carbon then being re re emitted is very high. And so projects, such as soil carbon and whatnot, they do have this potential for risk of reversal and therefore low durability. Most projects now that I think more corporate buyers are looking at more permanent removal, such as, you know, direct air capture, and other strategies where you can prove long term, you’ve pulled the carbon out, you’ve injected it deep underground, you liquefy it, inject it into a storage well, for very long term durable storage, over 100 years, or maybe even over 1000 years. So you can really demonstrate storage.

Gene Tunny  23:21

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  23:26

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis studies and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  23:55

Now back to the show.

Now, who ultimately needs these permits, it’s emitters isn’t it? It’s big companies that are polluting. So smelters and power generators, fossil fuel generators. Is that right? They’re the ones who ultimately need it. They’ve got the demand.

Michael Azlen  24:17

Yeah, so in a cap and trade programme, the government controls the total quantity of emissions. But because there’s a limited number of permits, exactly, as you said. And the way they decide who’s in is they normally set a threshold Gene. So in most markets, it’s a 25,000 tonne per year threshold. So any company that emits more than 25,000 tonnes per year they’re notified by the government they’re in, they don’t have a choice. So that’s why we we call it a compliance instead of a voluntary market because you must comply. It means that the government audits you every year, and you must give the government the permits based on the audit. So if you we audit you and you met 2 million tonnes by April of this year, you have to give the government 2 million permits and the government controls the supply of those permits. So that’s a cap and trade. Every year the government, in the case of Europe let’s say, we, we sell at auctions 1.3 billion permits, at the end of the year the companies are audited. And if the total emissions are also 1.3, the companies then give those permits back to the government who destroy them, they they destroy the permit, and that that compliance cycle for one year has now been completed. The second year now the government sells 1.2 billion, destroys those then 1.1, then a billion then 900. So every year the supply of permits is going down. So we know within the ecosystem 1000s of companies, someone must select themselves to stop emitting carbon. And that’s the beauty of the mechanism Gene, it allows the price, the market sets the price of carbon, and that price signal is taken by participants and internalised. What do I mean? They compare the market price of carbon to their internal cost of abatement. In other words, the CEO calls in his head of engineering and says, John, you know, we’re emitting 2 million tonnes a year, it’s $100, that’s costing us $200 million a year. Can you get her emissions down? He says to the head of engineering, right? He’s profit motivated. And the head of engineering then looks at the latest technologies for that industrial process, and comes back and says to the CEO, yeah, we can get it down. But it costs $160 a tonne. Well, that that CEO has a very clear decision, then he’ll he will simply buy the permit for 100. But there will be another company in the ecosystem, where the head of engineering says it’s $40, we can reduce our emissions for 40 bucks a tonne. That’s a no brainer. The CEO chooses then to invest in that low carbon technology and they choose to cut their emissions. So this is the power of the mechanism. It forces what we call the three magic words, least cost abatement. Right, that those are the three magic words, tap and lower the emissions. That’s good, but we want to achieve it at the lowest possible cost. As an economist you will appreciate this is you know, this is a parsimonious solution to to this quite difficult problem.

Gene Tunny  27:17

Oh, yeah, absolutely. I mean, I think, yeah, that’s that’s something that economists would would agree on. I mean, one of the things that’s happened in Australia is because we, we don’t have a carbon price, but yet the politicians have made commitments to try and get emissions down, we end up doing all sorts of things that may not end up being that that least, what is it the least cost of abatement?

Michael Azlen  27:41

Yeah to achieve least cost abatement. Yeah, yeah. So because we want to we all want to cut emissions of course, we’ve seen the terrible impact, but we don’t want to do it at any price, right, we want to do it at the lowest possible cost. And so in a carbon market, as we keep lowering the number of permits, the supply, we know we as long as we have liquidity and price discovery taking place in that market, that that is important. We can be quite confident it’s the companies with the lowest cost they self select themselves to choose to reduce their emissions. And the reason they do it is they make more profit. I mean, they they’re not being green or ESG. They simply are reducing their emissions because they make more profit.

Gene Tunny  28:19

Yeah. Okay. I’d like to ask you a couple of questions about the market some of the technical details. Is there a futures market in, in these permits, the derivatives? I mean, what’s the, what’s the market look like?

Michael Azlen  28:34

So in each market that we invest in is slightly different in four of the five markets Gene, there is exchange listed futures and exchange listed options that trade like many other commodities, like oil, or wheat, or corn or, you know, other commodities. And most of the liquidity is in that exchange listed futures market. Most of the trading activity in carbon, probably no one knows the exact number, but I would say 70, or 80% of the trading activity, is those big end users hedging their carbon obligation. And as you said, it’s the power sector. electric utilities, steel, cement, chemicals, glass, these high emitting sectors are the main participants in, in carbon markets.

Gene Tunny  29:18

Gotcha. Gotcha. But they’re not your investors are they or are they? Oh, you’ve got no, no, no. Okay. So, but you’re you are participating in the market, but they’re the ones who ultimately need the permits. Okay. Gotcha. That makes sense. What about foreign exchange risk you mentioned? I mean, what you’re saying there, it sounds really embarrassing for Australia for our ACCUs, those criteria that you set out and how we don’t meet them over here. That’s, yeah that’s quite embarrassing for us, I imagine. You mentioned foreign exchange risk, do you hedge that foreign exchange risk?

Michael Azlen  30:00

In the fund? We do yeah. So where we invest in, you know, in a carbon market and in another currency we hedge that out. That’s, you know, quite common in our industry.

Gene Tunny  30:11

Gotcha. Okay. So we’ve, we’ve talked about, you know, regulated and you’re in the regulated space versus voluntary. I was surprised just how much larger the regulated is than the the voluntary, I suppose it makes sense if it’s, if it’s compulsory. You talked about a euro, the European scheme, and then the UK scheme. To what extent are these markets connected? Can I buy permits in in one scheme and use them in another? I mean, how does that how does it all work? Are they are these markets connected in any way?

Michael Azlen  30:48

So the long term plan, Gene is for carbon markets all to link together. So to give you an example, you know, four or five years ago, Switzerland had its own separate carbon market, and then it chose to link with the EU carbon market. And that is the long term trajectory. I think if we look 10 or 15 years into the future, hopefully, we initially will have maybe regional carbon markets, Asia, North America, South America, that kind of thing. And then eventually, one would hope, one global carbon price and carbon market, and we believe the asset class, you know, now is trading about 70 billion a month, as I mentioned, we think that, you know, when when China, South Korea, Mexico, Brazil, Japan, when all these markets spin up in the next three to five years, we’ll be trading probably well over, you know, half a trillion a month, I mean, it’s going to be a huge asset class, probably overtaking crude oil as the most heavily traded commodity in the world, probably within five to 10 years. So strategically, I think it’s a very important asset class. One of the very unique things is Gene, they’re not linked yet. So even though the California market the permit covers one tonne, same same commodity as the one tonne in the European market, because there’s no fungibility you can’t bring the permit and hand it in, in Europe, from California. When you look at the cross correlation. It’s zero, effectively. So to give you an example, this year, year to date performance, the European market is about flat on the year, the UK market is down 40% on the year, the California market is up 20% on the year, and the RGGI market on the east coast of the US is up I don’t know about 5% on the year. So you can see just from these numbers, very diverse performance, there’s no cross correlation. So by investing across all five of these markets, your overall portfolio volatility really comes down of course, because you’re, you’re nicely diversified. While it doesn’t necessarily impede your return expectations. So that’s that’s one of the key observations of our research paper was this this very low cross correlation between carbon markets.

Gene Tunny  33:03

Gotcha. Okay. Yeah, I’ll have to, I’ll put a link in the show notes to that. Michael, yeah this has been fascinating. I’ve learned a lot about about these markets. And it’s, it’s, there’s a lot I’m gonna have to follow up on just to make sure I’m as across it as I can. Can I ask you about your, your story how you ended up at Carbon Cap? I mean, you’re you’re in the UK now, aren’t you? You’re, so you’re based in London, you’ve got an office in Mayfair. But you’re obviously, I mean, you don’t have a British accent do you so what, can you tell us a bit about your story?

Michael Azlen  33:35

Yeah, so I’m a Canadian, and worked, began my career with two of Canada’s banks as a proprietary trader. After, I then came to London to do my graduate degree at London Business School. And I’ve actually been teaching now for 18 years on the graduate degree programme at London Business School. The last five years, I’ve been teaching a segment on the impact of climate change on the asset management industry, which is a very, very interesting and fast moving area. I worked in the hedge fund industry here in London in a number of roles. And then I set up my first business, regulated investment management business in 2005. And I was very fortunate Gene to grow that business to a decent size. And we were approached, and I managed to sell the business to a Swiss public company. And it was after that sale, and my earn out period, I had a little bit of time off, but that’s when I became deeply involved in research into climate change itself, nothing to do with carbon, I was, I was quite sceptical of the whole area of climate change, you know, because, to me, the you know, the temperature and weather didn’t seem that bad. And I also had known that the climate had always changed prior to humans being on the planet, quite dramatically right? Humans have only been on the planet 250,000 years or so. And we’ve got paleo climate records way back before then showing great variability in weather and the climate system. So I just sort of wanted to bottom out those two questions. And I’ve now read more than 200 Peer Reviewed papers, I was I was in a fortunate position because I didn’t have to work, I could simply focus on that. And I’m a bit geeky, you know, I like to read these these peer reviewed academic papers, and I fairly quickly, over about two or three months became convinced that the problem is extremely acute. If you’re an empirical person, you just weigh evidence, you just base your decision on evidence. It’s, it’s, you know, the concentration of co2 now in the atmosphere at 425 parts per million. I mean, it’s increased by 50%. And it just keeps climbing higher and higher. And the impacts, I don’t know, if you, you saw the data that came out just a few days ago, on September, me, not only was the month of September, the hottest September on record, but the deviation above the previous record was enormous. So the impacts that we’re seeing now are becoming, you know, massive. I know, in Australia, in particular, there’s been, you know, some some very big impacts both in fires and flooding events. And those are unfortunately likely to continue. So hopefully, you know, we can address this so that, that, that spurred my passion to do something Gene and I was fortunate to be able to get a Swiss private bank to back me to launch my second business. And now we have a very interesting Climate Impact Fund.

Gene Tunny  36:26

Hmm, good one, good one. Can I ask you about this course you are teaching, the impact of climate change on the asset management industry, I mean, I mean, you’re a case study of that, I mean, yes, obviously, you know, carbon now is a liquid asset class or an emerging asset class, as you call it. But are there other impacts that you that you consider in that course? I’m just just interested in what the content of that is broadly and what you see is the, those impacts.

Michael Azlen  36:54

Well, I mean, it’s a, this is a massive area now for, for academic investigation. It began with things like, for instance, looking at a diversified equity portfolio and trying to calculate initially, you know, the carbon footprint of that portfolio as a proxy for you know, the emissions. And then academics began to research well, what is the difference in performance between a portfolio that has a bigger carbon footprint, they call that a brown portfolio, versus a portfolio with a with a less carbon foot a green, and this Brown versus green, if you just Google that, that spread of performance in equities, and in fixed income markets, has been an area of very great research. But things have moved on since then. And now, what the research is looking at is trying to really identify with the actual climate risks that individual corporates are exposed to, either insurance companies in their in their insurance portfolio right with regard to flooding risk, fire risk, things of this nature. You can imagine banks, their lending risk. So in terms of a kind of Basel three stress test, but, but instead of looking at credit quality, we’re now trying to assess are they lending money to companies where those companies have undue climate risk, and therefore, you should factor that in? So it really extends to a pretty wide range. It’s a really fast moving and interesting area.

Gene Tunny  38:25

Gotcha. Okay, I’ll have to have a look at that. I mean, that might be a topic for another episode, I won’t to go into it now because you’ve, you’ve given me, you know, lots of good stuff to think about already, Michael so that’s been that’s been terrific. Any final thoughts before we wrap up?

Michael Azlen  38:42

No, I would just like to say, you know, I think everything begins and ends with education and learning about a topic, if you’ve got questions, if this has interested you today, I would direct you to our website, we have an open access website with a research library and we have a section on the website of little educational videos, short snippets, to help people understand how does the, you know, what do you mean by voluntary carbon market? What do you mean by regulated carbon market? And we have information, of course, on the latest science on what’s happening on climate change. So I would encourage people to, if you found today interesting, to you know, do your research and and please use the resources that are available our research paper, I think it is not available on the website, but I would happy, anyone who emails me, I’d be happy to send it and for any, you know, Australian based investors that would be interested in thinking about our fund, you know be of course very happy to have that conversation too.

Gene Tunny  39:43

Yeah, absolutely. I mean, I imagine it could be of interest to with yeah, super funds. I mean, we’ve got some big, obviously some big super funds here and we’ve got, I mean, I’m in Queensland here we’ve got a Queensland Investment Corporation, which is owned by the state government. I know that they’ve got, they’re interested in alternative investments, I’m not sure to what extent they’re interested in the carbon market, but anyway, it’s uh, yeah, absolutely if there is a, if there is someone listening right now and investors in Australia or anywhere, yeah, I think I think definitely check out your website, Michael and you know, this is obviously not financial advice, I can’t, this is general information only. But, you know, certainly, this is, it, I think you’re right. It is an emerging liquid asset class, and it’s something that really has to be considered in future portfolios. So, Michael Azlen that’s been terrific. I’ve really enjoyed the conversation. So thanks so much for your time and for your insights really, really thought it was great.

Michael Azlen  40:46

Gene, thank you very happy to participate today. Thanks for inviting me.

Gene Tunny  40:50

Cheers.

Michael Azlen  40:51

Cheers. Bye bye

Gene Tunny  40:53

Righto, thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

41:40

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey. Head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Uncovering the Secrets of Valuing and Selling Businesses w/ Arthur Petropoulos, Hill View Partners – EP211

Show host Gene Tunny is joined by Arthur Petropoulos, founder and managing partner of Hill View Partners, a company specializing in mergers and acquisitions, business sales, and capital advisory services for middle market companies. They discuss how Arthur finds, values, and sells businesses, as well as the wider economic impacts of his work and the role of private equity. They also explore whether we should be concerned about modern-day Gordon Gekkos and how the business landscape has changed since the 1980s. 

Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

YouTube clips

What’s covered in EP211

  • Business sales and capital raising with Hillview Partners. (1:22)
  • Business brokering process and outreach strategies. (5:18)
  • Business valuation and acquisition strategies. (8:10)
  • Buyers and sellers in mergers and acquisitions. (14:47)
  • Business sale process and foreign investment constraints. (17:34)
  • Selling a business, focusing on narrative and information sharing. (24:18)
  • Private company sales and legal risks. (28:00)
  • The role of capital markets in the economy. (38:05)
  • Private equity’s role in the economy, including pros and cons. (44:10)

Links relevant to the conversation

About this episode’s guest Arthur Petropoulos:

https://hillviewps.com/leadership/

Arthur’s YouTube channel:

https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCZu4Nl6i5IseEJBqp1IPd3g

Hill View Partners social media:

https://www.linkedin.com/company/hillviewpartners/

Transcript: Uncovering the Secrets of Valuing and Selling Businesses w/ Arthur Petropoulos, Hill View Partners – EP211

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It was then looked over by a human, Tim Hughes from Adept Economics, just in case the otters missed anything whilst they were munching on fish. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Gene Tunny  00:01

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory, evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show.

Hello, thanks for tuning in to the show. I’m delighted to be joined this episode by Arthur Petropoulos, Founder and Managing Partner of Hill View Partners, which specialises in mergers and acquisitions, business sales and capital advisory services for middle market companies. We talk about how Arthur finds businesses to sell, how he values them and how he sells them. We also talk about the wider economic impacts of the work he does and the role of private equity. Should we be concerned about modern day Gordon Gekkos or were the 1980s different from today? Okay, let’s get into the episode. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Arthur Petropoulos.

Arthur Petropoulos from Hill View Partners, thanks for coming onto the show.

Arthur Petropoulos  01:22

Good to be here. Gene. I appreciate it. I like, contents great, listened to a bunch of it and happy to add to the archives.

Gene Tunny  01:30

Excellent Arthur, what I’m looking forward to is learning a bit more about what you do and in Hill View Partners and the broader community that you’re part of the broader industry. One of one of my favourite podcasts is David Bahnsen’s Capital Record. And David’s someone who’s always talking about the strength of American capital markets, and just what that contributes to the economy. So yeah, I’d be keen to explore that with you. To start off with, could you tell us a bit about what you do at Hill View Partners please?

Arthur Petropoulos  02:06

Sure. So fundamentally, our company helps companies do two things. We advise and assist companies in the sale of their business and we do the same for companies that are seeking to secure capital. So you can think of it investment banking business brokerage intermediary, but the simplest way to explain it is when you think of a real estate broker, or help people sell real estate, we do the same thing, but with businesses, and we’re helping people find capital for those businesses. And it’s a real area of specialisation and focus, privately held companies generating one to 10 million in pre tax profit, typically owned by families, entrepreneurs, small groups of investors. So in the broad scale of the economy, it’s kind of that line between the lower middle market and middle market, that’s our area of specialisation. And really where we focus.

Gene Tunny  02:53

Right and what sort of businesses would they be? I’m just trying to think I mean you’d have some professional services businesses, do you have bakeries or…

Arthur Petropoulos  03:02

So if you think of kind of the, and the reason why we started the business and folks in this space is I spent about 10 years in New York, doing this both on the investment banking side of helping companies as well as the private equity side of buying companies. And what we found is there’s this doughnut hole of sorts, where very large companies kind of work with the Wall Street investment banks, and then very small companies work with the local business brokers. But there’s a huge swath of stuff in between. So you might have a software company that it’s kind of it has a very specialised niche that generates a million or $2 million in profit a year. I think everybody thinks of software’s giant companies are just growth growth. There’s plenty of kind of very niche software’s dashboard, task force management, pricing tools for particular industries, whether it’s construction or satellite dish installation, it could be anything, right. And those companies are a lot of what we do a b2b and b2c services. So you could think of window cleaning companies we’ve sold or gutter cleaning or roofing companies or, you know, irrigation, those are broad Real Estate Services, then there’s just general kind of like specialty manufacturing or distribution companies. So we sold a company that sold cleanroom supplies into pharmaceutical companies. There’s another company that manufactured component parts that went into aeroplanes. And so what I will say the consistent theme for companies we represent so we really, we’re agnostic of industry, so so long as it fits the profitability criteria as well as kind of the complexion of ownership. But what you find after iterations and iterations is that companies in the size that we represent, are not competing on the cost of capital. They do not provide commodity products, and so whatever it’s b2b or b2c services products offering, where we’ll be is there will be something specialised about it, there’ll be something niche something proprietary, there’ll be something they do better than anybody whether they have just better economics, whether they have access to certain markets or customers, or whether they just have a capability or an aptitude that’s unique. There’s usually something so that’s, you know, that’s part of the fun. And part of the exercise is as we’re talking to new people, figuring out what kind of that secret element is to their, to their respective business.

Gene Tunny  05:18

Right? Can I ask you, how does it, how does it work? I mean, so say you’re in business broking. And you’re selling some of these businesses, you’re trying to get the best price for the the seller, and then you get obviously commission, I don’t need to know, you know, that’s probably proprietary and confidential, but I’m interested in, like, do they pick up the phone? Or do you go actively looking for these businesses? You’re in Rhode Island, are you driving around Providence, and you go up to New York City? I mean, how do you how do you do it?

Arthur Petropoulos  05:51

No, so I mean, look, we endeavoured to make this business a national and international business from the get go, because I think historically, it has been a hyper regional business where you have, you know, three guys sitting at the back of a bar, you know, drinking with the guy who owns a local lumberyard, right, or whatever the business may be. And I think as things have evolved, where middle market businesses have, now they’re doing much more national and international work, we find that there, it’s really about just having the dialogue with people and really understanding the objectives and facilitating the process. And so we work with companies all over the states, as well as international to a lesser degree, but Western, Eastern Europe, Southern Asia, then a small amount of Middle East, but it’s really about finding the business that meets kind of the size, ownership complexion, I think season and in the business lifecycle where they’re looking to accomplish one of these goals. But it’s a because it’s not, it’s not a hyperlocal business. Because there’s you can’t just drive up and down a main street or high street and find a lot of these things. They’re kind of, there’s more of them than you think in some places. And there’s less than you think in other places, right? It’s a it’s a quirky business, because you might not realise but there’s a large like, you know, pillow manufacturer down the street from you, or a software company that’s in just this nondescript building that does this thing. And so, our outreach, we do some direct outreach, whether it’s email, whether we’re chatting on LinkedIn, with people, we put out content that on LinkedIn, as well as YouTube, we have two videos going out every week, kind of just explaining different categories, we get a lot of inbound conversations from that. And then I think some of the best relationships and conversations you have are from other happy customers. And so every time a deal closes, and our client’s very happy, they do tell their friends and say, Hey, we know a firm that did a real good job for us and that and engenders some goodwill. So, you know, I think there’s this kind of direct outreach inbounds there’s some warm outreach from kind of relationships and referrals. And then there’s just kind of goodwill generated by I think, good results.

Gene Tunny  08:04

Good one, and in that process of the sale, like getting it ready for sale, are you, are you involved? Are you providing advice on business operations, governance, that sort of thing to try and improve the value of it at the sale?

Arthur Petropoulos  08:20

Yeah, I think there’s certain things that, that are malleable at that stage of the game. There’s other things where it’s a matter of characterization and kind of just understanding it and documenting because a lot of times the processes are there, the people are there. And it’s just a matter of kind of memorialising precisely what the different people do, how are they cross trained? What are their capabilities? What are the processes of the business relative to origination and sourcing of new business operations and the administration of the company as well as kind of the execution and fulfilment of the actual work? And so, most of these things are there. They just need to be crystallised as part of the narrative. And but look, there are time to time where as we’re having those dialogues, where there are things that, hey, you know, it would if this, we don’t want, we call kind of like single source reasons for failure, right? And so if there’s one employee that does this one very important thing, who else could do that if they couldn’t, right? Or if you’re getting certain raw goods from one particular source, what happens if you can’t get it from them? And so I do think it’s kind of parsing through each part of the business and trying to poke holes in it, that has a lot of good dialogue, because the more we can try to poke holes, the more we either get the answers as to why there’s a safeguard or, you know, it allows for the implementation and incorporation of a safeguard and mitigation means at that juncture.

Gene Tunny  09:46

And how would you know, if you’re getting a fair price, I mean, how do you know what sort of sort of price to to aim for there? Is it multiples of earnings or the how do you actually work that out? And also how do you do it across all these different industries you mentioned you’re industry agnostic. I mean, yeah, that you mean, you must have to get across a lot of new industries really quickly. How do you do that, Arthur?

Arthur Petropoulos  10:10

Sure. So by virtue of focusing, I think on the size of the profitability of the company, and by virtue of that it must be profitable. Capital tends to kind of work in different ecosystems. And what we find is that the delineation of ecosystems is much more predicated on the size of the company than necessarily the industry in terms of capital and in terms of acquirers, right. So you have, if it’s a not profitable business, but it’s growing fast, and it’s that venture capital world, or growth equity, right, that’s its own ecosystem, whereas private equity for the profitable companies that we work with, strategic acquirers in the middle market, that’s its own ecosystem. So it’s fascinating, but you’d be surprised at how many of the counterparties on the other side are looking kind of agnostic of industry as well. And more specific to size and complexion. And then kind of large private equity, and publicly traded companies have their own ecosystems as well. So we focus on our one ecosystem, which is important to do. And then but there is always kind of a specialised research that’s necessary for a particular industry, because there are quirks and idiosyncrasies with any industry as we’ve done, you know, 100 plus transactions as Hill View Partners, and I’ve done 100 plus transactions in my life before starting the company, you do learn kind of which, where to look and how to research different industries. And so it’s not so much that you need to know every industry, but you have to know what to look for in every particular industry. So as we kind of get into any particular new ones, and there’s not many that we have not been involved with, but we still take a fresh look towards it. You know, it’s a matter of finding who are the active parties, we have our own internal database, as well as some, we subscribe to external databases and Cap IQ, PitchBook Data, there’s a handful of them out there. And we do a lot of our own kind of proprietary research. I think the difference in largely what we do is, many intermediaries will just kind of gather all the information, puke it to the universe to 20,000 people and just wait for the phone ring. We are proactive, not reactive, we do a lot of research upfront. That way we’re pinpointing who to reach out to. And what that ultimately does, is A) it mitigates a lot of the kind of typical pain points. So shrinks the duration limits, distraction keeps the discretion generates better results. But also, it really fine tunes the conversation. So getting back to your question about multiples, that’s usually a good place to start, right? The fundamentals are the driver. So if we look at it, you’ll see like different stratas of size will usually have different multiple ranges. So a company that does a million dollars in EBITDA will generally trade at four to seven times EBITDA, a company that does 2 million will trade at five to seven, five to eight, maybe 3 million you probably see six to a four, 5 million, maybe you start getting towards nine, 5 million plus, can you get to 10 at 10 million, can you get to 12 times but there’s this multiples expansion. And candidly, I mean, that’s a lot of the private equity thesis, right is if you buy 10 $1 million companies for $6,000,000. Six times multiple for a million dollars of EBITDA for each acquisition, once you have 10 of those together, it’s worth 10 to 12 times EBITDA right? So that’s how you spend 60 and it’s worth 120. But our logic, our research is finding what the comps are, looking where it kind of falls in the strata. But then also, by doing research about finding where our client is the missing puzzle piece for someone’s bought a puzzle, right? So yes, well, you know, if we sold a company that made a certain type of widget, that mega widget company just doesn’t have this one thing to sell, right? We want to talk about that as a buy versus build opportunity for them. So yes, you have the fundamentals but the two other reasons why companies are bought are A) access to certain end markets, but B) proprietary capabilities. And so if it’s something special about what the company does, or if it has very unique access, then we can pivot the conversation to say, Well look, yes, you may think that there’s $1 million EBITDA company’s worth $6 million. However, it would cost you $15 million to start this company from scratch, to build, to take time the resources to allocate to try to build this. So maybe you can buy it for split the difference, right? And so what we say is we wanted to the fundamentals are the starting point. And then the access to capabilities and pivoting the dialogue to buy versus build. Those are the enhancing factors that hopefully we can get even better but to answer your question more simply a lot of research and a lot of conversations. That’s how we know we’re getting the best results.

Gene Tunny  14:46

Yeah, good one. Okay. And can I just clarify some things so you’re on the the sell side, you’re a business broker or an investment bank, or you’re similar, are you similar to an investment bank?

Arthur Petropoulos  15:00

Yeah, I mean, the key differentiator is investment banks deal with security. So they’re dealing with publicly traded companies for the most part, and we deal almost entirely with privately held companies. So that’s why we’re an M & A advisory firm would be the phrasing because we don’t deal with securities.

Gene Tunny  15:15

Yep. Gotcha. Okay. And private equity so they’re on the buy side. And is that companies like Carlyle Group, is it Carlyle is it?

Arthur Petropoulos  15:26

Yeah, so Carlyle, KKR, Blackstone are the really big ones. TPG, I mean, there’s a lot of them. And then there’s different stratas of them for size. There’s industry specialists. But yes, that’s generally the buy side are, so it used to be you’d have kind of two big buckets, you’d have private equity that were funded just to buy companies and sell them. And then you had strategic acquirers that were basically just large companies that would occasionally acquire smaller businesses or different capabilities. But now you have lots of strategic companies have have created corporate development and strategic acquisition groups. There’s private equity that buys strategic companies. And so it’s a bit more of a continuum. But yes, generally speaking, that is the buy side is companies and financial buyers and strategic buyers that are looking to make acquisitions. And we represent solely the sell side. So the companies that are looking to either sell or receive that capital.

Gene Tunny  16:22

Okay, so you mentioned your private equity, strategic acquirers. Could that include individuals or is it generally corporations at this or companies?

Arthur Petropoulos  16:34

So what’s interesting about the companies we work with, I was just telling someone, I believe we have the broadest swath of prospective acquirers for a company, right, like, if you were selling that bakery, you probably wouldn’t be selling it to a person or a few different people. Now, if you were selling a billion dollar company, you’re probably only selling it to private equity or a very large strategic company. But in our businesses say you’re selling a $2 million EBITDA company for $12 million, or $15 million, right? The buyers for that are going to be incredibly broad, it could be a publicly traded company, it could be a private equity firm, it could be a family office, it could be an independent sponsor, a search fund, a high net worth individual, right. So yes, it runs that whole spectrum. From of, of both size, and I wouldn’t, sophistication is not correlated entirely with size, right. So like sometimes the best buyer that knows something inside and out is just a person who’s obsessed with one particular field who really wants a company. And sometimes it’s the largest corporation. So the important part of our job is to just, you know, we say kiss a lot of frogs to find the prince, right or turn over, a lot of rocks to find gold, but it’s having all those dialogues, both within each category, and then across categories to make sure we’re finding the right the right home for a business.

Gene Tunny  17:54

Right and how long does it typically take to sell a business? Like once you get in touch, or once they get in touch or you find the business? You get the the contract to, to, you know, you’ve got the agreement to, I mean, I imagine you’re going to be an exclusive seller is that correct? You’re that…

Arthur Petropoulos  18:14

Yes.Yeah.

Gene Tunny  18:16

Gotcha. Okay, what what’s, how long would it typically take?

Arthur Petropoulos  18:19

This is not a shameless self promotion. But if you weren’t using Hill View Partners right, these processes can take, you know, 18 to 24 months. We want in the part of why that proactive versus reactive process is important is we want six month processes we want offers within 100 days. And then after the 100 day mark, it’s really the confirmatory diligence from an acquirer, but we have the process broken down and crystallised into different component parts. That way, the day we sign an engagement with a client, we are getting the information that we need, putting our materials together and doing the research about the acquirer so that we’re out there in the market within two to three weeks talking to people. We’ve pushed the dialogues through a process of asking people for follow up questions, having conversations, Zoom meetings, indications of interest, letters of intent, there’s, we have a lot of steps along the way to keep shaking the tree, if you will, right. And so that way, every time you shake the tree, things fall away, and things fall away, right. And that’s the fastest way to get to the conclusion, while not losing any of the substance cohesion or comprehensive approach to it. And so we find our processes we can run in a six month process, if sometimes it’ll slip a month or two, depending on if the diligence has taken too long, depending on negotiations, but largely speaking, six months start to finish. That’s the goal, and we stick to it.

Gene Tunny  19:44

Gotcha. And in the US, what are the rules around foreign investment like so if you’ve got a foreign company or or you know, high net worth individual wanting to buy a business in America, how does that is that a constraint is there, are there barriers there?

Arthur Petropoulos  20:01

I mean, not really because it doesn’t tend to be, you know, if you’re getting the foreign investors that will come and acquire businesses in the states are largely part of larger organisations that have a global business that’s doing something, right. Like the probability that someone’s going to want to move from Dubai to Oklahoma to buy a water hauling company is probably low. So, you know, candidly, we’ve had people I mean, look, I mean, it’s more likely, you know, that hey, someone’s moving it from, you know, from London and, and they want to buy a business in New England somewhere. I’ve seen those things. So Oh, no, it’s it hasn’t been an issue on our part. I guess there were a couple businesses that were a little sensitive relative to they sold into the aerospace and defence industry. So there was some prohibition against even then we were just told, like, don’t even bother talking to people in these countries, because couldn’t sell to them anyways. But that’s, that’s where we’ve seen so less about the individual or more if there’s kind of sensitive stuff that’s going into government agencies or something that they don’t want to have the exposure to foreign ownership.

Gene Tunny  21:09

Yeah, yeah. Just back on the sale process. So do you have a Expression of Interest process? And then you have a tender process? So how does that work?

Arthur Petropoulos  21:18

Yeah. So so we don’t we don’t go out there with an asking price on something, right? I mean, we can give some guidance in the sense that if someone says, Well, what are they looking for, this or that we can say well, you know, we’re seeing comps, we’re seeing transactions for companies like this falling in this range. Because we don’t want it to always just focus on the dollar amount too because the structure matters, the transition period for ownership matters, what happens to the stakeholders, the employees, the community, the buildings, that whatever it is, right, there’s a lot of variables. And so we’ll provide a little bit of guidance. But largely speaking, we let the process determine the price because the people we’re talking to are sophisticated parties, they know what these things trade for. And, and I think people know, we’re pretty communicative in the sense that we say, Look, if, if you’re looking to just kind of kick the tires and lob something in here, like don’t waste your time, like don’t waste our time either. And so we’re able to get down to the real bonafide parties quick. And in the process. Typically, there’ll be dialogue questions going back and forth, we have a data room that we populate, but we’re usually asked for an indication of interest, and then a letter of intent. So what that means is, send us an email tell us generally how you valuing this, how are you looking at structure this or that, because then we can have a constructive dialogue with the prospective acquirer so that when they finally put something forward on letterhead, they now have a good sense as to how probable it is that it’s gonna work. And it’s kind of had some dialogue, if you will, or discussion. So we like to have information sharing conversations, indication of interests, and more communication form a letter of intent. And a lot of that happens from day 60 to 90 of a process.

Gene Tunny  23:02

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  23:08

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis studies and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  23:37

Now back to the show.

Can I ask you about how you promote or advertise the businesses? I’m just thinking about real estate. And I mean, you look at some of the things that real estate agents are doing now particularly in, in capital cities in Australia, where people are mad about real estate, you know, they’ve got these cinematic type videos, they’ve got the the houses all dressed up, they’ve put a lot of work into it. And they’ve got these really impressive videos. I imagine you have a prospectus of some kind, like, how do you how do you promote it?

Arthur Petropoulos  24:14

Yeah, I would say there’s less style points in this business. Right? The because it’s less of an emotional acquisition for the most part, right? Like it has to make fundamental sense for companies to buy things. They’re buying capabilities. They’re buying access, like you know, it’s slightly a different sale than saying like, you know, imagine drinking you know, hot chocolate on the veranda on a Friday night, right? So, the product or if you will, or the thing that’s actually transacting has a slightly different approach. Now, that being said, must be professional must be crisp, clear, concise, but the substance of the narrative is more valuable than the form if you will. And so we communicate to the to the prospective acquirers. We have materials that we put together, it’s in our space, we found like the 100 page pitch book, you just everything gets drowned out in, in the one page thing is far too brief. So we have a happy medium that provides kind of the high level overviews of all the things that are important. We have data rooms that we support back, but we kind of sequence or phase the sharing of information. So that way we make sure people are focusing on the optimal or the key elements of it first. But yeah, so it’s it’s, it’s clean, it’s crisp, it’s direct. It’s not as not as razzle dazzle as some other things. But the goal being to communicate the narrative clearly, communicate the value proposition clearly to the prospective acquirer, and getting their attention. Because, you know, the trick in this business sometimes is that if we’re representing a small company to a very big company, the hardest part of that dialogue is getting the first part of their attention, right? If we can get their eyeballs on it, and they like it, well, then it just creates traction amongst themselves, right? Because now they’re saying, Well, this is interesting, want to look at it want to learn more, and they have their own momentum. And at a certain point, they don’t really care what I want to tell them, they care what they want to look at, right? And so they say, Well, I want to learn more about this and learn more about that. So you can’t drown them out with your own narrative. But you do have to make sure you’re giving them enough for not too much and get the attention. And then if the attention leads to interest, it kind of becomes self fulfilling at that point.

Gene Tunny  26:24

Gotcha. And what if, say, I’m looking at, I don’t know a plumbing supplies business in Milwaukee or something like that, could I actually, and I’m a prospective buyer, could I line up a visit to the, the company’s premises and talk to the management?

Arthur Petropoulos  26:41

Sure. At a certain point of the conversation. So we try to phase things out, right? Like, you should be able to, if you are the plumbing supply distributor guy, and you know, this business, right, so we have to kind of validate prospective buyers. So what’s your track record? What’s your history? What’s your industry knowledge? What’s your financial capability to do these things? And let’s say you check out on all these things, well, then you really should be able to give an offer, or at least a skeleton of an offer just based on numbers and conversations with ownership, right. And so there is a certain, so only when we get to like a high level structure, that you would, you can at least put the ? on the back of an envelope. And that ownership can get on board with that we then pivot to you know, whether it’s an in person meeting, facility review, I think the problem with a lot of intermediaries is they allow too much access too soon. And it’s like, you know, this isn’t a field trip, right? Like, we’re not looking to have like 25 people come around and kick the tires and things because it creates an environment of instability for the employees. It’s not good, right? And so you really don’t want to do that until, you know you have something and we try to push. And it’s a tug of war sometimes, but we really try to push things as far as we can. Before we’re doing anything, that could be a disruption.

Gene Tunny  28:00

Gotcha. And you mentioned so you’re trying to validate or vet the buyers, is that that’s a risk mitigation measure I it? Are you, I mean, you’re I guess you want to protect the legacy of the business for the person who sells it. Like, what’s the what’s the thinking there?

Arthur Petropoulos  28:19

It’s not so much from a, I guess it’s qualitative in a way, right? Like, we’re not gonna we don’t want to sell businesses to criminals, or people who have bad track records, you know, in terms of like treating employees and stuff. But, you know, we also don’t, you know, it’s not like, oh, I don’t want it to what’s the Aussie word, you know, a bug in some way, right? Like we don’t like so it doesn’t get to that level, where it’s like, I don’t want these kinds of people or those kinds of, it’s really about capability. It’s about, you know, it’s about industry experience knowledge, feeling comfortable, that they would be a good steward of the business from a fundamentals perspective. Because you’d be surprised. I mean, you know, we always joke and say it’s separating the prospects from the suspects. But it’s, you there’s, there’s a lot of people out there that I think are looking at businesses is like, you know, when you sell a house, right, like you ever sell a house and you put the house for sale, and take buyer, the neighbours show up? Yeah. And it’s like they’re not buying the house. And it’s like that same neighbour, it’s like their hobby is to go look at houses every weekend, right? And they just go in and they like, eat the food and kick around and like, take some paper towels. And so in business, you’d be surprised that a lot of the same names show up and so we want real buyers, but we don’t want to waste any time. There’s no value. There’s no style points to fluffing up the numbers of interested parties on the front end. It’s no good for anybody. So it’s more about capability and are they a bonafide prospect. And and you know, qualitatively, are they going to be the right steward. It’s less about, you know, did they go to a proper preparatory boarding school. It’s more about actual capabilities.

Gene Tunny  30:01

Yeah, yeah. And is this regulated Arthur? Like I imagine it’s not SEC, but are there state regulations around this? I mean, what’s the

Arthur Petropoulos  30:10

Yeah, and there are there are SEC regulations pertaining to private company sales, you know, relative to sizing and structure of deals in a way that does not kind of conflate with securities. And then state by state, there’s different considerations depending on on what it is, for the most part, though, this is it’s kind of free market, third party transactions to other people who are owning things. And, you know, not many of these transactions are going to be either, you know, pivotal to national defence, or, you know, under like, Hart Scott Rodino Act for like, antitrust and stuff like that. I mean, these tend to be, you know, if you said, What is kind of the typical situation, it’s a company that does a thing, either for a particular product or geography, there’s a giant company or bigger company that does it everywhere else, and wants to get access to their geography, and they kind of bolt them on. So. And that’s, you know, sometimes it’s merger of equals, sometimes it’s just one person, but a lot of times it’s kind of the aggregation strategy that’s looking to bolt something on. And so it is regulated, and there’s certainly laws and rules to it. But it’s not to the same level of securities, because not dealing with, you know, selling shares, small amounts of shares to large number of kind of passive investors.

Gene Tunny  31:31

Gotcha. Is there much legal risk on the seller side, I’m thinking, I mean, you know, with any sort of tender process or auction, there’s always, you know, there’ll always be a significant number of people where there’s the the winners curse, so to speak. How do you deal with that?

Arthur Petropoulos  31:47

Yeah, so part of the negotiation. And so once we have a deal, basically, under a letter of intent, you enter into the diligence phase, in which case, the buyer puts forward a purchase and sale agreement for the consummation of the transaction. So unlike real estate, where you have a purchase and sale agreement that you sign, and then you enter into diligence, in corporate transactions, you sign a letter of intent, you do the diligence, and then the purchase and sale agreement is signed, kind of coterminous with the closing of the transaction. But within that, within the purchase and sale agreement are representations and warranties both ways, right. There’s disclosure schedules, so that a seller would have to say, Are there any pending litigation? Is there any complaints? Or what are the customers you’ve lost? There’s things that have to be put in there. And from a buyer’s perspective, they have to say, what they are willing to take, you know, at face value. And so the way we an old, an old mentor of mine said, reps and warranties are there for, you know, fraud, willful misrepresentation, things like that, to protect buyers against, but it is not in what he called, he said, It’s not schmuck insurance, right? It’s not, it’s not insurance that you paid, you didn’t pay too much, or you didn’t know this and do that, right. Like, this is a business between sophisticated parties. And so if a seller sells a company, you know, without using a person like us, and they don’t get a good price and don’t get a good structure, they really don’t have any recourse to complain about it, because that’s the deal they agreed to. Buyers similarly if they, you know, if it’s not, if it’s not in the contract, then then it’s, it’s not part of it. So point is, it sounds more adversarial than it is. There’s just kind of customary reps and warranties that very clearly define what the post transaction risk or exposure is from both parties. They are negotiated pretty heavily by the attorneys. And, you know, as it pertains to the business elements, we get involved as well. But our general positioning on it is we want to protect the buyers from fraud from, you know, willful misrepresentation things we don’t know, which don’t happen with the clients that we work with. But what we don’t want is for anybody to just say, like, I bought the company, I mismanaged it. And now I want, you know, some money back because I didn’t do the right thing, right? That’s not That’s what we avoid. And nobody really asked for that. But we don’t want it to be grey.

Gene Tunny  34:15

Right. So do you engage the lawyer or does the seller engage the lawyer?

Arthur Petropoulos  34:21

It depends on the situation. And it depends on what kind of an attorney a seller’s using. And so sometimes, if a seller is using a corporate attorney for a lot of activities that they’re with they’ll say, hey, I really want our attorney in the mix here. And that’s perfectly fine. We work with lots of people’s attorneys and that usually when we get the letter of intent, negotiated but not signed, that’s typically when they come into the process review that and then we work alongside them shepherding diligence. But there are other times where people say like, you know, I you know, my attorney is a great guy. He’s a great friend. You know, he helped me buy my flat in Brisbane, but you you know, I have a $50 million business, maybe he will play a part in the process. But do you have someone that you can bring in that just does corporate transactions all day, in which case, we have a global network of people that we’ve worked with, that we can bring in, depending on the locale of the business. So it’s situational. And we can work with clients either way, depending on their preference, but we always keep a strong roster of, of attorneys. And I, what I’d say is the right types of attorneys, because you can have, you know, anybody can pick up the phone book and call up the most expensive law firm in the world. But it’s where do you find kind of that optimal mix of value and capability? And so whether it’s people that have spun off of the big law firms running smaller boutiques that are slightly off the radar, or are more tactical people, we like those kinds of relationships.

Gene Tunny  35:46

Yeah, very good. I should ask Arthur, how did you get in, how did you get into this? I mean, you mentioned you worked on Wall Street. Could you just tell us a bit about what you studied? And did that help you get into Wall Street and then your path to Hill View? Partners, please?

Arthur Petropoulos  36:03

Yeah, sure. So when I grew up, my father used to read, he had a very broad spectrum of books he was interested in, and ideas. And so I remember, you know, it was gonna be Plato’s Republic or Aesop’s Fables. But he read a lot of history books to us. And so I remember going through like, you know, Amerigo Vespucci, he was travelling the world selling pickles or the Dutch West Indies Company was fine, you know, whether it was silk or spices, but it felt like the history of the world was the history of business and war for other things, but business, right commerce, and, you know, the idea of a finite amount of resources and an infinite amount of want. And so when I studied more and I would get into like the industrialization of America, and, you know, Carnegie Steel turning into US Steel, and all of these aggregations, I found the combination of business transactions of finance of growth and in aggregation of industry to be fascinating. And when I grew up, the only people I knew that who really had their hands in these things were always attorneys, you hear like, oh, this attorney just helped this person sell this company. Because I do think particularly in days past, I think a lot of attorneys kind of served a dual role in these things. And they still are, you know, key advisors to companies. But so I went to law, I studied undergrad business, I actually wanted, I wanted to get a minor in music theory, I played the piano. But I remember my mom said, if you want to play the piano, you can just leave school and stay in the living room. But we, but anyway business was the key focus in undergrad, and I went to law school, and law school doesn’t have majors, but you can effectively create your own focus. And so we created or I focused on corporate transactions, both from a mergers and acquisitions and financing perspective. And it was when I was in law school that I was reading the case law, you’d have to study of your KKR and acquiring Nabisco and Philip Morris, and this and that. And when you started reading all of these cases, you’d say, well, who is that? And how do they work? And how does this work? And so once I figured out, what is an investment bank, what is a private equity firm? How does capital work, who are these lenders, that’s when I think the world kind of opened up and I said, Ah, like, there’s this whole ecosystem of corporate transactions and all these participants in it. And then I realised, you know, although I believe the law degree is phenomenal in terms of understanding the allocation of risk and structuring of things. I found that, you know, the investment banking was a bit more firmly in line with where my interest was. And so it’s not an atypical path in the sense that I think Lloyd Blankfein and Brian Moynihan and Sam Zell like they all actually had law degrees, because I think they went through a similar kind of learning exercise. And so even that’s, that’s how I was in law school. And then did whatever a young guy looking for a job, you know, picked up the phone and found lists of names and called and called and called and got a job helping middle market companies sell themselves and then went to the buying side and had a few jobs in New York and then said, Hey, we should start our own thing, came back to Rhode Island to do that. And here we are today a little wiser, and with a little more grey hair.

Gene Tunny  39:19

And I mean, there’s no disadvantage to being in Rhode Island I imagine is there?

Arthur Petropoulos  39:24

You know what, there was a time but I think it predated me a little bit where if you wanted to be in finance in the States, it was either really LA or New York. And then you saw outposts pop up in Houston for oil and gas businesses or, you know, Florida because of how many New Yorkers moved there. You know Boston for pharmaceutical businesses. But my notion when we started Hill View was it was already felt like no one really cared where anyone was, as long as A) you could get to where you need it to be, and B) you produce results and B was far more important than any other stuff. So, so no, I mean, I think like we sit right between Boston and New York. So it is a nice hub to kind of do stuff locally, but we’re doing things all over the world at this juncture. And, you know, again, so long as we produce the results, then, you know, it doesn’t matter if we’re in San Francisco or Saskatchewan.

Gene Tunny  40:05

Yeah, yeah. Because even if you did take a meeting in New York City, for example, what’s that a couple hours away is it at most?

Arthur Petropoulos  40:19

Yeah three hours.

Gene Tunny  40:21

Three hours. Gotcha. Okay. Righto. So before we wrap up, Arthur, I’d like to ask I mean, like what do you see as the value that you’re adding to the economy or the business brokers, then we might talk about the other side of it, the private equity, because there are a lot of there’s a lot of negativity out there about private equity, a lot of concerns about market concentration, and these leveraged buyouts and all of that. So could you just talk about what you see as the benefits to the economy of you’re, what you’re doing to start with please?

Arthur Petropoulos  41:04

Sure, I believe that, you know, capital and transactions are kind of the the oil that facilitates or greases the skids for the economy in the sense that transactions have always taken place. But if you read about, you know, John Rockefeller going through Standard Oil, I mean, he was just kind of bludgeoning people and buying things for nickels and in like, you know, there was a lot of unfair competitive practices. Whereas I think, as the capital markets, and as the M & A markets have evolved, it’s facilitated things so that they happen faster, so that they happen in fairer terms for the selling party. And ultimately, I think, allow for the evolution of industry on a quicker and more efficient basis. And also, I think bolster, economic, competitive positioning, you know, particularly for domestic companies, versus kind of international, you know, many times like you have US conglomerates, competing against, you know, state run organisations in other countries, right. So the only way you’re going to compete is on scale and is own size and is on innovation. You know, there’s always that joke about politics, they say, the number one rule of economics is the idea of scarcity, that there’s more want than there is stuff. And the number one rule of politics is to ignore the number one rule of economics. And so I forgot what economist said that but so in reality, right, there’s scarcity. And there’s, there’s scarcity of talent, there’s scarcity of stuff of services of goods. And so the further you can evolve any particular industry, it does allow for even as painful as it can be the reallocation of human capital, to things that are less efficient, right. And so it’s almost this, like, it does push things forward, like, you know, irrespective of how much anybody could complain about, you know, life in America in 2023. Like, it’s hard to argue that, like, your life is not just as good as like a mediaeval King, right, like you have. I mean, literally, I’m sitting in a chair right now, I’ve got the Library of Alexandria, in my pocket, I can have more pizzas show up at my door in a half an hour than then I can ever eat. I mean, it’s like, it’s amazing. But the only reason all of these things happened is because, you know, the guy said, Hey, I have one pizza place, I could own 10 pizza places, and we should do delivery. And then so, you know, Little Caesars and Pizza Hut and Domino’s. Right. And so it’s like, I think that there’s, there’s places and ways to kind of rein in just the pure animal spirits that can come out with that. But at the same time, I mean, that is why for all of our black eyes, you know, the, you know, the most capital, capitalist focused countries have been the most economically dominant because they allow for that. And I think that the part that we play as intermediaries in the capital, intermediaries is facilitating the efficiency of that exercise and allowing for innovation and consolidation on a quicker and effective basis and protect while protecting the interests of those who contributed to the evolution right to the sellers of companies.

Gene Tunny  44:10

Gotcha. And what about on the buyer side, the private equity, do you have any thoughts on on that side? There’s this caricature of Gordon Gekko going in and, you know, the concerns about loading companies up with debt and stripping money out of companies and, and sacking lots of workers. Do you have any thoughts on that? Do you think private equity adds value out there in the economy?

Arthur Petropoulos  44:37

Absolutely. Because I mean, I think that they very much are the facilitators of innovation and consolidation. Right? It’s capital. It’s looking for return on capital that’s doing that. But you know, taking a few steps back, you know, if you think of the United States economy, a lot of that kind of Gordon Gekko element was a bit of an idiosyncratic situation. So you had, you know, let’s say, we leave World War Two and all all of these conglomerate companies start to form, right? Because they basically apply like war learned processes and they just say, we’ll buy everything right and putting it together. And so you had, you know, CBS owned the Steinway Piano Company, and you had all these, like things that came together because they figured they could just run the same process. And so you hit the 1970s, you have huge inflation, because of too much money printing and we won’t get into that. And then Nixon takes the dollar off the gold standard, inflation goes through the roof values of companies go down. And so you start to see all of these companies where it’s like, you’ve got five different companies combined, that all do different things, and no one knows how to value any of it. Because it’s like, you know, the same company owns Jello pudding that owns like, you know a concrete company, or whatever it might be. So the initial premise of it was buying under, under, misunderstood assets that were put together incorrectly, and disaggregating them in a way that allowed for a better value of each constituent element. Secondly, there was a lot of, you remember the Gordon Gekko speech about, you know, tell their paper company when he’s saying like, all of the executives own 1% of the company, and they’re just pillaging it from cash. There was a certain glut of industry in that time period of inefficiency, that was losing kind of our competitive positioning on a global basis. So you can make the argument that and this is where it gets tricky it because, yes, there were a lot of layoffs. But truly it created efficiencies and companies that allowed them to be globally competitive reallocating the human capital to industries, you know, that made that were more ripe for innovation. Now, there’s pain that goes along with that. And then it’s not to be ignorant of the fact that there were a lot of greedy people involved, right, like all of that leverage was not necessary to accomplish these things, it was just a way of choosing the, you know, choosing the return. So the pendulum goes back and forth. And anytime it goes too far, it will pull back, what I would say is that the modern incarnation of private equity has largely been one of innovation and scale, right. And so buying up a lot of small companies and aggregating them, I think, the biggest myth in private equity in today’s environment. Now, I’m not saying if private equity goes out and buys a bloated software company and fires a bunch of people. But you know, that wasn’t making any profit. But I’m saying when private equity goes out there and buys an aggregation of distribution or manufacturing companies, they want to keep the people, the people are the valuable part. That’s where there’s scarcity. So in today’s environment, that notion of over levered like financial engineering and layoffs is really, I think, a relic in private equity in today’s environment does a lot more, I think, good than harm, and a lot of those excesses have been had been pulled in. That’s not to say, you know, there’s not exceptions to that. But in today’s environment, they are a accelerant of aggregation and innovation, I think in in industry as they consolidate different businesses.

Gene Tunny  47:59

Okay, very good. Arthur that’s been terrific, I’ve learned a lot I learned, I hope you don’t mind, I grilled you over the process and what you do exactly. And I mean I learned a lot about how this, these transactions occur. So thanks, heaps for that. That was great. Tell us about your, your outreach, or your YouTube and newsletter or whatever, please. That’d be great.

Arthur Petropoulos  48:23

Yeah, so I’d say check us out on YouTube at Hill View Partners, if you just typed in Arthur Petropoulos, you’d come up on and on LinkedIn our company page Hil View Partners both on YouTube and LinkedIn, we put out two videos a week, talking about just different topics in the mergers and acquisitions and capital world kind of recurring themes, almost like an FAQ of the things we’re always talking about. And then reach out to us, either on LinkedIn, myself, or the company page, or on our homepage, hillviewps.com. So hillview, P as in Peter, S as in sam .com, where you can reach out and set some time up as well. But that’s where to where to find us. And on a, you know, on a closing thought, not to get too philosophical, but I think I think anytime you kind of take a position, that something is just entirely wrong or entirely right, or you’re you’re missing a lot of the nuance, right? And so a lot of the economy has excess in both ways. Right? And so, there are, you know, have there been situations where, you know, companies have been too greedy? Yes. Have there been situations where, you know, look at the industrialization of what America had lots of greed there, right? Look at situations where the unions were too greedy and look at how the steel disappeared in the 1970s. Right, so like, so I think the key to being good at our job, and I won’t extrapolate it enough to say good at anything is like you must understand nuance, you must understand subtlety. There’s four sides to every story and the truth sits somewhere in between and so it’s our job to kind of see reality for what it is not necessarily what we wish it would be. And by virtue of taking that kind of sober yet realistic look on things you know, we’re not, we’re not people that are always cynical and say it’s bad. We’re not people that are always optimistic and it’s always good. But we say, life is hard. The world can be a nasty place. But there are glimpses of good and nice things along the way. And we, we, we like those. And so any event for what it’s worth, that’s our that’s our view of the universe that you didn’t ask for. But this is a this has been good Gene, I appreciate it.

Gene Tunny  50:22

Very good, Arthur. I’ve really enjoyed it. And yep, I like having rounding it out with that philosophical thought. So I think that’s terrific. So yep. Very good. Arthur Petropoulos from Hill View Partners. Thanks so much for the conversation. I really enjoyed it.

Arthur Petropoulos  50:37

Likewise Gene. Appreciate it.

Gene Tunny  50:41

Righto, thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

51:28

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this where to begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

From Adelaide to Global Power: Young Rupert Murdoch w/ Walter Marsh – EP210

Journalist Walter Marsh talks about his new book “Young Rupert: The Making of the Murdoch Empire.” Walter and show host Gene Tunny discuss Rupert Murdoch’s early years in Adelaide, South Australia and how they shaped his later career. From challenging established systems to becoming a globally influential media mogul, Murdoch’s career has been highly controversial. 
Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored.

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Walter Marsh

Walter Marsh is a journalist based in Tarntanya/Adelaide with a background in history and culture. A former editor and staff writer at The Adelaide Review and Rip It Up, his writing has appeared in The Guardian, The Monthly, The Saturday Paper, and InDaily.

What’s covered in EP210

  • Rupert Murdoch’s career and the making of the Murdoch empire. (0:00)
  • Rupert Murdoch’s life and career. (3:09)
  • The origins of Rupert Murdoch’s media empire in Adelaide. (8:16)
  • Newspaper circulation wars in Adelaide. (14:01)
  • The business strategies of a successful entrepreneur. (20:28)
  • A controversial murder case and its aftermath in Australia. (23:35)
  • A historical libel trial involving Rupert Murdoch and his newspaper. (28:09)
  • Media, power, and ethics in the Rupert Murdoch era. (33:20)
  • Rupert Murdoch’s legacy. (38:15)

Links relevant to the conversation

You can purchase Young Rupert via Amazon:

https://www.amazon.com.au/Young-Rupert-making-Murdoch-empire/dp/1761380044

Author’s website:

https://waltermarsh.com.au/

Transcript: From Adelaide to Global Power: Young Rupert Murdoch w/ Walter Marsh – EP210

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Walter Marsh  00:00

I found it very telling that in this period where he is kind of the good guy challenging systems that were overdue for a challenge and these elite establishments that were kind of begging to be shaken up and undermined. You know, the variables were so different when he started but this kind of dynamic have always been the inside or outside of sticking it to these establishments kind of set the groundwork for everything that came afterwards.

Gene Tunny  00:32

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. Last month in September 2023, it was announced that Rupert Murdoch would be stepping down as chairman of the Fox News corporations in November with the possible exception of William Knox, Darcy Murdoch’s been the Australian businessman who’s had the greatest impact on world affairs. He’s had an extraordinary and of course highly controversial career. And believe it or not at all began Adelaide, the city of churches in South Australia. Adelaide journalist Walter Marsh has written a great book about Murdoch’s defining years in Adelaide in the 1950s. The book is called Young Rupert, the making of the Murdoch empire. And I’m delighted to have been able to interview Walter for the show. You’ll learn about how the fear satellite newspaper circulation will set Murdoch on a path to domestic and then global expansion. And you’ll learn about how Murdoch figured out he needed to get close to the politically powerful if he was to succeed. Young Rupert’s a great book, so please consider buying it and supporting a really talented journalist. Details are in the shownotes Okay, let’s get into the episode. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Walter Marsh on young Rupert Walter Marsh, thanks for joining me on the programme.

Walter Marsh  02:18

Thanks for having me, Gene.

Gene Tunny  02:20

It’s a pleasure, Walter. I’ve really enjoyed reading your new book, young Rupert, the making of the Murdoch empire. So came out earlier this year, it’s become even more topical with with Rupert Murdoch stepping down as the head of News Corp the other week. So this is really good timing. So it’s good to have you on the show.

Walter Marsh  02:44

It’s been a pretty crazy to the books been out for two months, and it all the way through writing it. I you know, you’ve conscious when you’re writing a book about a 92 year old that there are certain inevitable deadlines, I guess that you’re on the playing in the back of your mind. But the fact that’s come out that this this resignation happened after the book came out, works pretty well. So I’ve been keeping very busy. So thanks for having me on.

Gene Tunny  03:09

Pleasure. Yeah, so just thinking he’s got good genes, I think because his mother lived until over 100 or nearly 200, if I remember correctly.

Walter Marsh  03:17

Yeah. And there’s a recurring thing in the book as well as people have observed and I didn’t want to, you know, body shame a young Rupert Murdoch. But a few people observed that he were on quite a bit of weight in his 20s. But then I was finding when I was researching the last chapter, which sort of takes the story full circle in the 80s. That these reports on these takeover attempts of the Hilda weekly times when he came back to to Australia in the 80s. And they often started with the sort of doorstop interviews that he was taking whilst going for his morning jog, in his, you know, running short shorts. And so clearly, either one of his co workers or one of his wives whispered in his ear, Hey, your dad died of a heart attack in his 60s and had many health problems got to really become a thing. Other people did describe him as a fitness freak later in life. So he got the memo.

Gene Tunny  04:12

Yes, yes. And his father, of course, was Keith Murdoch, the famous newspaperman. So we might talk about him a bit a bit later, before we get into it. Walter, would you be able to tell me a bit about your, your work as a journalist? Are you a freelancer or your independent journalist at the moment?

Walter Marsh  04:29

Yeah, I’m a bit of freelance for the past three years. Before that I was. I worked as the digital editor of the Adelaide review, which was a long running sort of arts culture magazine, here in Adelaide, that shut down in 2020, sort of as a result of the pandemic. So that kind of was the big push that it took to get cracking on this book project that I’ve been thinking about for a few years. So I’ve kind of come from that culture and arts reporting background, but also In history as well, I’ve been working in the history space and studied at uni. And there was at uni when maybe 10 years ago now that I first started looking into this area as my honours thesis, right. So I did that kind of saw a lot of the sources, a lot of the the narratives that later inform the book, but then happily put on a shelf for the best part of 10 years and tried to work as a journalist. But you know, the way the industry was going, it led me inevitably to go back and think about writing this book. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  05:30

And where was your Where did you do your thesis? Which university? The University of Adelaide? Good one. Okay. All right. And that’s on. Is that on North Terrace? Yeah. And is that near? I mean, Adelaide. So it’s quite compact, isn’t it? So you’d be close to where a lot of the events in you would have been close to where a lot of the events in this book took place, wouldn’t you?

Walter Marsh  05:51

Well, we so much of the events of this book, the Adelaide stuff at least happened? Yeah, on North Terrace. It’s a long street, but they really crafted cram a lot in there.

Gene Tunny  05:58

Yeah. And lots of old, you know, the famous buildings, the parliament, the railway station, if I remember correctly, grand old colonial buildings. So yes, yes. Very good. And can I ask have you ever worked for the Murdoch? Corporation for News Corp?

Walter Marsh  06:18

Yeah, it’s a great question. I did. And I kind of touched upon it in the book, just at the end. But I, when my first big job in the media, editing this sort of street press music, magazine website called rip it up that close down. And one of the things I’ve found about being made redundant in the media and the publication closing down is it’s a very public way of saying I’m unemployed and solid, please hire me. So someone reached out and I did probably the things a month that most in 2016 of, of copyediting work as a freelancer for a food guide that the advertiser were publishing. So that was my little experience inside Keith Murdoch house, which was the launch of that magazine after I’d finished working there. That is the informs the opening scene of the book, and this rooftop party. So that was my experience. Really. Yeah. And that was an interesting time as well, because it was 2016. And even though I was in this very kind of inoffensive corner of the Murdoch for the Empire, it was you know, Trump was in the background debating Hillary and the 2016 blackout happened while I was in the office. So it was an interesting time.

Gene Tunny  07:30

Yes, yeah. Remember that now? Now you mentioned it. And that’s the that’s quite a striking building out in Adelaide. Is that the Keith Murdock house, if I remember correctly? Yeah. So

Walter Marsh  07:39

yeah, way mastery. It’s this big, big glass building that they built less than 20 years ago, and before that, they had this big 1960s building, which really got opened just at the end of the events that are focused on in the book as well. But yeah, it’s definitely looms large over over Adelaide, even though in the last couple of years, because, you know, News Corp has shed a lot of workers lately that I think, as of when I published the book, multiple floors were actually rented out to SA Health, the government health department, so that an E News Corp doesn’t even fill it up anymore.

Gene Tunny  08:14

Right? Oh, yeah, exactly. Given what’s happened with with media. We can chat about that a bit later. So, Walter, I’d like to begin by reading from your summary. I think this is terrific. How you’ve, you’ve summarised this so this is one of your this is a note from the author. For as long as I can remember, my hometown Adelaide, has been a one paper town, a capital city, whose sole daily newspapers been owned by Rupert Murdoch’s use limited for the past 30 years. As I grew up, I realised the company behind this press monopoly extended far beyond my city, was a vast and controversial media empire with global reach. From the cartoons. I watched to the tabloids and cable news networks raising the temperature of Western democracies. And Adelaide wasn’t just a piece of that story. It was ground zero. Although, can you explain how Adelaide was ground zero for the Murdoch empire, please?

Walter Marsh  09:09

Yeah, I mean, it’s the sort of the starting point really, of the book. But in terms of the greater Murdoch story, it really, when piecing together the narrative, you can see that it could have gone a number of different ways. So it really the story starts. And the book starts with Rupert’s father, Sir Keith Murdock, who had spent his whole life his whole career building his name in journalism. He had started off as a freelancer as a reporter and sort of worked his way up over decades, to be the chairman of the Herald and weekly times and he really built that into a nation wide press Empire really. But he was sort of a manager really didn’t actually own that company. So the last few years of his life was spent really carefully trying to build stitch together this sort of separate Separate empire that he could hand over to his son Rupert. And sometimes that involves some, you know, some almost underhanded tactics of convincing the board of the Herald to sell off things like News Limited to him in a private capacity and used, I think it was there’s a, the British Parliament had a Royal Commission into monopoly. And he kind of used that as a as impetus to offload some of their Adelaide holdings. So they didn’t get accused of a press monopoly, but that played into a kid’s hands. So he had the Adelaide interests. He also had a magazine publisher Southdown press in Melbourne, which published new idea, this women’s magazine still going, I think, and there was also the Courier Mail and Queensland press, in Queensland, in Brisbane. And that was the kind of the crux of what Rupert was in line to inherit. But then, because the family itself, you know, Keith had been this a newspaper executive for his whole life. But he wasn’t necessarily a very rich, or at least a liquid sort of rich man himself. So it stretched himself very thin to build up this inheritance for Rupert took on a lot of debt. But when he died, quite suddenly, really, he had staged a border and coup at the Herald only, like 24 hours before he died. So he wasn’t expecting to die quite as suddenly as he did. But he left a lot of things hanging in the air with this inheritance. So Rupert, and his mother or Rupert’s Mother, you know, was very intent on not leaving the family in debt. So sold off a lot of the really key pieces of the furniture, the particularly the Brisbane papers, which left Rupert to basically go from Oxford, to Adelaide to sort of start start over again, you know, this wasn’t a small company, by any means. It had this afternoon newspaper. He also had the Sunday mail, which was the biggest circulation paper in Adelaide. So it was it was nothing to sneeze at. But it was, you know, if Keith had lived a little bit longer, and had managed to pull off what he was trying to work towards, maybe would have started off in Brisbane, maybe if Rupert had convinced his mother to hold on to Brisbane and get rid of News Limited, he would have started off in a different place. But it just so happened that in the circumstances, and this sort of economic pressures that were facing the family that he had to kind of bite the bullet and come to Adelaide, and I do think the circumstances in which he came to Adelaide and the environment he was working in, did have quite an impact in the kind of company that later became.

Gene Tunny  12:31

Yeah, absolutely. So Keith Murdoch had a really, I mean, even though he died in his 60s, I mean, he had a huge life, didn’t he? And he, he was a war correspondent. I think he was famous for highlighting just the some, you know, just the, you know, what was going on at Gallipoli and the Dardanelles campaign, just what a shambles. That was. I think he was famous for that, wasn’t he? If I remember correctly, yeah. Yeah. And so Murdoch, Rupert, Rupert Murdoch comes back to Adelaide. He’s from Oxford. And he was renowned as a Marxist at Oxford, wasn’t he? And he comes back, is he 22 years old, and he turns up in Adelaide is at 1953.

Walter Marsh  13:11

Yeah, 19, September 1953, is when he really touches down. So I’d been under a year after his father’s, his father died, he finished his studies at Oxford, you know, corresponded with his mother furiously, trying to convince her not to sell, unable to convince her at the end, but then eventually says, Yes, I’ll come to Adelaide and sort of start off, you know, take the reins of the company there. And the board in Adelaide of us limited were all much older men, and they were kind of content to let him have a go at it. And he had this very the title we have as publisher, which isn’t very common in Australian newspapers in the sort of hastily defined enough that he could get away with doing whatever he wanted, and poke his nose into a bit of everything and the money side, the editorial side and kind of ease himself into the company.

Gene Tunny  14:01

Yeah. And so what was the paper in Adelaide that he inherited? And its its rival was the advertiser is that right? That’s the famous paper in Adelaide. Is it? What’s that? Yeah, so

Walter Marsh  14:11

So the, the advertiser is the morning paper, and that was the biggest daily newspaper in the city. And it still is today, it’s the only one. But then it’s afternoon competitor in the time of afternoon newspapers when they still exist. It was the news, which was owned by this company News Limited, and actually the advertiser and these limited head since 1930, early 1930s. Keith Murdoch had actually come into Adelaide on behalf of the Herald and weekly times and sort of invaded and taken over both of these papers. So up for you know, the best part of 20 years the Herald weekly times had run Adelaide as a virtual press monopoly of their own it was only a few years before Keith’s death that he carved out the News Limited and the news as this sort of our sort of rival to the Herald and weekly times owned advertiser that was run by the chairman of the weekly time. So there’s a lot of conflicting interests. And then when Rupert comes into town, sort of the gloves are off and it’s just open competition between the two papers.

Gene Tunny  15:16

Okay, right. Oh, so he’s he’s got a newspaper and obviously it gives up any any ideas of socialism or Marxism. That interesting little aspect of Murdoch. Yeah. So I like how you describe this. So I might read this other passage out because I’ve got a question about this. So in the synopsis for the book, it says led by Rupert’s friend Ally and editor in chief Rowan rivet, the fledgling Murdoch press began a seven year campaign of circulation, wars, expansion and courtroom battles that divided the city and would lay the foundations for a global empire if Rupert and Rowan didn’t end up in custody first. So okay, well, you’ve got to tell me more about that. What? How nasty did this circulation wall get? What were the courtroom battles about? And were they really at risk of doing in doing jail time?

Walter Marsh  16:12

Well, the circulation matters really start from even before Rupert touches down in Adelaide. So in an in amongst the the sort of aftermath of case death, there’s this guy sort of trying to convey in the book, there’s a scramble for control of these assets that he’d been building up. And all of his former colleagues at the Herald, his rivals, as well. They’re all sort of competing to sort of carve up Rupert’s inheritance. And they’re all telling each other vastly different stories. And they’re all saying, you know, Keith told me he wants to do this. Keith told me he wanted to do that. Keith is always playing people off against each other. So no one really knew what he what his true plans were. And in amongst that, once it became clear that that Rupert would have to come to Adelaide, to start over, the chairman of the advertisers to Lloyd dumar, who had been installed by Keith Murdoch, you know, 20 years earlier, when they came into Adelaide. He made this overtures to Rupert’s mother, Elizabeth, and kind of said, look, the News Limited sort of financial security depends on having this Sunday paper, which is the only Sunday paper it has this huge circulation, there’s no competition in that kind of market. It’s got its own little monopoly. We’re going to come in and we’re going to launch a Sunday paper, and we’re going to really put up a huge fight, you guys have limited resources. And, you know, there’s every is every likelihood that we’re going to just completely crush, crush this fledgling Murdoch press as it was at the time. But the alternative, the ultimatum he gave her was that you can sell the mail, and he’s limited all back to the health and weekly times and sort of restoring sort of a reset to what the status quo was three years earlier, before, you know, three or four years early before Keith had started carving it away for Rupert’s inheritance. And when Rupert found about about this, he was outraged. He was absolutely incensed. There were some really colourful letters that I was very pleased to find in the National Library of Australia. And so as soon as he’s made the decision, and he makes it very quickly that they’re not going to sell out he does want to have a go at making his life in newspapers. They said about the news news and his team, Ron Rivera, they all start secretly making plans about sort of battening down the hatches and preparing for the competition that’s about to happen when they launched, the advertiser launches this Sunday advertiser. And meanwhile, across town, the Sunday advertisers, you know, they’re they’re all doing these big research trips and criss crossing the world to find out the most modern advances in in sort of circulation building and newspapers and building up audiences. And so in, I think it’s August or September, the advertising the Sunday advertiser launches, and it’s immediately it’s a big threat to use them to them Rupert’s inheritance, and it’s not long after Rupert touches down that the mail, the news, limited paper, fires back and puts on the front page, accuses the advertiser of making a bid for press monopoly, and makes public this story of this kind of overtures to his mother, you know, the newly recently widowed recently bereaved wife of Sir Keith and kind of trying to strong arm, the Murdochs into selling them out, and they fret and it was framed in these terms where it wasn’t just a story of a family business, or, you know, the inheritance of a 22 year old, but it was this big, you know, this was a question of freedom press freedom in South Australia. And, you know, the the male and US Limited was going to stand up against this attempt to have, I guess, what was the quote something along the lines of all the states press in the communities press in the hands of one click, or group or group of businessmen, which is, of course deeply ironic now because the advertiser is the only paper in town and it’s been owned by Murdoch since the 80s. But that was really the start where the You know, the gloves were off, and they were really launching into this fight. And they thought they both papers threw everything at it for about two years until they eventually reached a kind of stalemate, they were kind of both speaking to the same audience both using all the same techniques, and haemorrhaging money in an unsustainable way. And so eventually, they, the advertiser kind of Rupert viewed as a capitulation, where they said, Actually, let’s merge the papers and publish one Sunday paper that’s co owned by the two companies. So it was kind of a draw, I guess. But for Rupert, when he’s coming up against this much better resourced paper and company that has ties to the Herald and weekly times, but also internationally as well. Now to have survived to your Onslaught was a pretty huge achievement, but also drove home to him that to really compete and to beat them, I guess that he had to expand it and match them in terms of the resources. So that kind of led to this treadmill of never ending expansion, I think that we see intake all around the world. And because, as Keith was, you know, he didn’t have a lot of capital, the family’s own capital to draw from the way he funded that was by taking out loans, he didn’t want to dilute the family’s control of the company by bringing in extra investors or shareholders. So a lot of borrowed money from banks. But that led him to this sort of cycle where the expansion is funded by borrowed money, he has to pay off the borrowed money. So in every town that he acquires something, in order to expand, he has to make that as profitable as possible as quickly as possible, as quickly as possible. So I think that goes a long way to explaining how, in a structural way, those early competitions kind of set him on this path of this sort of fight back siege mentality, which set him on the on this path of never ending expansion. And in every place, he went to, kind of pushing, pushing the bar, and maybe lowering the tone and pursuit of profit in every place that he went all around the world. And when you do that on a kind of industrial scale, it has, I think, a cumulative effect. I don’t think anyone would deny that.

Gene Tunny  22:10

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  22:16

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, for we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  22:45

Now back to the show. I was gonna ask you about that I was going to ask you about how his time in Adelaide set him up for later expansion. And I was wondering whether it was because he, it was super profitable. And then that gave them the capital, but it sounds like no, actually. I mean, it did provide some earnings, obviously. But they went and expanded. They needed, they needed to borrow the money. And then that set them on that on that growth path. And they just because

Walter Marsh  23:14

he and because he’s a real opportunist as well, like he worked, he didn’t have so much money and resources that he could pick and choose. He’d always just buy whatever was available, whatever got his foot in the door of the market, whatever he could convince someone to sell to him who whoever underestimated him enough to sell something to him. He took it and then turn it into something profitable, which you saw repeated. But to go back to your question about the whether they were going to end up in jail along the way. Alongside this, this sort of economic competitions, there was this political aspect as well where South Australia in the 1950s. And the decade before it had been run by this sort of conservative establishment, the liberal country league party had been in power for over two decades. And they were kept in power by a gerrymander where country voters had twice the electoral power of those in the city. And so even though they were losing the popular vote, this party kept getting returned to power and that party and that establishment was backed in hard by the advertiser. So So Rupert, and this comes back to the sort of left wing aspect of Rupert and rounder of it. They were both quite left wing at the start politically, their personal politics, but they also saw that there was, you know, if more than the the majority of voting for labour, but they’re not getting in. Clearly, that is a huge potential readership, if they made a concerted attempt to speak to this disenfranchised market that isn’t being spoken to by the advertiser, then they know they’ve got a lot of ground to gain and a lot of money to make. And I think that ties into this challenging of the establishment through legal challenges to the report. chewing through, you know, matters of good taste and things like that, that leads to them kind of raising the temperature in Adelaide and sort of pushing the boundaries of acceptability and challenging these systems in a way that over the seven year period, it gets to the point where when they get tied up in this case of ribbit, Max Stuart, and this royal commission, which is formed the crux of this book, and when they’re the libel trial, where the paper and Roland ribbit, the editor will on trial, that’s really the culmination of a lot of tensions that have been simmering and getting more tense over over a seven year period where it all comes, comes to bear.

Gene Tunny  25:38

Could you tell us a bit about that? Walter, what was the libel? What was the libel that it was about?

Walter Marsh  25:44

Yeah, so in in 19, December 1958. in Sedona, which is a town on the far west coast of South Australia, it’s a coastal town, a nine year old white girl, called Mary all of Hatton disappeared, she was later found murdered. And within a couple of days, the police arrested 2627 year old Aaron demand called Rupert next to it. Within a few hours of them arresting him, they emerged with this time confession in the early hours of the morning. And he was convicted of murder and sentenced to death. And the judge at the first trial basically said the all this other evidence they’ve got doesn’t really amount to much. It’s basically this confession or nothing. At the trial. Stuart and his lawyer said that the police choked him and beat the confession out of him. He was illiterate, didn’t speak particularly good English as well. He was signed, he signed the confession, which was typed by the police. But those to his name was the only thing he knew how to read or write really. And so there were appeals and appeals, nothing really worked. There was this growing community campaign, there were academics who became convinced that he was, you know, if not innocent, had certainly been wrongly convicted. Eventually, a Catholic priest called Tom Dixon goes to sort of attend to Stuart, in his cell, because he, you know, he’s facing death. And he, he speaks errand this priest does, because he’s worked in remote communities. And he becomes convinced that Stuart not only doesn’t really know anything about the day of the crime or the events, but doesn’t speak English in the way he doesn’t speak English competently enough that he would have been able to dictate this confession, which is very precise language, lays out how the crime, how he committed it, how he did so in a way that matched all the evidence that the police had put together. And so that kind of lit a fire under the campaign again, and people became convinced that he physically couldn’t have done this, given this confession, which the police at trial had sworn was verbatim. Anyway, so Dixon is introduced to Ron ribbit, this, the editor of the news, and he agrees to get behind the campaign and pay for Dixon to fly to Queensland to try and track down an alibi. But Stuart he does successfully. And then it just becomes this huge press campaign. Virtually, it’s reported all around the world and the Playford government facing this extraordinary pressure that they hadn’t in 20 years because they’ve enjoyed such a unchallenged power, eventually decided to hold a Royal Commission. And then it’s at the Royal Commission where this lawyer who’s come in to represent Stuart, he is questioning the police officer who first identified Stuart as a potential suspect. And he gets interrupted by one of the Royal commissioners who also happens to be the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court in South Australia, who had previously heard one of Stewart’s appeals. So there was a lot of in a very, very Adelaide, sort of incestuous With tensions right away. And this idea of he wasn’t getting a fair go. So the lawyer, he walked out, essentially, and flew back to Sydney. And it was the news. The news is reportage of this event. It was perfectly time for the afternoon papers. And they basically said they sort of paraphrased quoted him on the front page and of these news posters saying, you won’t give Stuart a fair go these commissioners can’t do the job. And it was this coverage that incensed the state government because they weren’t just criticising the commissioners, but this was the chief justice as well, because Playford the premier has installed the chief justice as the Commissioner. So it’s a real challenge to the legitimacy of the entire judicial system in South Australia and the plaque the premier Tom Playford stood up in Parliament and waved these headlines and said it was the gravest libel ever levelled judge in South Australia. And so the Royal Commission eventually wraps up the verdict is upheld, but he his life sentence is commuted his death sentence sorry is committed to life so the campaign has managed to save Stewart’s liked one way or another. But then a few months after that at the start of 1960, some police officers and this is where I start the book off with the scene, some police officers walk into US Women’s headquarters to interview round rivet and later Rupert sort of interrogate them about these these headlines. And then within a couple of months, the report is basically the whole of these limited in the organisation they run is put on the witness stand and really forensic ly pulled apart by Crown lawyers as they face these charges of libel, including seditious libel, which is sort of the headline charge, which is basically just bringing the state of South Australia into kind of disrepute, I suppose. And that was the really finding that that case, the Stuart case has been talked about a lot. There are three books that go into it in quite a lot of detail. There’s a movie made about it, but it was this libel trial afterwards, and what the libel trial tells us about how Rupert ran his company, at that point, the relationships and his role in this coverage that’s very kind of not sensationalist. But it definitely was provocative. They got them in a lot of trouble. That was, that was the kind of the climax of what I thought hadn’t really been looked at in the book before. And sort of in this, you know, writing it today, with the backdrop of, you know, the libel cases against crikey and dominion, and all this stuff, and the Sedition is a big word with January 6, and all that it just felt like a much different set of stakes, a totally different era, but felt like it resonated a lot with the era that we’re living through now at the end of Rupert’s, if not life, sort of his tenure in the news. So, yeah, I really dig into that a lot.

Gene Tunny  31:50

Yeah, that’s fascinating. And so Murdoch, he successfully defended himself against that libel, is that correct?

Walter Marsh  31:58

Yeah. So it was it was the company News Limited. And Ron Roman, the editor that were on trial, so not Rupert himself. But the as the trial progresses, it basically becomes clear that Rupert had written at least two, I think of the headlines that had gotten them in hot water. And in addition to that, there was an editorial that was published a week or so afterwards, when it became clear that, you know, the play for government was absolutely outraged by the coverage. And it was kind of trying to, I guess, calm the farm a little bit and set the record straight. But that this editorial was held up by the by the prosecution as admission of guilt, essentially, by the newspaper, by admitting that those headlines were not quite accurate and shouldn’t have been printed. And it’s revealed that Rupert wrote that headline himself. So it shows a lot about the kind of proprietor he is and how he’s, you know, never too far away from the action, but it’s particularly in relation to the more modern day cases that are happening where he’s kind of recognised that they, you know, pushed the Fox News, sort of Trumpian base a bit too far, is a sign that even Rupert sometimes recognised as when the company has gone a little bit too far and and flying too close to the sun.

Gene Tunny  33:20

Yes, exactly. Well, he had to sack Tucker Carlson, the noted commentator over there, which is one example of

Walter Marsh  33:28

an event and revenge gets sacked shortly after the final charges are dropped. So it’s, everything kind of comes to a head. And that’s a good way to bookend the book and wrong.

Gene Tunny  33:41

Yeah, it’s fascinating, because it sounds like he was probably on the right side in that on that issue. And yeah, years later, I mean, Murdoch would obviously come under intense criticism. And there have been some massive scandals that we don’t need to go into here. But what happened with News, News of the World and the UK and the phone hacking, just absolutely appalling stuff.

Walter Marsh  34:02

I mean, it’s all kind of sorry, it’s all it’s all very speculative when I’m just looking at this early period. But I do think that I found it very telling that in this period, where he is kind of the good guy challenging systems that were overdue for a challenge and these elite establishments that were kind of begging to be shaken up and undermined. And that’s kind of siege mentality. And, you know, he’s not the little guy by any means, because he’s still the inheritor of a newspaper company and the son of the press Baron that set up this whole empire, but it kind of shows what I’ve been discovered. This is sort of foundational contradictions that we see, you know, his his resignation letter, the other week, you know, he still tried to rail against the elite and collaborate and eliteserien co cahoots with the media whose you know, sacrifice truth for political agendas. I think it was in thing and it’s just that the cognitive dissonance on display when he talks about that kind of thing as the billionaire head of a hugely influential Empire that’s had a huge influence on politics. You know, how do you make sense of that, and then seeing it in the context of what he’s been fighting and fighting since day one. And when, you know, the variables were so different when he started, but this kind of dynamic have always been the inside or outside of sticking it to these establishments, kind of set the groundwork for everything that came afterwards.

Gene Tunny  35:27

Yeah, well, he’s no longer on the News Corp is no longer in its ascendancy, if that’s the right word. Because it’s been really battered by the internet and all social media, YouTube, etc. So it’s, it is struggling with Sky News, Australia seems to do it seems to do okay on YouTube. And I mean, there still is a, there’s a dedicated audience of some people out there for sky, but I know elsewhere around the world and the papers here, I mean, the Courier Mail in Queensland’s lead off a lot of people over the years, and they’re just not the force that they once were.

Walter Marsh  36:00

Well, even things like YouTube, like how Yes, Sky has found this huge, sort of secondary, you know, in Australia, it’s on pay TV, or it’s being beamed into airports or country TV free to air. But on YouTube, they found this quite lucrative secondary market where they put some insane videos, some rant on YouTube, and there’s gets 1000s and 1000s of views from America within minutes. And it just made me think that a lot of the things that I explored in this book in the 1950s, the media landscape today, and the one that I’ve navigated in my professional life, is in so many ways unrecognisable from the one Rupert inherited, you know, in, in Rupert’s days, you know, as a building, full of hundreds and hundreds of men and women and just hours and hours of labour. And it was a huge physical process to put together the news each day that everyone read, you know, on trains all at once in two distinct waves, completely. And today, it’s completely different in so many ways. But then at the same time, I kept being reminded that a lot of these arguments and questions that are being explored in that period, things like Monopoly, and ownership and the truth and sensationalism. They’re the same questions, the medium is completely different, the society looks a lot different, but they’re still the same questions. And to bring it back to what I was talking about with YouTube, and how that these algorithms, these online algorithms kind of favour content that provokes a strong reaction that kind of fuels conflict, and instead of moderation and sort of nuance, it’s in a lot of ways, it’s very similar to after the newspapers, because, you know, they had to, had to sell to sell papers, they had to put together headlines and stories that caught the eye and sort of captured the emotional feeling of just random communities passing by, that could be held out by newsboys on the corner, if they weren’t doing that they weren’t selling papers, and the company fell over. So is that these mediums, the mediums are totally different. But there again, and again, we see that they’re kind of structurally predisposed to things like sensationalism, which Yeah, is kind of defies the time period.

Gene Tunny  38:15

Yeah, yeah. Yeah, absolutely. Okay. And I think that’s a that’s a good point. I mean, he learned, I mean, Murdoch. I mean, he obviously cut his teeth in Adelaide, he, he learned a lot about what works in media, and then he managed to scale that up globally. So I think that’s and the other point about Adelaide, which I liked that you made in the book, is that in Adelaide, did he learn the importance of political influence, he learned that the, the people at the advertiser, they were politically connected, if I’m remembering this correctly, and he just learned how important that was. And then he called, he learned to cultivate politicians. And we saw that, you know, famously over the years, and he for a while he was making and breaking government’s Gough Whitlam in, in Australia. He backed him then he didn’t back in and then that was played some role. It wasn’t obviously the decisive factor, but it did play a role. So yeah, incredible. I just found I found that really interesting. I can see how his experience in Adelaide taught him that lesson.

Walter Marsh  39:15

Because he was kind of, even though he had this privileged upbringing in you know, I was raised, lived and breathed newspapers growing up the son of his father who was understood the power of influence in politics. But when he stopped when Rupert started out, he had Yeah, this six or seven year period when he was an outsider, and even though he was doing a lot to challenge the establishment, he also was finding really experiencing the limits of what you could achieve by just throwing rocks from the outside and I think yeah, by 1960 when we kind of leave Rupert it’s very clear that he you know, when he’s been hauled to court and you know, as editors sent him into custody and threatened with jail time is discovered the upper limits have that kind of approach and takes a different path?

Gene Tunny  40:04

Yeah, indeed. Okay, so just two quick questions for the just at the end. Because when you mentioned those a movie about the Stuart case, I wanted to know what that movie was. And then second, if your book is optioned, which it may well be given, it tells a it’s a riveting rollicking tale as Jenny hocking has described it, who do you think could play young Rupert in a Netflix series or a movie? You thought about that?

Walter Marsh  40:37

I haven’t know. But it’s a good question. I haven’t I should say I haven’t thought of anyone off the top of my head. It’s kind of a bit of a backhanded compliment. I think for any very young actors. We I think you could perfectly embody young Rupert Murdoch. But the movie is called black and white. It was made in I think, 2001 I think it’s on Netflix. It kind of comes in and out of the streaming services, but the young Rupert plays a small role in that story, and he’s actually played by a young Ben Mendelsohn. So maybe they can get Ben Ben back to play. Stick Keith Murdock.

Gene Tunny  41:17

Yeah, absolutely. I’m gonna have to watch that. That sounds fascinating. Okay, Walter Mosh well done and well done on the book. I hope it sells well. And I’m sure you’ll be getting lots of media in the future on Rupert Murdoch, his legacy. I mean, he’s still alive. He’s still chairman emeritus of News Corp. And I expect they will. Lachlan Murdoch. I mean, you’ll have a tough time, but I expect they’ll still be important in the media landscape for at least the next decade or so. If you have any final thoughts on that on the legacy where they’re going? Please let me know. Otherwise, you’re happier to wrap up.

Walter Marsh  41:57

Yeah, I mean, the one thing that, that reading that letter, and I mentioned this in a column I did for the guardian. But reading Rupert’s resignation letter did make me think of another resignation letter I’ve found in my research from his father, Keith Murdoch from 1949, where he was having some health issues. And he’d been sort of compelled in late 1949, to announce that he was handing over the day to day running of the Herald weekly times as managing director to his successor, Jack Willett, John Jack Williams, and Keith Hill to remain chairman. But clearly, this was intended as a kind of changing of the guard, you know, getting into semi retirement. Within the next three years, I was going through all these letters were keep spend all that time, you know, coming into the office whenever he could, just white anting Williams eroding his influence, asking all these questions at meetings. And then finally, the last six months, he’s incredible letters where, you know, he’s back and forth with executives that are on his side, about this disintegration across the company. And finally, 24 hours before Keith dies, he launches this, I guess, boardroom purge, where he gets gets Williams turfed out of the company and sort of reassert his control over the company in this really defined way. And then dies within 24 hours, which, you know, in the context of Rupert and whether or not he can really, you know, sit the out of office and go and relax while Lachlan takes over. I feel like the whole 70 year arc has been about control and the whole company being built around his decision making. So I think that that will you know, that would be a tough one to relinquish. But then interestingly, and this is just a little fun tidbit for you. But I was it was fascinating to read about in the aftermath of Keith’s death when they when the call came in, obviously, Williams went straight back into the office and got someone to drill open, keep safe, and they found all these papers which kind of expose his sort of all these tactics he had to build up Rupert’s inheritance. So by the time kids funeral had come around, on Thursday of that week before Robert had even gotten back to the country, the minutes had been the decision to get rid of Williams had been scrubbed from the minutes. He’d been reinstated, and he ended up one of the pallbearers for Keith, just a few less than a week after keep that down, tipped him out of the company. So it’s hard to relinquish control when you’re a Murdoch is my take home.

Gene Tunny  44:26

Yeah, yeah, absolutely. Okay. Well, Tomas, thanks so much for your time. I really enjoyed the conversation.

Walter Marsh  44:32

Thank you. Thanks for having me.

Gene Tunny  44:35

rato thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about The Show. Finally, if your podcasting outlets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week

45:22

thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this where to begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Private vs public sector jobs, consulting scandals & economics as an ‘imperialist discipline’ w/ UQPPES – EP209

Show host Gene Tunny speaks with students from the University of Queensland Politics, Philosophy and Economics Society. They discuss topics such as private versus public sector jobs, the future of consulting, and the risks of outsourcing for government officials. Gene takes an historical perspective and goes back to the time of convict transportation to Australia. He also talks about, among other things, his time working in Treasury during the Rudd Government, and how psychology is relevant to economics. The students express concerns about the consulting sector in light of a recent scandal involving PwC partners misusing confidential government information.

Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

What’s covered in EP209

  • Economics career paths and differences between public service and consulting. (3:04)
  • Consulting industry challenges and scandals. (15:39)
  • Outsourcing in government and potential mitigation of risks. (17:50)
  • Greedflation. (28:30)
  • Limits of economics as a discipline. (33:59)
  • Public vs private sector work experiences. (38:22)
  • Government consulting and ethics. (43:48)

Links relevant to the conversation

About UQPPES:

https://uqppes.com.au/about-us/

On how badly designed outsourcing of convict transportation created the ‘death fleet’, see:

https://www.themandarin.com.au/73989-contracts-and-convicts-how-perverse-incentives-created-the-death-fleet/

Transcript: Private vs public sector jobs, consulting scandals & economics as an ‘imperialist discipline’ w/ UQPPES – EP209

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Gene Tunny  00:03

I mean, I think economics is an incredibly powerful tool where it gets difficult is trying to predict behaviour and, and in in cases where people don’t act fully rationally, and that’s what you need to bring the psychology in. Right. So, I think any idea that economics is the imperialist discipline and we’ve got all the answers, I think that was destroyed by the financial crisis. Welcome to the economics explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host, Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. If you’ve listened to my recent episode on degrowth, you would have heard a little bit of the recent event that I spoke at. The event was hosted by the University of Queensland PPE society where PPE stands for politics, philosophy and economics. This episode features the rest of the conversation that I had with the students. We talked about private versus public sector jobs, the future of consulting and the risks that government officials need to watch out for and outsourcing. In the conversation I picked up there many of the students appear especially concerned about the future of the consulting sector, which is a major employer of graduates. The context is that we’ve had this big scandal in Australia over some PwC partners allegedly misusing confidential information they received from the government. They allegedly used it for private gain. As you’ll hear the students were super interested in the differences between working in the private and public sector, and which was the better option for economics students, I gave the best advice that I could on this question among many others. As with many questions, there’s no easy answer. It says good things and bad things about private and public sector jobs. And a lot will depend on people’s individual preferences and personalities. As you’ll hear, I think that the public sector provides a better training ground for young economists. The work environment and training opportunities are generally much better. But there are challenges in the public sector. As the higher up you get, the more you get exposed to the political side of government, which brings new challenges. That said, there are some people who thrive on that. So it depends on just what you’re looking for. If you have your own thoughts on working in the private versus the public sector, or any of the other issues that we talked about this episode, then please reach out and share your thoughts. My contact details are in the show notes. Okay, let’s get into the episode. I hope you enjoy it.

Joe  03:04

Welcome, everybody. Thank you very much for coming. My name is Joseph. I’ll be your emcee for this evening. And I’d like to say a very, very warm welcome to esteemed economist gene Tunny. He is here with us tonight. He’s the Director of Adult economics, and a 1997 CIS liberty and society alumnus. He is a former Australian Treasury official, and has worked on a range of domestic and international consulting projects. So we’re very lucky to have someone with such expertise. Joining us tonight to answer some of our questions about economics. So I guess to start off with Jean, could you maybe tell us a little bit more about yourself about the work you’ve done and how you maybe came to work in consulting?

Gene Tunny  03:50

Yeah, so I’m an economist, done a broad range of things are taught at this university in the past. So in this very room, subjects such as cost benefit analysis, there’s probably macroeconomic policy that I taught in 2015 in this room here. So I’ve got a background in macro policy budget policy when I was in the Treasury in Canberra, so worked on a lot of issues there, industry policy issues to do with the car industry, the budget debt, so we had to borrow a lot of money again, during the financial crisis. So I was heavily involved in that. And yeah, around probably around 2009, I started thinking I’d be good to for a bit of a change. And a friend of mine, Tony, Hans, was heading Mars and Jacob up here, the consulting office, and he was doing a lot of good stuff, cost benefit studies of all the new water infrastructure we needed because we’re in a drought. And I thought I’d be great to come back to Queensland I think it might have been a wedding that was up at nursery or went up to a wedding, a friend’s wedding. And you know how magical nurseries and the reception was at sales and a probably had a couple of glasses of champagne and thought, what on earth? Why would I want to go back to Canberra when you’re on the beach here and beautiful? That was partly why I wanted to come, I came back. So I worked here at uni, I worked in state government, as a public servant do different analytical roles, workers compensation, industrial relations, then treasury. And since 2009, I’ve been doing consulting since 2014, my own firm and yeah, work for a huge different range of clients, agribusiness companies, some government agencies, industry bodies, major corporations, ANZ Bank, for example, say all sorts of clients,

Joe  05:39

you know, you said in, you know, you were thinking of wanting for a bit of a change up coming back up here and working in consulting what, because for us, consulting and public service are too so the main employment pathways, could you maybe give us some sort of insights into the differences between the two, the, you know, the positive sides of both, and perhaps some, some negative sides or things you didn’t like, as much from either?

Gene Tunny  06:06

Yeah, so the public service is a good training grounds, and there are a lot of a lot of opportunities. They look up to you. So I think if you’re beginning in particular, you’re studying PPE, places like treasury, productivity commission, Reserve Bank, de fat, foreign affairs, and trade, I think they’re excellent places to go to learn about the issues and potentially get training opportunities or international postings that they can be really great opportunities. And public sector. Yeah, it’s different. I mean, the different The obvious difference is that, in one, there’s a mission that set by the government of the day and there’s a, you know, there’s a bureaucratic national, you’ve got to achieve some tasks. So that could be improving the health of the population, running the health system, or the education system, educating people, or could be Treasury where it’s this broad concept of well being, and you’re overseeing a whole range of agencies, you got to make sure that the budget is in good shape. So that’s, that’s a bit more of a, like, every agency has got a different mission. And that’s, that’s what determines that. In the private sector. It’s about profit. So profit. I mean, that’s, that’s what Yep, you need to make money to be able to keep the operation going. So there’s a clear goal, and that ends up driving a lot of things and forcing efficiency. So when I think one of the challenges in the public sector is because you don’t have that, there’s not that focus on profit, things can become a little bit inefficient. Yeah, there’s not the same sort of laser focus on, on doing things efficiently. And going after profitable opportunities. Your mission is set by politicians. And that can be problematic, because sometimes they can change their mind. Sometimes the politicians, I mean, maybe some of the things that they that they’re aiming for aren’t necessarily sensible. But yeah, as a public servant, you do have to try and achieve the objectives of the government of the day. To me, those would be the major differences. But if you want to explore that any more feel free either. Because because I’m not sure about answer that question very well. But that’s just what occurred to me. And with the private sector, I mean, you’ve got like, I work for a whole range of clients. And it can be a different project, like one day, it can be looking at lb farms. So there’s a client of mine, who’s built a big lb farm out at Dundee windy, and he’s trying to extract Omega three rich oil from the the algae. So now he can make some money out of that. And so I’ve helped him get a grant from the state government to do the r&d. And that’s fascinating. But then another day, I might be looking at parcels and issues to do with freight transport. So there are a whole range of things that you study, whereas if you’re in a public service agency, one of the risks is you could what you want to avoid is staying in the one spot and just doing the day to day because there is a lot of day to day responding to emails or letters from the public and writing Minister replies writing speeches, writing question time briefs, you want to get into an area where you you’re not. You’re not doing that day to day public service stuff, but there are a lot of good places like treasuries, terrific. Reserve Bank, doing rigorous analysis trying to inform the monetary policy decision that that’d be a great place. Yeah.

Joe  09:32

Super interesting. Yeah. I mean, I would never have even sort of imagined that consulting firm would be working out in Gander windy.

Gene Tunny  09:40

Oh, well, I mean, I mean, in Queensland, Australia is huge in agriculture, okay. And you’d be blown away if you if you go out there and just see how advanced a lot of these operations are. Here. There’s a lot of work for consultants. I mean, economists are probably I mean, we would have only a very small part of the work I mean, this has worked for Engineers is work for agronomist experts in agriculture. Yeah, there’s all sorts of all sorts of work and in a lot of things are automated. Yeah, they’re increasingly used. I think they’re even using AI now to work out, you know, optimal irrigation and optimal spraying of pesticides and things like that. Yeah, right. Yeah.

Joe  10:21

Very cool. That’s a good point. I think that you said that, you know, economist consultants would be doing a small part of it. And I guess, for your firm, or just for consultants, in general, as you say that the jump between lots of very different projects from different clients? How do you sort of go about preparing for a new client or, you know, perhaps in an area that is not necessarily somebody that you’ve worked before, but still have to deliver services or help your your client in some way? Well, you’ve

Gene Tunny  10:54

got to be a quick study, you have to get across the issues as best you can. And it’s like, if you’re doing an assignment at uni, you want to start early, you want to get all the resources, do the reading, learn as much as you can ask questions. So I mean, when you’re doing consulting projects, the the client is they’re motivated to help you to assist and to provide all the information they can see, it’s about being a detective or a journalist, and asking questions, to get all the information you need. But you do have to be a quick study. Ultimately, the, the Principles of Economics are the same. And I guess you learn a process of gathering the information, you sort of get an idea of what they might have on hand, what you might, sometimes you might need someone else to help out, you might need an engineer to come in and, and help work out how to solve a particular problem like in, in on their farm or in their factory, and they might have an estimate of what that will cost. You might need an architect or a quantity surveyor to do lifecycle cost estimates for a building that you’re doing a cost benefit analysis on. So there are the experts that you might have to bring in. But yeah, you need to have a, you need to plan you need to think think with the end in mind, begin with the end in mind, which is one of the seven habits that Stephen Covey talks about, it’s so true, you got to think about what’s the ultimate thing I need? And where am I now? What needs to happen to get there, you got to figure out the most efficient route to get there. So a lot of problem solving.

Joe  12:26

Yeah. And that’s, I think, a really big, exciting thing about economics and about, like studying policy and things like that is that a lot of it is problem solving? Would you have any advice for any students studying economics, or PPE, or any sort of related discipline in sort of getting into the consulting world, post

Gene Tunny  12:46

graduation, I mean, I wouldn’t get into consulting unless you are super passionate about it. Or, I mean, there are some good places that are working to death. I mean, if you get a, if you get a really good GPA, I don’t know what you need to get now that if you can get into some or like McKinsey, or BCG or aubaine, they’re really good training grounds for getting into C suite or, or getting into a, you know, really top job. So I think if you if you could get into one of those coming out as a grad, that’d be great. Other places where signing, you’re probably better off going, you want somewhere that will give you I mean, it sounds silly. It sounds terrible. What’s the word I’m trying to think of the word, but you want something that looks good on your CV, right. And so you want something that is recognisable, and that’s why Treasury or productivity commission or RBA works so well. So I’d be applying for somewhere like that and get good training and, and learn how to and what’s good about those biases is that they have high standards, and they teach you how to write well and communicate. And I think that’s very important. And they can also give you international opportunities. So one of the things that I that blew me away when I went into treasury was just all the international opportunities there. You work on issues with OECD or G 20, or IMF, World Bank, and Treasury people get postings all over the place. Beijing, Tokyo, London, Jakarta, Washington, DC. So that’s, yeah, that’s, that’s a good way to get a national experience and D fat too, of course. But that’s what I’d be doing. I’d be trying to get into, you know, as you probably all know, this, you got to work hard, study hard, try and do extracurricular things that will impress people have a reasonably good interview performance. And yeah, that’s, that’s all I can recommend is just work hard. You’re probably doing all that already.

Joe  14:39

Some of us maybe not awesome. Thanks for the advice. Like it’s really helpful, especially from someone who’s working in the industry. Yeah.

Gene Tunny  14:49

I mean, why I’d say that I mean, I mean, I enjoy consulting but I always see it as something that I’ve sort of fallen into. I mean, it’s good for me because it allows me to do a lot of interesting things and work with different people. And you know, potentially develop a business and grow the business. So what you ultimately want to do is specialise create products. So that’s the path I’m on now. So you probably don’t want to be doing lots of different things. I mean, I’ve been opportunistic, I’ve been trying to, you know, get the contracts in. And to do that I need to work on a lot of different things. Because partly, it’s because I’ve got a wide range of experience. So I’ve dabbled in different areas, and I can do those for a wide range of things. But ultimately, I’d like to sort of niche down and develop products that, that provide that recurrent revenue, that’s what you ultimately want, I think. And I think consulting can be difficult when you’re at the beginning, I wouldn’t say the bottom. But you know, the Finder mind their grinder model? Have you heard of that? But they talk about it, like Deloitte and PwC. The big four? Well, the finders, the partners, they’re the ones who have the connections, they’ll have, they’ll know the CEOs, they’ll go cycling with him, or they’ll play golf with them. And the CEO will ring them up, and can you do this analysis for us? Can you crunch the numbers for us on this project, and then there’ll be no partner or go, Okay, that’s great. Well brought that in the Finder, they don’t want to do the work, they just want to go to the, you know, the soirees, they just want to do the networking, and bringing the projects ever mind who’s a senior person, and not necessarily that senior, just there a few years or five, five or 10 years, they’re the managers. And so they’ll manage the projects being done. And the people who are doing the projects are the grinders. And today, the analysts, and that’s where the grades come in. And they could just work ridiculous hours. And partly because it’s a tournament because everyone wants to get up to the next level and prove themselves. And to get into one of those firms, you have to be really good generally. And so you’ve got young, ambitious people, they’re all competing against each other. But it can be very difficult that people work ridiculous hours. So that’s why I wouldn’t necessarily recommend consulting to start off with you better coming in later on when you’ve got some experience. So you can come in as a manager, or you could come in or you can do freelance on your own or set up your own business. I think it’s much more enjoyable then.

Joe  17:16

And then you get to work on your golf skills as well.

Gene Tunny  17:20

Yeah, although cycling, I know, golf used to be the big thing. I think it’s more cycling now. Yeah, yeah.

Joe  17:27

Awesome. Well, I guess speaking about the Big Four, as someone who’s working in the consultancy industry at the moment, what’s your take on the ongoing scandals that have been happening involving PWC and other consulting firms at the moment? Do you think this may be raises questions or concerns about the efficacy of outsourcing public policy?

Gene Tunny  17:50

Oh, look, I think there’s always been concerns about the efficacy of outsourcing. And if you look at the history of contracting out, I forget which fleet it was, but was it the Third Fleet, there was one of some of the convicts ships are all put out to tender right by the by HM Treasury, or the Admiralty in in the UK, and the Admiralty or the the Treasury they want, they want the most people to get out, they want people to come to Australia, they don’t want to people to die on the ship. Right? They actually want people to survive the voyage. But the ship owners, the ones who are who when the contract, they want to fulfil the contract to just to the letter so they can get the payment from the Treasury. But they don’t really care much about the people who were the people survive unless you make that explicit in the contract. So and there was a scandal with one of the convict ships, if I remember correctly, I can look it up, and we can put it in the show notes. So yeah, there’s always been issues with government contracting, there’s always been concerns. And so I’m a great believer in outsourcing, because I think it does save money. But you’ve got to do it for specific things for specific jobs that you can keep a close eye on and where you trust the people to deliver those jobs. So I think the problem with PwC is you have too much trust was placed in people that they shouldn’t replace that trustee and given the incentives on their end their ability to make money out of it. Right. And so the, arguably the people in the government should have seen that as a risk and pay closer attention to it. At the same time, what the partners in PwC did, what they allegedly did for the lawyers appears unethical. And you know, just just terrible. I mean, I’d like to think that if I was in the same situation, I wouldn’t do the same thing because I’ve been on the I’ve been on the other side of that in the treasury, in government. And I know just, yeah, there are opportunities all the time to profit off information that the government has, and I don’t know if you’re aware There’s an insider trading scandal with the lad who was working in ABS and he had a maid in Melbourne, and he was leaking the inflation data to him. So yeah, you’ve guessed that’s the problem in the public sector, you’ve got to there’s what I’m trying to say is there’s information in the public sector has is valuable. If you’re giving outsiders access to that, you’re going to make sure that there’s controls on it, you keep an eye on it, at the same time, what the PwC partners allegedly did was unethical, really bad form. Will it stop outsourcing? No, because there’s a lot of benefits to it. There’s a lot of expertise out there, that people who can help government from time to time they’ll take on things that are really big, and they need the outside advice and the outside labour outside assistance. So I think we’ll still need it. But there are lessons. And but that’s outside, as I was saying those lessons, we’ve been learning them for 200 years, and we keep forgetting them.

Joe  20:56

Do you think I remember reading a few months ago, there was quite a bit of talk about this new in house consulting section of the Department of Premier Prime Minister and Cabinet that they were bringing in? Do you think that that might be sort of a potential solution to that sort of issue, or

Gene Tunny  21:14

I think it will, it’s worth trying, I just don’t know how well it will perform partly because of the role of the profit motive in motivating consultants. So consultants to get jobs done, because they know that if they don’t get the job done, the client won’t pay the money. And then that looks bad for them. And if they’re, if they’re the actual proprietor or if their partner, then their compensation is gonna directly depend on that. And even if they’re, they’re an employee, then that can affect their progression, or they could even get the sack if they really stuffed something up super badly. There’s a lot of incentive to get the job done and get it done efficiently work weekends work long hours. I mean, there are some times I’ve stayed up till God, yeah, I’ve done at least one or two all nighters. Some people will do multiple all nighters to get jobs done, but you will really push yourself. Is there the same incentive? And in that government body? I don’t know. And, and I don’t know to what extent they’re going to be constrained by the the APS pay structure, and to what extent bonuses can be paid. So I think that’ll be the test of that. Look, it’s worth trying out. Yeah, I’m a bit sceptical about whether it’ll work or not. Yeah, that you got to make sure you get the best people in there. And if I was in government, I’m not sure I’d want to go to that team. I’d probably rather be in PMC or Treasury if I was federal, yeah, yeah. Yeah. So the idea that it was in PMS? Yes. I think it’s supposed to be a subsection of, of the PMC, portfolio or whatever. But yeah, you’d want to, I’d be concerned, if I was in the public service, I’d want to be in one of the core areas where I was working on the really juicy policy issues. And yeah, where you got the potential to advise the ministers, often directly, some will sometimes directly up at Parliament House, that’s that they’re the really interesting things to do. Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  23:16

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  23:46

Now back to the show.

Joe  23:51

I guess another sort of perspective that I was thinking about is having independent public institutions like the Productivity Commission, for example, or the RBA, that you mentioned before, that are not necessarily beholden to a particular department, but still part of the public service. How do you see the role for those sorts of institutions evolving?

Gene Tunny  24:15

Yeah, I think they’re terrific. I think that’s, that’s a good idea. I think the PC has done a lot of good stuff. But we’ll have to see how it goes under the new commission head. So Danielle wood, who’s an old friend of mine, we’ll see how it goes. And I think she should be she should be great. She might have a different focus, she might be more focused on social policy issues than than some of the previous Productivity Commission heads. But yeah, I think Productivity Commission is a great idea a lot depends on the terms of reference. It’s given by the government though. So it can be it can be effective if the government uses it right. But a lot depends on what the government gets us to do. Yeah. The other one that’s interesting is the parliamentary Budget Office, which is really good. So I’m not too familiar with that. So that’s That’s in, that’s based in the parliament itself on the hill, rather than in a public service agency. And what it is, is it’s an independent costing agency, and it estimates the cost of policies. So if you’re from the opposition or the grains, or your tail, you can go to the parliamentary budget office and say, Hey, I’ve got this policy idea. Can you produce a costing for us and tell us, you know, what, what do you think this would cost? And so that, that provides a service to the whole parliament. And it provides a service to the public, because we’re not just relying upon the Treasury, which works for the government of the day. And potentially, I mean, I’d like to think they wouldn’t be influenced by the government the day but there’s that perception that maybe they’re not independent? Well, they’d certainly not independent, but maybe they’re not. Yeah, there’s a perception that they could be influenced to extent by the government. So therefore, it is good to have something like parliamentary budget office. And it’s really, it’d be a really good place to work. They’ve got an amazing data set, they’ve got a 20% extract of the ATO is taxation data, right. So all data on all the taxpayers out there, the the PBO has got a 20% extract of that, and that helps them work out, you know, the impacts of policies is pretty impressive.

Joe  26:25

Yeah, very interesting. I’m surprised that it doesn’t come up more as sort of a, an option.

Gene Tunny  26:30

Yeah, it’s either that I think it’s a textbook tax, the tax database, or the census that’s linked to the tax database, I’ll have to, might look that up as well. But it’s impressive data set that they’ve got. And that enables them to do really detailed, precise estimates of the cost of policies, because there’s policy at the Commonwealth level is so complex, because of all of the rules around social security payments, superannuation and taxation. It’s everything so complicated. And so therefore, you need really fine, detailed data to be able to cause some of these policies.

Joe  27:06

Yes. super interesting. And I guess really, like sort of a dream for an economist or quantitative economist to have access to all that data? Yeah, yeah. Well, I

Gene Tunny  27:15

guess I mean, that’s one of the things that’s really changed. And just the the amount of data that is available now. All these big longitudinal or panel data sets, blade, the business longitudinal data set Hildur, household incomes, Labour dynamics, Australia. And you can do all really neat statistical methods with them lots of good econometrics. So if you’re into econometrics, and yet see if you can get somewhere like PbO, or there are some think tanks that are really good like Grattan Institute, or II 61, you would have heard of those places. So yeah, I’d, I’d highly recommend either of those. II 61, the research director, there is an old UK boy, Dan Andrews, who worked at Treasury OECD, he’s good value,

Joe  28:00

no relation to the Victorian

Gene Tunny  28:06

though he’s not a dictator, that’s a good guy. Wasn’t a political COVID.

Joe  28:20

Also, thank you for that sort of tour of the landscape of policy and consulting that was super interesting and hopefully informative for all of us going out there into the world. Moving sort of to another topic, I guess, there’s been obviously over the last year or so inflation has been one of the main policy points or issues, pretty much any sort of discussion about the economy is related to inflation. And a lot of there’s been a lot of media coverage talking about wage growth, particularly over the last six months and and how that might be contributing to inflation or might potentially contribute to inflation. So we have a question here asking, is it misleading for the media to highlight wage growth as a contributor to inflation? Given that, in Australia, we are experiencing negative real wage growth at the moment?

Gene Tunny  29:18

I don’t know to what extent the media has been blaming wages, I mean, that what we’ve seen is that the central banks that reserve bank is concerned about this concept of a wage price spiral that if wages take off, then that’ll feed into prices, and that’ll force up wages again. Now, we haven’t really seen that yet. Okay, so look, some of those concerns may be misplaced. There’s a bit of a debate about that. At the moment. The Australia Institute’s got a lot of press, arguing that it’s all because of greedy corporations. This greed inflation. I’m a bit sceptical of that I’m not sure whether to what extent corporations are any more greedy than they were previously and whether the markets more concentrated than it has been in the past. So I’m sceptical about about that story too. But essentially, we had, it’s the classic story of too much money chasing too few goods, right? We had this big COVID stimulus, additional hundreds of billions of dollars more in bank accounts, and, therefore, extra money, not enough supply prices a bit up the whole wage price spiral thing that central banks have been worried about. Yeah, that that actually hasn’t happened. So maybe you could say it’s misleading, but I’m not sure that’s been I think that’s been what some of the economists and central bank governors have been talking about. I don’t know, to what extent the media have been blaming them or talking about that. I think, if anything, it’s that great inflation story that that’s been dominant. Yeah, I think there’s problems with that, too. I mean, essentially, it’s just prices have been rising, because there’s been a lot more money, and there’s been the shortages and your businesses have, yeah, they’ve put up their prices. And that’s helped them, you know, that’s encouraged them to expand, supply where they can. Yeah,

Joe  31:08

I agree that it definitely has sort of picked up pace in the media over the last few months, this idea of, and often you see it linked to earnings calls or record profit margins. Oh, yeah. Do you think that profit margins should sort of receive more scrutiny from economists as a sort of concept, especially when we’re thinking about inflation?

Gene Tunny  31:32

Well, I guess, what you’re seeing is you’re seeing a correlation, right? Because we’ve had, we did have a very, very strong rebound, after the pandemic, okay, when we came out of lockdown. And so you’re going to expect high profits, okay, because the economy was really performing strong, it’s slowing down. Now, as we all know, and we’ve got this per capita recession that they’re talking about. So yeah, it was natural that profits would increase, because we had such strong economic conditions, that’s just the business cycle. And at the same time, we had inflation because we had all of this extra money chasing only so many goods that could be produced profits, I mean, we do want companies to be profitable, I think you should be looking at what’s causing the profits, if there is market power, or if there is concentration, if they’re abusing it, then we should be looking at that. And that’s what the a triple sees. Therefore, now you could argue that may be the a triple C isn’t as effective as it should be the a triple C’s, it’s looked at groceries in the past, it’s looked at all sorts of sectors in the past, and now we’ve got a competition policy review. And I think it’s looking at the airlines, that’s where we should get. So maybe there is a case for there’s possibly some restriction of competition, or in the airline sector, maybe weak that could be more competitive, it’s a lot better than it used to be when it was super regulated back in the 80s. And it was really expensive to fly around. But no one be jetting around to different cities, it was a certain it was very expensive. It’s because we deregulated it back in the 80s. And we allowed in a lot more competition. Now, this is why this whole issue of the Qatar decision not letting them in on those international routes. That’s why that’s become so politically difficult for this government, because that was something that could have helped reduce the cost of flights, particularly to Europe. And so so you could argue cornices was getting some protection from the government. And so we shouldn’t be thinking about what are their barriers? Are there? Is there a problem with an issue with the market structure? Is there too much oligopoly or monopolistic power? And are there levers that the government can can use to stop that? In cases where it’s where they’re clearly doing something anti competitive? Can we prosecute them under the age of the consumer and competition policy? I can remember the exact name off the top of my head. But yeah, we should. It’s definitely something we should be concerned about. And it is something that, that economists do study. Yeah.

Joe  33:59

Awesome. Thank you for that. Yeah. I mean, as a personal anecdote, I remember I wanted to catch a flight to Europe a little while ago, and I had to go fly with cuantas to first before I could even get a Qatar flight and it was so much better, that I’m going from Perth, Qatar Airways. I will. I think they’re really good. So yeah, it was an interesting decision. We’ve got another question here. Again, sort of taking another step. Russ Roberts, who is the host of econ talk a podcast. He refers to economics as an imperialistic discipline. This idea that, you know, being like, you know, economists often try to apply economics and economic thinking too broadly, to domains where the assumptions may no longer hold and its utility is questionable. I guess, someone that might come to mind is someone like Gary Becker, you know, bringing the idea of economics and supply and demand to the family and areas that typically it hadn’t been applied to before. And for you personally, what do you think the limits are of economics as a discipline? And are there things that economics can’t explain? And we might need other sort of perspectives to understand?

Gene Tunny  35:15

I think certainly, I mean, even economics requires other perspectives. So I think economics is an incredibly powerful tool. And, you know, it’s a science of the economy and studying the economy there. There’s some core economics, you need to know, where it gets difficult is trying to predict behaviour and, and in in cases where people don’t act fully rationally. And that’s what you need to bring the psychology and right. So I think any idea that a court economics is the imperialist discipline, and we’ve got all the answers, I think, that was destroyed by the financial crisis. I mean, maybe up until 2008, people could have believed that. But after 2008, I think there was a recognition that, okay, we haven’t really solved the business cycle, we thought we’ve solved the business cycle as this Great Moderation. markets aren’t always rational, you can’t, there are periods of irrationality in economics is not going to help you there. That’s where you need psychology to bring psychology. And that’s why behavioural economics is trying to bring in psychology with economics. So yeah, I think there are clearly limits to economics. And one of the one of the important limits or considerations, is that economics to the extent Well, if it’s, you could say it’s a science or it’s a study a field of study, it can answer questions of fact, or we can make predictions. Or we could argue, analyse what might be the most efficient course of action from a the perspective of consumers consumer welfare, from economic welfare, broadly construed. What we can’t necessarily answer is what’s the best thing to do for society? Because then you’ve got ethical issues, value judgments, how do we look if something is affecting the environment, for example, and that affects future generations? How do we, how do we analyse that, that those can be difficult issues? Or how do we make choices regarding health policy measures? So it’s not always they’re not always issues where economic considerations are the final determinant, you may need to bring in value judgments? Yeah, the whole distinction that thing was David Hume between isn’t board? Yeah, yeah. Yeah. Yeah. Could

Joe  37:34

all Hume who I guess himself was sort of an economist when he talked about Yeah, money and things like that? Yeah. Well,

Gene Tunny  37:42

anyway, he wrote a famous essay on the gold standard on price, the seaflo mechanism? I think it was, yeah, yeah. I

Joe  37:50

think the argument was that, yeah, it doesn’t matter if you if you have the money supply, and prices have as well, like, every, the welfare of everyone is the same, essentially, I think I only remember that because Polanyi then talked about it. Yeah. He was a pride our economist. Yeah, for sure. Yeah. So that’s all the pre prepared questions that we’ve got. I’m gonna go over to the lectern mic, and then we’ll be handing the handheld around to the members of the audience, if they want to ask gene any questions.

38:21

Just going back, I guess, to your discussion about public and private. And I guess, us as university students entering into the workforce, I just wrote a question down. So as university students, we are involved in Dubai, developing a variety of skills that, I guess were not explicitly taught in university, but that we hope to apply when we get into the workforce, from your experience, or what schools have surprised you from the recent generation of you know, incoming university graduates, and what do you think, you know, is missing from you know, they’re the skills that they’ve developed that they might not have been taught explicitly? Throughout University?

Gene Tunny  39:00

Okay. What’s most surprised me is just how savvy or how brilliant uni students are at producing PowerPoints, like slide deck, Oculus nowadays, we’re all competing in these case study competitions. I’ve been blown away. So yeah, that’s really impressive. Otherwise, yeah, just, I guess maybe I’ve been lucky. But yeah, I found the slide decks. The students type employed generally have good presentation skills, very good at research, good at getting across data and information. I think the skills you need to learn, like everyone needs to learn them, it’s it’s about writing as clearly as you can. Being proactive. It’s hard once you get out of uni because uni, you’ve got the targets to hit, you know, when the you’ve got to lodge your, your papers or when the exam is on, you got to turn up to it. It’s more structured work can be a bit unstructured at times. And so you got to, you’ve got to learn how to manage yourself, manage others get others to help you out a lot of those interpersonal skills, it’s just about building those up, you’ve probably been developed in developing them here at UNI. Anyway, that’s what I, I’d say, the I’ve been really impressed with UQ students in particular.

40:18

G’day, Gene, thanks for the talk. And for your time, I just want to go back to, again, back when you were talking about the distinctions between working in public and private sectors you mentioned as a downside, or a potential downside of working in the public sector was perhaps changing ministries disagreement with, I guess, the government of the day and, you know, a general sense of inefficiency about projects that you’re doing as a possibility. Did you find that your experience in the private sector was a bit more alleviated of those concerns? Or did you also have times where you disagreed with the direction of your projects,

Gene Tunny  40:54

I guess, you’ve got choices in the private sector. So you could actually refuse to do a job. But then you want to try and do a job if you can, if the client is going to pay you, that you have so many clients, you can move on and you can you can sack clients in a way and go okay, I’m not working with you again, if there if, if you didn’t enjoy it, or if it was just hard work. So that’s, that’s what I was getting out there. Whereas with, with government, if the government’s in for several years, and like, I think you’ve got to work for the government of the day, this isn’t a matter of politics. I’ve worked for both labour and coalition governments. And, and I don’t think the quality of the work, I actually think it’s more related to the people in charge at top, I think it relates a lot to their personal characteristics rather than their politics. So I don’t think there’s any correlation between the political strife of government and how good it is to work for, but yeah, you’ve got to be you’ve got to be flexible and realise, I mean, some people enjoy it. I can be challenging. Yes, Minister might be too old. But there was a show for two years, you know, yes, Minister, from the 70s and 80s with Nigel Hawthorne, and, and Jim Hakka. Do you remember he played Chewbacca, too? Anyway, it was a great show. But there’s a line in it where Bernard who was the principal Private Secretary to the Minister was talking to Humphrey says, I don’t understand why the minister wants to do this. How do we how do you cope with all of these changes in in policy direction and sound free says look, if I actually cared about what the policy direction the government was, I’d be stark raving mad because one minute, I’d be pro nationalism, nationalising steel, I’d be then Pro D nationalising steel, and then I’d be pro renationalising steel, because those things change. You’ve got to be flexible in government, that maybe that’s not for everyone. And politicians, I think can be difficult too. Because, you know, working for the government is can be challenging, because there’s a lot of media, there’s a lot of light on the government, and there are a lot of crises. And you can be called in at odd hours, particularly, like, the craziest time in Australian politics in the last 20 years was the Rudd Government. And I mean, it was just completely different from the previous government. But you know, a lot to his credit. I mean, Kevin Rudd wanted to do things, he he saw urgency, he had a great sense of urgency, he was an incredible hard worker himself. But that meant that there were requests coming in at odd hours, he’d he’d be flying back from a meeting a DC, he’d be there for the first time g 20. Meeting, and then he is playing with land in Hawaii. And then we get a call that the wants a paper on. So it’s such it’s such an issue by the time he lands in, in Canberra. And so this is might be on a Sunday or something. So it can be a bit crazy. But that’s what you get, if you want to be in that sort of environment, because there’s that political aspect to working in government. Some people really enjoy that they thrive on it. Others find that find it difficult. So yeah, that’s just Yeah, who knows? I mean, my experience could be a bit idiosyncratic. So that’s one thing to bear in mind to

44:09

sort of on that with the PwC scandal, they ended up selling all of their public sector work company, do you there’s been talk about whether all the big four companies are gonna end up having to do that. Do you think that that will happen and also just sort of see that as a good path forward

Gene Tunny  44:27

in terms of preventing corruption or in front of the think? Yeah, I think I mean, PwC has been forced to do it. The other firms, I think, would rather not do it. I’m trying to remember if v y looked at it and try remember where EY was trying to split its audit from its the rest of its business. And I don’t think it went ahead. I’ll have to look at the details of that. There are probably other ways to stop that, that conflict. I don’t know if that’s going to happen with the other firms, or not close enough to the people in those firms too. Uh, to make that judgement, but yeah, I don’t know to what extent it would look, if you got a job at one of those big four firms, then, you know, that’s, that’s going to be good, it’ll be good experience, even still at PwC is probably still good experience, despite the scandal, they’ll bounce back, they’ve got so many connections, they had a good reputation for a while, I’m sure they’ll be able to turn around eventually. Now, I’d have to wonder, like, as if you want to do consulting work, I’m not sure whether you’d want to go to a company just focused on public sector work. Because then why not just go into the public sector itself, if you like, if public sector is your thing, I’d go into government itself, because one of the things with consulting, I enjoy it, because I actually get to do a wide variety of things. I found personally, I found government difficult because I’m reasonably opinionated. And like, I wasn’t the Sir Humphrey cat character who could been just changed, not not care about the political, you know, the actual policy direction or, yeah, I thought I’d find that very difficult to do. So I actually quite enjoy being on my own or having freedom to, to write to comment. Whereas you can’t do that in government, you can’t say anything critical of the government. It’s difficult. There are advantages, because you can then get involved in, you know, in the policymaking and the decision making. You can work with the minister’s office, even the ministers. But if that’s what you want to do, you’re more likely to get that to do that in the public service, than if you did a public sector, in a public sector consulting organisation that consults to the to the government just depends on what you’re after.

46:43

This is kind of flowing on from that question a bit. Do you see any other consequences coming out of the PwC? Scandal? And I guess now, the KPMG scandal with defence contracts, I think, that kind of flow onto other consulting firms outside of the big fall? Or do you think that I guess, kind of trust in interpersonal relationships that might already exist? Kind of, I guess, being more important than that? Maybe?

Gene Tunny  47:09

Yeah, I think government public servants will be more conscious of the risks. And it may be harder as a consultant to work for, to work for government clients, because they may not automatically trust you. It may be harder to get access to information, you may have to sign more documents. It can be difficult, it’s difficult already working for the government agency. So projects I’ve done, Nicholas grown and I and another colleague did a job for services in Australia recently, looking at my gov and looking at the the investment in that and the benefits of of improving the Margao functionality. And I mean, we had to sign all’s we had to sign those documents that said we wouldn’t share this information. Of course, we wouldn’t. And you know, then PwC, they I think they probably their person who allegedly breached the trust signed documents to and they should have, they should have taken it seriously. And it looks like they didn’t. But what Services Australia did was they wouldn’t let us take documents away. We could only see some documents physically, in a Services Australia offers, because they’re highly confidential information relevant to the budget process. So they had the right controls in place. I think you’ll see more of that there. There’ll be less trusting. I think they’ll still be consulting opportunities. I think I think that they need the expertise from outside so much. They’re not going to cut back on that. But it’ll be more difficult. There’ll be more constraints in terms of access to information, they won’t automatically trust you. But I think they’ll still be, they’ll still be jobs that consolidate if you want to do that. Yeah.

Joe  48:44

Awesome. Well, if there’s no more questions, we just want to say thank you so much gene for coming along. And we’d like to offer you this gift. This is the statecraft which is our PPE society, student magazine. So lots of different articles from all sorts of students. Yeah, so thank you so much for coming and sharing your knowledge with us. It’s been really great and really appreciate you and hope to see you again in the future.

Gene Tunny  49:15

Righto, thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

50:02

Thank you for listening we hope you enjoyed the episode for more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Growth or Degrowth? w/ Oliver Hartwich, NZ Initiative – EP208

Show host Gene Tunny delves into the concept of Degrowth: the idea of deliberately shrinking economies to avoid the runaway climate change, ecological collapse, and societal breakdown that degrowth proponents are worried about. Gene first discusses degrowth with Oliver Hartwich from the New Zealand Initiative, and then responds to questions about degrowth at a recent University of Queensland Politics, Philosophy, and Economics student event. 

Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored.

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Dr Oliver Hartwich, NZ Initiative

Dr Oliver Hartwich is the Executive Director of The New Zealand Initiative. Before joining the Initiative, he was a Research Fellow at the Centre for Independent Studies in Sydney, the Chief Economist at Policy Exchange in London, and an advisor in the UK House of Lords. Oliver holds a Master’s degree in Economics and Business administration and a PhD in Law from Bochum University in Germany.

What’s covered in EP208

  • [00:04:39] Degrowth to stop climate change? 
  • [00:08:00] Economic growth and adaptation to climate change? 
  • [00:11:53] How a threatened lungfish colony stopped a new dam in South East Queensland. 
  • [00:15:47] Are we rich enough already? 
  • [00:20:20] Democratization of wealth and prosperity. 
  • [00:24:05] Economic growth as a positive. 
  • [00:30:39] Carbon pricing. 
  • [00:34:10] Decreasing Antarctic sea ice extent.

Links relevant to the conversation

Gene’s September 2023 Centre for Independent Studies (CIS) paper on Degrowth:

https://www.cis.org.au/publication/debunking-degrowth/

NZ Initiative podcast from which part 1 of this episode was borrowed:

https://www.nzinitiative.org.nz/reports-and-media/podcasts/podcast-debunking-degrowth/

Transcript: Growth or Degrowth? w/ Oliver Hartwich, NZ Initiative – EP208

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Oliver Hartwich  00:03

William Stanley Jevons in the 1860s actually predicted the word would run out of coal. This is general tendency to do linear thinking where everything is always continuing on a certain path. I mean, there was a letter right I believe, in the London Times in the early 20th century, predicting that London at some stage would be under six feet of bossman year from all the offices in the city. It is this tendency to always think we’re just continuing on the same path and it will never change.

Gene Tunny  00:41

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host, Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode. Please check out the show notes for relevant information now on to the show. To grow or not to grow, or indeed to D grow. That is the question. Do we need to rapidly shrink our economies to avoid runaway climate change, ecological collapse and societal breakdown? This episode features on my recent conversations on degrowth I speak with Oliver Hartwich from the New Zealand initiative. And thanks to Oliver for letting me reuse the recording from the New Zealand initiative podcasts that are recorded with him. This episode also includes a response that I gave to a question from Joe Christiansen at a recent event hosted by the University of Queensland politics, philosophy and economics society. Okay, let’s get into the episode. I hope you enjoy it. After you Listen, please reach out and let me know your own views on whether we should pursue D growth or not.

Oliver Hartwich  02:07

Hello, and welcome to the New Zealand initiatives podcast. My name is Oliver Hartwich, and today we are joined by our special guests from Australia we have gene Tunny, who is an adjunct Fellow at the Centre for independent studies, and also a director of ADAPT economics consultancy in Brisbane. Welcome to the podcast Gene.

Gene Tunny  02:24

Hello, Oliver, pleasure to be here.

Oliver Hartwich  02:26

Great to have you with us because we want to talk about a paper you just published last week with a centre for independent studies called debunking degrowth. Now, I thought we should start this conversation by just admitting freely that we are both economists. So degrowth is something that doesn’t come naturally to us usually, because normal economic theory, correct me if I’m wrong is all about trying to find better ways of combining factors to do more with less or to do more with the same, to find different combinations to create growth, to really find out what works and make an economy grow. And now suddenly, we’ve got a bunch of scholars turning this on its head telling us to actually try to not create so much wealth and not create so much prosperity, but really put the reverse gear in and go in the other direction. Is that a fair summary of what this movement is about?

Gene Tunny  03:16

Yes. I mean, they certainly want us to go in the other direction. I mean, the two steel man, their argument, I think, how I describe it is that they think we’re breaching these planetary constraints. So they think that we’re at a level of consumption, whereby we are essentially, you know, we’re sacrificing the well being of our children or grandchildren. So they’re concerned that we’re, we’re going to destroy the planet, some of this degrowth literature is it’s apocalyptic. It’s, I mean, I think it’s catastrophizing. But you know, they, they’re worried about climate change. They’re worried about ecological breakdown. They’re worried about resources being exhausted. So yeah, look, I largely agree with you, but to to steal man their argument, they think there’s evidence to support the view that we’re consuming too much if we want to have you know, sustainable living standards for future generations.

Oliver Hartwich  04:18

Right. And in your paper, you then produce a reproduce their claims, and you’re debunking them one after the other. And you’ve got five claims in your paper. So I thought what we might do so much is go through the list, and try to figure out what this movement wants and your response towards so the first unproven claim you talk about in your paper is one that you already alluded to. We need to de grow to stop climate change. Why do they say that and why do you think this is wrong?

Gene Tunny  04:46

Oh, well, essentially they’re they think that we’re on these tipping points. I mean, you’d know that it appears that the planet is warming I mean, there’s scientific support for for co2 We were warming the atmosphere to an extent. So that’s difficult to contest. But they claim that they believe these real these tipping points sort of scenarios. Whereby, I mean, the permafrost melts. There’s all this methane release, you know, we have the, what is it one of those ocean currents that shuts down? And I mean, all sorts of apocalyptic scenarios. And I mean, just looking at it. I mean, I think that the evidence for that is, I mean, a lot of it comes out of computer modelling, there are all these computer simulations, whereby if you look at what they’re doing a lot of the conclusions, the apocalyptic conclusions are essentially assumed or built into the model. So I mean, my feeling is that the evidence isn’t, isn’t strong enough to justify that apocalyptic thinking. Sure, there’s some warming going on. But there are policy measures been introduced to try to address that, or, I mean, none of the credible modelling on climate change mitigation has degrowth. in it. I mean, we can still grow, we’ll still be wealthier in per capita terms. Maybe the growth rates less or more if we respond to climate change. I mean, now we’ve got people saying that if we don’t address climate change, we’ll have lower growth. So look, I think they’re making big claims about how we’re going to, you know, have this unsustainable runaway global warming if we don’t do something radical and massively cut back our consumption. So that’s essentially their argument. And I just don’t think the evidence supports that.

Oliver Hartwich  06:43

But of course beyond that, because we’ve already decoupled economic growth to a degree from emissions. Yeah. So just because you’re growing doesn’t mean you’re necessarily growing your emissions.

Gene Tunny  06:53

Yeah, yeah, exactly. And I think they’re ignoring a lot of the technological change. They’re, they’re ignoring our capacity for innovation. Yeah, that’s absolutely correct. So I guess not to not to necessarily defend them, but they do address that decoupling argument. And they do acknowledge that that, you know, the emissions intensity of GDP is declining. But in their view, I mean, we’re still increasing co2 emissions, or sorry, we’re still, you know, the co2 in the atmosphere is still growing. So they’re a bit sceptical of that whole decoupling argument.

Oliver Hartwich  07:31

There’s another aspect to the whole climate change debate. And that’s adaptation, of course. So I mean, if we’re comparing countries like the Netherlands and Bangladesh, Bangladesh is subject to flooding, but so is the Netherlands because they are mainly under normal sea levels. And yet, the Dutch build dikes and all sorts of infrastructure to deal with that, because they could afford it. And then Bangladesh, and they’re still waiting for that to happen. So actually, isn’t actually economic growth, the thing that saved the Netherlands from flooding

Gene Tunny  07:58

out? Yeah, look, that’s, that’s a good point. I mean, you wouldn’t want to de grow and stop emerging economies from getting wealthier, because that will decrease their capacity to actually adapt to deal with it. I absolutely agree with you there. And look, that’s one of the things that the degrowth movement misses in my view. I mean, there’s all of this, you know, it’s a lot of the standard sort of criticism of, of capitalism and, and economists that you get from people on the left, and yeah, I mean, it ignores the fact that I mean, since countries such as China and India embrace the market, right, China in the 80s, and things are paying and then we had the, the end of the licence, Raj and in India, I mean, they’ve they’ve had, you know, much better growth than previously and we’ve had over a billion people lifted out of poverty. So yeah, absolutely agree with you there, Oliver.

Oliver Hartwich  08:52

Okay, then let’s move on to your second unproven claim, we need to de grow to stop resource depletion, environmental degradation and biodiversity loss. That leads us straight into the debate around Julian Simon, or if we want to go back a little bit further. Thomas Malthus. Yeah, absolutely.

Gene Tunny  09:08

And I think history shows that I mean, we are able to address these issues. And a lot of the concerns came best addressed through the market through clear delineation of property rights. A lot of the problems we have in Brazil, for example, that there was a recent economist article I’ve mentioned in the, in the paper, which is essentially saying a lot of the problem with the rainforest, destruction of the rainforest is lawlessness, it’s bad enforcement. Right. And look, you know, there are efforts all around the world to, to conserve to the off the common Exactly, exactly. So it’s really just, yeah, they just seem to ignore that. You know, what economists know about the people who own a resource are going to, you know, protect it and conservator. So yeah, absolutely. And look, I mean, look, you have to acknowledge that there has been a loss of biodiversity over over decades. And I mean, I think we’re starting to address that we’re starting to arrest that decline. And certainly the so I’ve got a there’s some evidence there about the decline in biomass globally or number of animals. And, you know, that’s, that’s been arrested that decline, which, which is good. So look, I think, you know, it’s a lot of just negativity, and isn’t capitalism awful. Whereas, really, I mean, we can address these issues, they’re within our ability to control and look, just look what we’re doing in Australia. I mean, we’re a wealthy country. So we, and this goes to your point before all over that the wealthier countries are going to be better able to address these issues. I mean, we’ve got things like biodiversity offsets. Anytime you want to do a development that impacts the environment, you have to prove about how you manage those impacts. And we’ve even stopped, we stopped the dam in southeast Queensland, even though we need the water. Right, it’s good. We’ve got a hugely growing population. And we stopped a dam because we were concerned about a lungfish. So yeah, I mean, we are trying to address these issues. And I think, yeah, that that argument really doesn’t, doesn’t hold up. And the other point too, as you know, as an adopt a dam over length, yep. Travis didn’t dam. That sounds like an episode straight out of utopia. Well, it happened. It was Peter Garrett, who was environment minister here. So um, yeah, it was a huge issue, because we had a water crisis in the 2000s here in southeast Queensland. And so we built a desalination plant, which is hugely expensive. We built a recycled water plant. And then we were looking at a dam north of Brisbane in the Murray Valley, the travesty and dam and it got right to the point where the federal government had got to the federal approvals process and it was blocked by the environment minister, Peter Garrett, former lead singer of Midnight Oil. Yes, I have this man. He was the environment minister. It’s a burning blocked it because the lungfish was threatened. So yeah, apparently there was no way of, of looking after the lungfish if you built the dam. So yeah, that’s that’s just an example of how we do care about the environment in this country. It’s not as if we’re sacrificing the environment for growth.

Oliver Hartwich  12:31

The other idea of course, in all of us resource depletion seems to be one of these ideas that you simply cannot ever refute, keeps coming back. Going back to Morpheus, of course, that’s the starting point. But William Stanley Jevons in the 1860s actually predicted the world would run out of coal. It’s this general tendency to linear thinking where everything is always continuing on a certain path. I mean, there was a letter right, I believe, in the London Times in the early 20th century, predicting that London at some stage would be under six feet of horse manure from all the horses in the city, it is this tendency to always think we’re just continuing on the same path, and it will never change.

Gene Tunny  13:11

Yeah, exactly. So and the thing with the scarcity of resources, I mean, we know that as they do become scarcer, the price is going to increase. And that’s going to encourage conservation, or it’s going to encourage people to switch to two alternatives. So and you mentioned, you alluded to the Julian Simon Paul Ehrlich bet, which ended up losing because he thought we were in the 70s, they thought we were on a path to, you know, massive resource scarcity. And that

Oliver Hartwich  13:41

perhaps, just for the benefit of listeners who may not be aware of that, so can you tell us briefly what this bench was about?

Gene Tunny  13:49

It was about prices of commodities, they selected, maybe a couple of dozen commodities, major commodities. And Ehrlich was betting that that increase in price over the the 80s by a certain percentage, amount across extreme people would run. Exactly because there was all of that modelling in the world. Ehrlich was infamous for that population bomb book in the late 60s, which forecast that you know, would, you know, even with, like, what was it 888 billion people which where we are now we’d end up with, you know, massive famines and the chaos and all of this. And

Oliver Hartwich  14:27

then we’ve got the Club of Rome, of growth and all of our

Gene Tunny  14:30

forests and meadows, and there was all of this apocalyptic thinking, you know, Doomsday was at hand. So I think what I found interesting looking at this old degrowth literature, is a lot of the a lot of the concerns or a lot of their arguments could could be questioned or rebutted, if you go back to just what sensible people like Robert Solow and then the Treasury here in Australia, what they were saying in response to the club Right, right. Yeah. So

Oliver Hartwich  15:03

we make made a very similar point in one of our publications. A few years ago, we had a little booklet published under the title The Case for economic growth. And we were talking about environmental Kuznets curve, where, first of all, when the economy grows, yet there is an impact on the environment, and it might be negative. But once you get past a certain point, people will demand action and clean it all up. Yeah. And actually, it gets better over time.

Gene Tunny  15:26

Yeah. And that’s one of the points that I made in the paper. Yeah, absolutely.

Oliver Hartwich  15:31

Your third point, your third unproven claim is perhaps even more interesting. We are rich enough already? Well, it would be harder to make that claim in New Zealand, because we’re 25% behind Australia. What’s the thinking behind that?

Gene Tunny  15:47

Oh, well, they make the argument that if you look at happiness, Carl, you know, correlations of happiness and GDP per capita beyond a certain level, it starts to flatten out. And so the argument is that countries such as Australia, and I mean, maybe New Zealand doesn’t qualify yet, but we’re wealthy enough already got a way to go. It’s all about you know, it’s it’s an issue of inequality. So there’s this sort of argument that I look, the West is rich enough already. It’s if you concern about the rest of the world, and it’s, you should redistribute that income. And you know, the people in the West were the ones who, of course, we’ve caused all the problems with climate change, et cetera, it’s all our fault, imperialism, and all of that. And so that we should redistribute our income and wealth, the problem is, that’s only going to go so far. Right? It’s not going to solve the problem. And it’s not good for, you know, incentives. Right. It’s not good for it’s not sustainable. So it’s just a really bad argument, I think. And, and it also, I mean, when you look at it, this, this is going to require authoritarian measures to introduce because at the moment here in Australia, we’re going to cost a living crisis, right? So you’re not going to be able to tell people, and we’ve got no shortage of housing, you’re not gonna be able to tell people, you’re rich enough already. Because a lot of people who don’t know when I’m What are you talking about this nonsense? You’d have to engage in really authoritarian measures to bring about D growth. So yeah, I think it’s a really bad argument of the D growth people.

Oliver Hartwich  17:20

Exactly. Right. I think there is another point actually, that we should consider. Sometimes it’s not so much the absolute wealth that you hold. It’s the direction of travel. So I’ve actually seen some really happy people and countries that are not that rich yet, but they’re travelling in the right direction, whereas you can be in a richer country that’s kind of stagnating, declining, and feel really miserable about it. So actually, people want to have hope they want to see that the future is better. And then it almost doesn’t matter from which starting point you come in just the direction of travel that actually determines how happy you are.

Gene Tunny  17:51

Yeah, that’s a good point. I mean, the the example of a country that was rich and started declining, everyone was miserable. It’s probably Britain in the 1970s. So yeah, I think that’s a that’s a good point. Yeah.

Oliver Hartwich  18:03

unproven claim number four, we need to de grow to reduce inequality. What about well,

Gene Tunny  18:11

yep, I mean, I guess this is this is related to that previous point. So and this is part of their whole critique of capitalism that capitalism makes the rich richer and the poor, poor? And look, I think that’s a really silly argument. And there’s not a lot of evidence for that. And, and if you look at just the huge gains we’ve had in living standards in emerging countries, emerging economies over the last 30 years, since we’ve opened up to the market, and it’s just extraordinary, over a billion people taken out of out of poverty, there are a few stats that I use, or that the World Bank’s produce, which shows that I think, around 1990, it might have been 70% of the world was living on $6 us a day or something like that. So not the diarist poverty of $2 a day, but And now that’s under 50%. Right. So if you look at the numbers living on $2 a day, then you have, you know, a big decline there, too. So we’ve got huge gains, so that in relative terms the world is becoming more equal, but we are seeing in some countries that, you know, there is an increase in inequality, particularly in the United States. But I think you don’t want to then conclude that our the market systems terrible isn’t, because a look I mean, that’s associated with new technology. I mean, we’ve gone through a period of, of huge technological disruption and I mean, America, America is the leader in that and so therefore, the people who are responsible for that are doing doing very well. And look, you probably you’re better off having a more productive a wealthier economy. And you know, having In the pie bigger and then sure you can then have a debate about the, the shares of that pie. But you want to have the biggest pie possible, I’d say,

Oliver Hartwich  20:09

because in the end, what capitalism and what economic growth? Does it actually share us? The wealth with more people, it’s the democratisation of luxury, if you like. Yeah, I remember actually speaking as an event, and quite a few years ago, under the headline, people with flat screen TVs should stop whinging about capitalism. One of the arguments I made was actually, if you teleport at someone who was really, really rich a few 100 years ago, so you take the Sun King Louis Catorze, and you kind of get do rica tours and visit 21st century Australia or New Zealand? What would Luca tours be really impressed about? Well, that you could switch on the light with a switch, or that you could read your newspaper from a foreign country on your phone, or that you could just call someone in a distant city. But I think what he would really be surprised about was that this was available not just to his modern day equivalent, but to everybody. And so we have actually completely democratised wealth and prosperity to a degree that we had never seen it before in the history of humankind. No, absolutely.

Gene Tunny  21:13

I mean, indoor plumbing is one of the great innovations and better sanitation. I mean, the world today is clearly much better, even even if you’re a king and seventh eighth 13th centuries, and yes, you’d much rather live today I’d say yeah.

Oliver Hartwich  21:30

Yeah. Even if you’re not a king. Which then leads us to the combination of all these unproven claims. Number five, we need to de grow to avoid economic and social collapse. So listening to you, it seems obvious, it is the opposite. If we want to avoid social and economic collapse, we need to grow.

Gene Tunny  21:50

Yeah, well, this is part of that whole, apocalyptic or catastrophic line of thinking. And you know, that there was that study a few years ago by she was a consultant. And she wrote this, I should have I’ve got the I’ve got the reference in the in the report, but she reproduced the the meadows analysis, or the the Limits to Growth analysis from the 1970s. And she’s saying, Oh, if you look at the data, we’re on track for societal economic and societal collapse, which is what the limits to growth model was predicted. So she had an update to limits of growth. Harrington is a surname. But I mean, it just, it’s part of this, you know, catastrophizing, when you look at these models, and this is a point that solo made back in the 70s, when he just tore apart the, the whole Limits to Growth analysis in his great challenge article he wrote is the is the end of the world at hand that are referenced in the paper. And I mean, they just build in the fact that we’re going to hit some point of no return, and then everything’s just going to collapse. So there’s a in their simulations, they have eventually population industrial output, reach some peak and then just collapse. But it’s just built into the model that programme that into it. And you can’t say that because we’re or maybe some variables are tracking with what the model forecast, you can’t then conclude, oh, here, well, then we’re gonna hit this peak, and then we’re going to suddenly collapse because there’s no evidence that that’s going to happen. And any person who does forecasting knows that these tipping points, these turning points are the most difficult things to actually forecast. So yeah, it’s just, again, it’s just catastrophizing.

Oliver Hartwich  23:42

Absolutely. So, in conclusion, you have saved conventional economics, you have actually demonstrated that what economists have been telling us all along is basically Correct. Actually, economic growth is a positive. And by finding better ways of combining economic factors of production, we are improving prosperity, we are making societies return that’s a good thing.

Gene Tunny  24:05

Look, yeah, I largely agree with that, Oliver. And what I would say is that, just as we degrowth, like targeting negative growth would be silly, or not, when I’m not necessarily advocating that we target a specific rate of economic growth, because ultimately, that’s going to be the product of, of the market of people making. Yeah, and I don’t want to be, I’m not saying that look, unfettered capitalism is what we want. I mean, we need some regulations, we, you know, there are some market failures we may need to address but what I’m saying is that, you know, this whole degrowth thing is rather silly and, and there’s no evidence to suggest that we can’t continue to grow and really, I mean, growth is a solution to a lot of problems. So particularly if you’ve got a shortage of housing, you know, if we want to lift living standards in emerging economies, where they’re still much lower than, than here in Australia and New Zealand,

Oliver Hartwich  24:58

and of course for the last few years we’ve had a movement, trying to make the case that actually it’s not about growth. It’s not about conventional economic measures, it should be something bit fuzzier, something like a well being budget. That’s what we pay on it here in New Zealand. And I think your minister of finance or whatever he’s called an Australian federal, Jim Sharma has has bought completely into that narrative. And, you know, also on to wellbeing budgets, but that’s not really compatible with and with a growth mind or growth. Focus.

Gene Tunny  25:27

Yeah, I mean, that’s, that’s a separate thing. I mean, I don’t necessarily have a problem with looking at a broader range of indicators than than GDP per capita, but you just don’t, I mean, look at a lot of that. The well being or to

Oliver Hartwich  25:42

me, it always sounded as if they were trying to find an excuse for not having to deliver GDP per capita increases. And so they’re looking for something fire and quality well being. Yeah,

Gene Tunny  25:51

quite possibly. And, yeah, I mean, it’s another thing that the treasurer couldn’t launch and, you know, makes them look like they care about different concerns of the community. So look, yeah, I think it’s a bit, you know, a bit of a waste of time, the whole well being budget, because, yeah, a bit of a distraction. But yeah, take your point. Maybe that is what they’re trying to do that it’s a, it’s a cover for not actually achieving a decent rate of economic growth.

Oliver Hartwich  26:19

Well, that could be a topic for your next paper. And if you’re looking for materials, you’ll find them all in New Zealand. Very good. Okay. Sounds good. But, but for now, can I just thank you for sharing your thoughts with us on the podcast. And just for all our listeners, genes paper is called debunking degrowth, you can find it on the Centre for Independent Studies website in Australia sets ci s.org.au. But for now, thank you, gene for being our guest. And good luck for your future papers, we look forward to seeing them.

Gene Tunny  26:50

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  26:55

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with adept economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice, we can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world, you can get in touch via our website, www dot adapt economics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  27:24

Now back to the show.

Joe  27:29

You mentioned the environment there and sort of political movements and value judgments obviously very, very important. For everyone alive, yeah. But especially with the sort of younger generation. And one idea that is sort of gained popularity in recent years has been this idea of D growth as a way to sort of solve the ongoing climate crisis. And you wrote an article, I think recently, the Centre for independent studies about about D growth. And you said that any attempt will like to sort of implement this idea that we need to have negative growth will greatly reduce the living standards and cause significant unemployment. We have a question here that says, if it is as severe as predictions suggest, then is not some form of dramatic economic structural change necessary to prevent continued pollution, mass production, carbon emissions, environmental degradation. So yeah, it seems that either this change will be voluntary, in that we will decide to do it, whether that be D growth or some other sort of economic restructuring, or it will be forced by the nature of the crisis in that our economic system will collapse?

Gene Tunny  28:46

Well, I hope that’s not the case. You talk about prediction. So well, this is where it’s difficult. Like this is a very difficult area to actually talk about, because there’s so much complexity going on there. And in terms of predictions, there are projects, some predictions that have catastrophe of permafrost melting all this methane being released to the atmosphere, this Supercharged global warming, ocean currents shutting down in Arctic melting. And I mean, horrible scenarios. Now, that’s not generally what we think is going to happen. I mean, that suppose look, there’s anything really could happen, right? I mean, I’m not a climate modeller or an expert on climate change. But if you look at what the IPCC has been, what it’s been modelling or projecting what our own governments have been doing, they do show that there is a path to get into net zero by 2050. There will be warming of one and a half to two degrees, probably two degrees Celsius on average. There seems to be an acceptance that by many that, okay, that that’s something we can adapt to it’s there will be a First consequences of that, but it’s not going to be catastrophic or lead to that Armageddon scenario. Now look, the question, if that is the case, if it is the case that we are in that situation where the worst predictions do come to come, you know that they do occur, then we will have to do something radical, it won’t be a matter of trying to get that change gradually over time. And the idea of having a carbon price is to send that signal to the market to, in an efficient way, reduce your emissions, invest in new technology to get to net zero. So that’s what the policy’s been now, governments are finding it very difficult to do that. Okay. So we’ve got an implicit carbon price in Australia, we’ve got these Australian carbon credit units, we’re going to market for that. We’ve got a safeguard mechanism, which is going to be requiring big emitters to reduce emissions. And so we’ve got an implicit carbon price. But you could, you know, there’s arguments about what that should be, are we are we doing it fast enough, there’s the how many we’re gonna have to keep coal going coal fired power stations going for a lot longer than we expect. We wanted to because we’re worried about the reliability of the energy grid. Unless we can get the hydropower stations on on schedule. And then that’s pretty difficult to see what’s happening with snowy 2.0. They’ve had one of the tunnel boring machines stuck. So it’s, it’s a big challenge. Now, I don’t know if you saw what Rishi Sunak has done in the UK, they’re delaying their transition to net zero. So Boris Johnson had committed to stopping the sales of petrol powered vehicles by 2030. Rishi Sunak, push that back to 2035. And there are a few other things to do with I think, gas in the home. So I think the push push that back when I have to stop having guests in the home, because these policies are they’re challenging to implement, or politically, they’re difficult. And as we we really need American leadership, we need China, America and China, the EU and Japan. They’re the major economies we need them to come up with a binding global agreement. And we go along with that. Yeah, it’s, it’s a big challenge. So we’ll get my opinion there. And I’m, I’ve got to admit, I’m not an expert on the climate. So for what for what it’s worth, my opinion is those predictions. There’s apocalyptic predictions, I like to think of them as catastrophizing. We’ve had predictions of doomsday for as long as I’ve been alive. And before then Malthus were Club of Rome. I mean, this is the latest. And in that sort of line of thinking, I’d like to think that there though, those horror stories, I mean, look, if that if we if it does come to be that that is the situation, we will have to change very rapidly. And that will require very strong measures. And it may be that yeah, there is a big hit to GDP. But at the moment I my sort of judgement, the judgement of I think practically all the people in governments around the world is that that’s not the situation we’re in. Could they be wrong? It’s very possible that I sit? I hope not. But look, I admit there, there are certainly concerning signs out there. I mean, and, you know, I’m a lot older than than you are. So you’d have to live with it more than I will. So maybe that’s something to that. I know that I understand why young people are concerned about it, for sure.

Joe  33:24

Yeah. Yeah. Awesome. Thank you. For that perspective, we have John Quiggin. Yes, he teaches still, he teaches one of the PPE courses, and that’s sort of his, like the the environmental economics perspective on climate change is very much up his alley way. So it’s, it’s good to hear your perspective as well. But not

Gene Tunny  33:45

having John here. So we can get you on the question, but I’m not. I don’t imagine John Wooden is there’ll be arguing for degrowth would eventually be arguing for a high carbon price to bring about that transition as rapidly as possible. And to try and encourage innovation. And the great thing about him is that we’re proven is that we are great innovators when there’s a challenge. So be maybe there’ll be people we did have to have that that radical policy shift because the Antarctic starts, you know, I mean, we know that the sea ice is the extent of that is not as great as it has been. It looks. You look at that chart. Okay, that’s a bit of a worry if that continues. And if we do have all of these record heat waves, I mean, we’re currently in El Nino at the moment here. So that’s driving as the lot of the heat. Yeah. If things get really bad, then yeah, sure. We may have to act rapidly. There may be a hit in the short term, but I expect we’ll solve it somehow. Humans are great innovators, loose. That’s the hope maybe that’s naive optimism.

Joe  34:48

No, definitely. Definitely something to cling on to at least with hope. Yeah. Awesome.

Gene Tunny  34:56

Righto, thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting outlets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

35:43

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this. To begin your own podcasting journey, head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

How Ben Bernanke can bring Superforecasting to the Bank of England w/ Nicholas Gruen – EP207

Host Gene Tunny chats with Dr. Nicholas Gruen about economic forecasting and what recommendations former US Fed Chair Ben Bernanke could make in his current review of forecasting at the Bank of England. Nicholas, the CEO of Lateral Economics, discusses the shortcomings of economic forecasting and shares his insights into how it can be improved. The conversation was inspired by Nicholas’s article in the Financial Times titled “How to Improve Economic Forecasting.” The episode is split into two parts, with the second part focusing on the feedback Nicholas received on his article. 

Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored.

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Nicholas Gruen

Described by the Financial Times’ Chief Economic Writer Martin Wolf as “a brilliant man who deserves to be better known”, and by former Finance Minister Lindsay Tanner as “Australia’s foremost public intellectual”, Dr Nicholas Gruen is a policy economist, entrepreneur and commentator on our economy, society and innovation.

What’s covered in EP207

  • [00:02:13] Ben Bernanke’s review of economic forecasting at the Bank of England.
  • [00:05:23] Hedgehogs and foxes. 
  • [00:09:36] Long-term issues with economic forecasting. 
  • [00:13:18] Improving economic forecasting techniques. 
  • [00:19:29] Forecasting accuracy. 
  • [00:24:30] Open sourcing economic forecasting. 
  • [00:26:29] Developing a forecasting market. 
  • [00:34:21] Tetlockian forecasting tournaments. 
  • [00:48:37] Wind in the Willows author Kenneth Grahame at the Bank of England.

Links relevant to the conversation

Video versions of the conversations featured in this episode on Nicholas’s YouTube channel:

https://youtu.be/uJNU8z9148w?si=lk4jfQMWkVx1__Le

https://youtu.be/KflFvpeC3iI?si=sFOaNruFTMet802j

Information on the Bank of England’s Citizens’ Panels/Forums:

https://www.bankofengland.co.uk/about/get-involved/citizens-panels

https://www.bankofengland.co.uk/about/get-involved/citizens-panels/the-uk-economy-insights-from-the-bank-of-englands-citizens-panels

Mandarin column in which Nicholas declares former Bank of England Chief Economist Andy Haldane was “my favourite public servant in all the world”:

https://www.themandarin.com.au/87423-now-time-complacency-rba-vs-bank-england-edition/

Transcript: How Ben Bernanke can bring Superforecasting to the Bank of England w/ Nicholas Gruen – EP207

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Gene Tunny  00:06

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning in to the show. In this episode, I chat with Dr. Nicholas Gruen about economic forecasting. Nicholas is CEO of lateral economics. He’s been described by the Financial Times as Chief Economic writer Martin Wolf as a brilliant man who deserves to be better known, and by former Australian finance minister Lindsay Tanner, as Australia’s foremost public intellectual. This conversation was inspired by an article that Nicholas had published in late August in the Financial Times How to improve economic forecasting. The FTS one line summary of the article was myopia and groupthink mean this science is not as evolved as it could be. This episode is in two parts. The first was recorded prior to Nicholas’s article coming out, and in the second part, we reconvened to go over some of the feedback that he received on the article. The video version of the first part is available on Nicholas’s YouTube channel. I’ll include links in the show notes to the YouTube channel, and to material mentioned in the episode. Okay, let’s get into the conversation. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Nicholas Gruen. Nicolas, good to be catching up with you again on economic forecasting. Likewise, so Nicholas, last month, the Bank of England announced that Ben Bernanke, so the former chair of the Federal Reserve in the US, he is to lead a review into forecasting at the Bank of England. So the the court of the Bank of England’s pleased to announce Dr. Ben Bernanke has agreed to lead a review of the bank’s forecasting and related processes during times of significant uncertainty, or we’ve had plenty of those. And he’ll be supported by the bank’s Independent Evaluation Office. Now, Nicholas, you’ve had some thoughts on what Ben Bernanke could offer to the Bank of England regarding forecasting, haven’t you? So would you be able to give us an overview of what those thoughts are, please?

Nicholas Gruen  02:44

Sure. So their thoughts? I’m not terribly hopeful. And that’s an amazing thing to say about Ben Bernanke. I regard Ben Bernanke happens to have a Nobel Prize on his shelf. Ah, you’ll notice that I don’t. And I also think he’s a great guy. You know, he’s a very sensible, practical economist with a lot of understanding of empirical economics and happened to be a one of the world’s experts on the Great Depression at the time when boy, did we need an expert on the Great Depression in the Fed. So that’s all great. I fear that Ben Bernanke, like a really scandalously large proportion of economists are so caught up in their own discipline that they haven’t noticed what has happened in adjacent areas. And this is a little bit like, what’s been going on is something quite like what Daniel Kahneman and Danny and a must for Seversky. If I got that, right, we’re cooking up with behavioural economics. It’s happened a little since then. But a guy that many people will have heard of Philip Tetlock, he got tenure in about 1982 Or three. And he decided that he would now engage in a long term project that he always wanted to engage in, but you can’t if you don’t have tenure, because you get sacked before you could get a publication if there’s so long range thing. And what he wanted to measure was do geo political experts. You can call Tom Friedman. He certainly poses as a geopolitical expert, The New York Times columnist, but also intelligence analysts, academics, international relations academics. If you ask them to forecast events, do they add value? Do they the fact that it’s quite clear they know more than your average bear? Does that translate into actually having actionable better capacity to say what’s going to happen? And the answer was on average and barely. And then he divided that up into experts that did add something. And they didn’t add that much, and experts that actually were worse than ranked, or worse than a naive prediction, and he divided them up into hedgehogs and foxes, hedgehogs no one big thing. And that means that their forecasts are worse than yours or mine, Gene, because we’re just trying to doing our best, whereas the hedgehog will have one big thing, you’ll be anti communist or pro communist, or this or that. And that banks, their forecasts worse than a fox, I think of someone like the economist, John Maynard Keynes, or Paul Krugman, as a fox, someone who knows many things and is trying to balance all those things, and to work out how much this matters and how much that matters, and how much do I know and so on. Now, that’s pretty striking. But it doesn’t tell us exactly what to do. But there is one thing that the study showed us. And it didn’t, we didn’t actually need the study to show us. But it gives us a very concrete illustration of a problem, which is, and this goes on in economics, which is that if you don’t issue your forecasts in a form, that can be back tested, that we can revisit and say did was that a good forecast or a bad forecast? And how did it compare with your peers? You’re basically, you know, it’s a bit like fortune telling. And to do that. What Tetlock did was he forced analysts to say precisely what they were predicting would happen, or in fact, he would specify something like, my Mikhail Gorbachev will continue to be the secretary of the general Committee of the Communist Party, whatever it was called, then, by the end of 1988. What are the chances and then you would have to say, I think the chances are 88% or 23%? Not probably, which means somewhere between 51% and 100%. And not unlikely. And not you can’t rule this out the sort of things you read in a newspaper column. Now we need to do that with economic forecasts.

Gene Tunny  07:31

Yeah, yeah. So just for background, so Philip Tetlock is a Canadian American Political science professor at University of Pennsylvania. And yeah, he wrote that book, super forecasting, or super forecasters. I’m

Nicholas Gruen  07:46

just gonna get on to the talk about that’s the book for the people who can watch not the people who are listening. I’m holding it up to the microphone. Thank you.

Gene Tunny  07:54

Yeah, absolutely. And so he was looking at, you mentioned geopolitical forecasts. But we’re interested in economic forecasts. Now, we know and I guess the general public knows that economic forecasts have been had. there been some notable failures and Amin in Australia that they go way back. I mean, always remember the I mean, I guess I was young at the time was in high school with the Treasury. And was forecasting the soft landing during was it the 9091 recession? Yeah. And it was the worst recession since

Nicholas Gruen  08:30

then, you know, the problems. Yeah. And there are other notable examples. More recently, we’ve been expecting wages to pick up and abroad for about, well over a decade, it just goes on. And, and to their credit, the Treasury and the reserve, published these graphs, I might see if I can put one in the show notes or on screen, or the editor can put one on screen, where you see wage growth gradually trending down with every year, the forecast is to come back to the long term at what was the long term trend average, it’s no longer the long term trend average.

Gene Tunny  09:08

Yeah. And there are some charts like that in the latest intergenerational report that the Treasury has put out, Jim Chalmers launched today, which showed just how bad those long run projections have been. So you know, it’s a it’s a problem, both in the short term and the long term. With economics. Yes. So I suppose yeah, be good to sort of to diagnose I mean, what are the what’s the actual issue and the problem is that the the economy is fundamentally difficult to forecast but

Nicholas Gruen  09:41

no, but I mean, we’re not even trying so to try, we would nail economic forecast down to something that can be properly back tested so I we have a forecast. You may know what the Treasury’s forecast is for wages or growth. Next year, I don’t you just give us a number. Even if you don’t know, the sort of thing you think it should be around what for wages, wages or for growth it all for economic growth,

Gene Tunny  10:12

it’s probably around 2%, or two and a half percent or so and a

Nicholas Gruen  10:16

half, okay, two and a half percent. So first problem is that if the forecast is 2.5%, and it comes in at 2.62%, is that a success? Or is that a failure? So because 2.5%, we call it a point forecast, and the chances that it comes in exactly at that number are infinitesimally small, I just have to add decimal points. And eventually, it won’t won’t be 2.500000. It will be it will fall on one side or the other of 2.5. So we need if, if we’re going to back test, a forecast, we need a forecast that we can declare a success or a failure. And the next thing we need is we need the forecast to tell us how confident they are that it’s got that that event will happen. And that happens to be exactly how weather forecasters forecast. They give us an event it will rain which I’m sure has a media or logical definition of you know more than this amount of precipitation in 24 hours or in in an hour. It will rain and it will rain with this degree of probability. Now what’s beautiful about that is Daniel Kahneman says that there are places where he said this I think he’s a no doubt he’s been more circumspect in other places, but I’ve heard him say, all professions are overconfident? Well, weather forecasters are not overconfident. Because the confidence with which they express themselves becomes part of the metric by which we judge them. And so they make a point of being exactly the right degree of confidence. So I think of weather forecasting as one of the few Socratic areas of domain expertise, because it knows what it knows. And it knows the limits of that knowledge. So that’s what we need to start to try to do with economists. And I think it was you who sent me this thing in the last six months where some of the techniques that Philip Tetlock has perfected has developed, have started to show dividends in economic forecasting. Now, one thing we haven’t explained yet is that that in that book, super forecasting, Philip Tetlock took the ideas with which he demonstrated how little value was added, and how some types of people added more value than others. And he asked himself the question, could we identify the very best to the people who consistently add the most value? Can we understand more about how they do that? Could we get them together and get them to help each other? And the answer is that using these simple and common sensical techniques, you can actually start to get a lot better. Certainly, geopolitical forecasting. And now there’s some evidence that we may be able to get better at economic forecasting.

Gene Tunny  13:32

Right? So with weather forecasting, so in your you’ve been working on a, an article on this, and you’ve identified that weather forecasts are much better than they were 30 years ago. Yeah. Now, that’s because of an infant. My understanding is that’s because of the ingestion of so much new data. And I mean, we’ve seen with that integrated marine observing system, for example, the imass organisation that we’ve done some work for that there’s a whole bunch of data that comes from the ocean, and that helps with weather forecasts. They’ve got huge numerical models and their physical processes involved that they can actually model with economics is a lot, a lot more challenging. So yeah, weather I guess, it is embarrassing. How economic forecasting hasn’t hasn’t improved. And I suppose that does suggest we need to, we need to adopt a different approach is not necessarily going to be we’re not necessarily going to improve our forecast by building more complicated models or bringing in more data. Perhaps we do need to adopt a new approach along the lines of this super forecasting methodology. And you mentioned, yep, there was that evidence about how they’re forecasting the Fed rate decisions much more accurately than others their super forecasting approach. So I guess you are starting to unpack it. What do you see as the main elements of This super forecasting approach, Nicolas.

Nicholas Gruen  15:02

So one of the things that that I think is quite interesting and useful is that like Daniel Kahneman, who was the last person who really, I won’t say revolutionise because it’s not true, but he really he started a whole new way of thinking about things within economics and managed to get himself a Nobel Prize for his trouble. And he’s a psychologist. And so it was Philip Tetlock and Philip Tetlock is drawing our attention to something that’s incredibly important. But because it lies outside of economics, economists just ignore it. And what he’s saying is that if you want to be a good forecaster, you must forecast in a particular way, I’ll say you must have a certain kind of psychology. Now. In fact, in philosophy, there is a term for this, I don’t much fancy it, but the term is Virtue Epistemology. That is if you want to, if you want to be good at knowing if you want to be a good scientist, if you want to be good at mastering a domain and being useful to other people by not being overconfident. By actually knowing how much you know and making it count. Then you have to exhibit virtues, you have to exhibit actual virtues, you have to have the courage of your convictions, you have to have the humility to know when other people or events might be, make it time for you to revise your opinion. Is this reminding you of lots of economists? You’ve talked to Jim? And perhaps not so so the list that I put in this op ed that I’ve written for the Financial Times and may have been published by the time you people get to listen to this conversation? What qualities does he see in Super forecasters, as well as mastering the mesh necessary formal techniques, which we economists are very strong on. They’re open minded, careful, curious, and so critical. away like Socrates, of how little they know, they’re constantly seeking to learn from unfolding events, and from respected colleagues. So that’s how you forecast I would argue, that is how you do anything that is expert. And there’s a really important thing here. Because even if we can’t improve forecasting much, and one thing I do want to throw in, parenthetically on that question, is that when economists make for when a central bank or a treasury makes forecasts, this is a forecast of how certain economic aggregates are going to move that they plan to try to manipulate on on the way through. So it’s a very, it’s a very different kind of forecast, the, the forecasters of the weather don’t say, well, it’s going to be a 30% chance of rain on Tuesday, and we’re going to be trying to make it a 30% chance of rain on or we’re going to be making trying to make it a 20% chance of rain. So so it’s it’s a lot more complicated. But one of the things that are super forecaster might do person have that kind of temperament might do is they might say, well, our point forecasts much used to us. And the answer is I don’t think they I mean, quite apart from the fact that we can’t back test them. I think the most important thing I want to know as a business person doing planning of for something or as an employee, and I’m thinking should I buy a house or buy an investment property or whatever? Seen, I think the most important metric I want the most important thing I want forecast is what is the chance of a recession in the next six months or 12 months or two years? So I think we should be trying to forecast a lot more along those lines. Now there’s a problem and that is that well, firstly, let’s talk about the problem of forecasting at the moment. Because economists forecasts are not probabilistic because we don’t test an economist according to they don’t issue those forecasts like there is a 40% chance of recession or whatever. Almost all the time, even when a recession is more likely than most other times, it’s still unlikely that there will be a recession. And so now what we’ve got is we’ve got all the forecasters in the same situation as 40 tippers, which is I might want to say that the backmarker What do you call it the last of the non favourite in a horse race or a football am, I might want to say that I think the favourite has got an unusually large chance of losing. But I still think it’s more than 50%. So if people are just saying, How many times did you tip the right answer, then we’re not going hunting for who knows that this is the who’s got some extra information, which is that for some reason or other some some particular players not inform or something rather, that there’s a lower chance of the favourite winning than usual, no one has an incentive to do that if we’re going to give a prize out to the person at the end of the year, who tipped more winners than anyone else. And that’s real. And that’s what happens in economics. So of the last 18 recessions, economists pick, tipped about one or two of them. And if you’re competing with other economists, with how often you got it right or wrong, that’s actually quite a rational strategy. So what we need is, we need to find a way for economists to put their hand up and say, I think the chance of recession have gone from, let’s say, 10% per year or something like that, maybe a bit more, I think to the next year, it’s 35%, or whatever, and then at least you get an effective, you know, a number.

Gene Tunny  21:24

Right. So is this what Ben Bernanke should be recommending he should be recommending that the Bank of England provides percentage estimates of regarding its forecast, so how confident it is? I mean, to an extent it does that, I think, doesn’t it? It has Fein charts. It has fan

Nicholas Gruen  21:41

charts, it has fan charts. And I think, yeah, once you try to operationalize this in economics, you end up with a lot of fan charts. Now fan charts, we may or may be able to show those on the screen. And in the show notes, fan charts show you the point forecast through time, and then they say this, the 70% confidence interval is this fat. And the 90% confidence interval is this fat. In other words, if you want to know what were the the range within which we’re 90% Sure, that’s the range. Now the problem is that range isn’t helpful doing because the 90% range usually takes you from somewhat one of the most savage recessions you can possibly imagine through to boom conditions. So we do need to think about that. But what really, I think that there’s a few things here. One of the things is that we need to get, this is a good way to get different teams and different forecasters to compete with each other. It’s a good way to compare forecasters, so that you’re constantly getting feedback on who’s good and who’s not. The other thing that I think it does, well, it also enables us to surface you can have a different series, which is not in any central bank or Treasury that I know of, which is the chances of recession, you can have that series and you can have people trying to forecast that. Now there’s a further problem. And the problem is that we get feedback on what growth was every time we forecast it, because we can’t we get a growth number. We don’t get feedback on what the question was there a session will accept that the answer is no. It only varies once a decade or so. That’s a really big problem. Because if you want to ask who’s the best person at forecasting recessions, then you’ve got to wait 20 or 30 years to even start to short sort the sheep from the goats. Yeah. So Philip Tetlock has actually been working on this on a problem. It’s not in economics. It’s in his his the area that he manages to get the most funding from, which is in intelligence organisations and so on. But what he’s trying to ask is, can we leverage the credibility of forecasters of things we do get a lot of feedback from for these other areas where we get less feedback? And I think the answer is yes, we should be able to do that. And we must be able to do that in some areas, and maybe not in others. And then we don’t know about this area, but that’s the sort of thing that we should

Gene Tunny  24:28

be exploring. Okay, so for economics, so just to summarise, are you arguing for open sourcing for coal, that’s

Nicholas Gruen  24:36

a separate thing. That was what I was going to get to, which is that so what I want to see is that this is one area that given that we’ve outsourced all kinds of things in government that we shouldn’t have outsourced. Maybe we could outsource some of the things we should and we this is the sort of thing that we can outsource on I don’t even mean outsource we can’t what we should do the best Bank of England, the Reserve Bank of Australia can get with the programme and the programme is the smartest person is always outside the room. And in some areas, you can, in some sense, bring them in. And in other areas you can’t. But in the area of forecasting, you can and you can hold a Tetlock like forecasting competition, you can say, we’re trying to get forecast for this, and this and this and chances of recession in six months, one year and two years, and then everyone can participate. Now, the world or certainly the markets and the people in the different national countries, they want to know, what’s the reserve, what’s the central bank forecast, so that central bank has its own, I think that central bank should have its own teams, team or teams in these forecasts. But they should separate out the teams from the bank itself, and the bank should observe the forecast should observe the forecasting competition. And from that forecasting competition, say what it thinks is its best forecasts and those become signed with the imprimatur of the central bank. They might be produced by the central bank team, or one of them, they might be produced by somebody completely outside, they might be produced by some kind of hybrid. And all of this is visible to everyone. And so we’re starting to develop a market in which we can start to see who’s really good at this. And some people are going to surprise us on both the upside and the downside, by the way. So that’s what I’m suggesting.

Gene Tunny  26:46

Yeah, I mean, what, what I’d like to understand is, to what extent will it be teams, interdisciplinary teams of economists, and then some other non economists, may be busy people who are expert in business or maybe not even expert in business people who are just good forecasters. And when I was chatting with Warren hatch from good judgement, this is a organisation he set up with Philip Tetlock, he was telling me that it’s people with good pattern recognition skills, and then be in any discipline and people who are cognitively flexible, or they’re there. As you were saying before they actually they’re not caught up with their particular theory. They’re actually yeah, they’re evaluating everything. Yeah, that’s right. That’s

Nicholas Gruen  27:33

right. So the answer is, we don’t have to know the answer to that. But we Yes, you would expect that the teams that are going to perform best will be hybrid teams will have economists Well, technically excellent economists in them. They’ll have people who look at other kinds of things. And there will certainly be some surprises. And some people who’ve always had a fascination with, you know, certain kinds of things which turn out to be relevant to how you forecast. So that’s where I would expect it to, to end up. But maybe it’ll just be economic experts. If they win the if they win the competitions. All this Tetlock stuff will have proven itself to be relevant for economics, but both common sense and the evidence suggests that that that’s not the way it will turn out. And there aren’t that many areas where at the centre of government, you can improve performance and improve. And through that improve economic performance someone. This is this is one of those billion dollar bills on the pavement that we find ourselves talking about from time to time, Gene,

Gene Tunny  28:46

absolutely. Yeah. And I misremembered. What Treasury’s forecast is 2023 24 GDP forecasts for Australia at one and a half percent. So not Oh, is there any

Nicholas Gruen  29:01

memorable number or perhaps it is memorable, but not in a good

Gene Tunny  29:04

way? Just so many numbers out there? Harada? Yeah, exactly. Exactly. I feel sorry for these politicians, they get put on the spot about these different numbers from toe to toe? Oh, absolutely. Yeah, absolutely. fully on board with that suggestion. At the very least it’d be a good trial, a good pilot. Exactly that out, see how it will works?

Nicholas Gruen  29:23

Well, I’ll just say one other thing, which is that this is again, what we’re talking about here is convening power, not executive power. So anyone can run this. The Business Council could run this. It’s not it won’t be cheap, but it’s not very expensive. Having worked at the Business Council, I can tell you, their budget easily would easily accommodate this. You could do it for a few $100,000. Anyone can do this. So it’s it’s kind of extraordinary and pretty outrageous that we’ve really known this, that there are benefits here. We can do this better. And it just gets ignored again. And again, it got ignored in the review of the RBA that we had here. It’s pretty terrible that we’re not looking around and trying to grab hold of things that are in the ether, that it’s starting to work, and that we can benefit from.

Gene Tunny  30:21

Yeah, I suppose there’s a public benefit to it. It’s not necessarily in the interest of the people in the Treasury or the Reserve Bank or the Bank of England or their ministers. I think that’s one of the the issues.

Nicholas Gruen  30:32

Yes, but economists are pretty impatient with policy makers who don’t do the right thing, but that the economists have to figure this out themselves. And I would, I would have thought that it’s Well, time for this to be standard economic advice, and it’s very, very left field and economic advice at this stage.

Gene Tunny  30:55

Okay, we’ll see how your Financial Times I bet is received?

31:00

Well, let’s see. Let’s see what Ben says. Very good, he might be giving you a call. Let’s hope.

Gene Tunny  31:09

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  31:15

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis, studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  31:44

Now back to the show. So Nicholas, it’s been a few weeks now since your article was published in the Financial Times. So your article, how do we improve economic forecasting? And we chatted about that, in the previous conversation, the in the lead up to that coming out. So your ideas about how the Bank of England and other central banks or treasuries or finance ministers can improve economic forecasting? So it’s been a few weeks and says come out, you’ve had a bit of feedback. Yeah. How would you describe the reaction to your article?

Nicholas Gruen  32:22

I think it’s been the best reaction. I’ve published three pieces in the Financial Times of this kind, which is a sort of, hey, why don’t we do this? It’s reasonably out there kind of proposal and my judgement of the comments, and you’ve looked at them slightly more carefully than me that I looked at them, you know, in the first 24 or 48 hours, I thought they were more positive, and more constructive than most than is mostly the case in comment sections. It’s a pretty sad state of affairs. And nevertheless, the case that even in a really high quality newspaper, like the Financial Times, a lot of the people they’re not super ignorant, and, and just just totally dumb, but what they do is they sort of come on and they make a point. And the point is a perfectly okay, point, one of the points for instances, well, weather forecasting, which was full of praise for is different to economic forecasting, because the weather doesn’t decide to change its mind when it sees a forecast. And human beings do. It’s a very good point. It doesn’t completely obliterate all the points I was making. So if someone wants to come on and say that, that’s fine, I know that, but they’re not really participating in the spirit of things. Another person who wrote a letter to the Financial Times I think his name’s Tim Connington, or Contin, you might know his name. He said that really what mattered was having models that have proper allowance for monetary policy in them well, I’m not against having models that have the proper allowance for monetary policy in them, but it doesn’t really address the point. And then, and then there was some really quite good criticisms. The other thing was really good was that I was approached by a number of people, some of them well, one was a large corporate, which is doing Tetlock in forecasting tournaments internally. That was an interesting exercise. And I’ve been engaged with them. I’ve been they haven’t been paying me or anything, but I’ve been suggesting that they look further afield to the services of people like Warren hatch who you interviewed. On your podcast, he runs a thing called Well, it’s called good judgement. I don’t know whether it’s good judgement Inc. Or, anyway, it’s not the Philip Tetlock project which is run with inside University But it’s an offshoot of it, which is a commercial project. That was interesting. There was another economist, who was really quite pissed off, if I might say this, about the fact that forecasting prowess is not a very strong criterion of promotion inside government agencies that deal with economics include, including government agencies, in which forecasting is a very important matter. And he’s right. And I talked to him about Kaggle. And how Kaggle, the data science forecasting platform that I was involved in, when it started up, has changed the market to a substantial extent because people want data scientists who actually perform well. And you can see whether they performed well or not on Kaggle. And then another person who contacted me was actually from the Bank of England. Now, I’ve not had that experience in Australia, where someone from inside government you publish something. I mean, it wasn’t directly critical of the bank, I suppose you could say it was in a way. Anyway, he engaged me. And he said, Well, actually, we do, too, a little bit of what you’re suggesting. And it’s true, that the Bank of England, which is about my favourite Central Bank, I think they’ve done better than any other central bank in terms of their thinking. Not it turns out in terms of all the judgments about the about inflation, and so on, because we do we require a degree of clairvoyance for that. And they’ve had a recent spate of arguably bad luck in terms of working out the future. But he pointed out that the Bank of England does have a very, very simple in the form of seeking feedback from the community. It asks people for their own forecasts. Well, that’s a good beginning. And it’s better than any other bank that I know. I thought it was a terrific reaction.

Gene Tunny  37:06

Oh, that’s good. Yeah. Citizens panels, I think they call them so I’ll put a link in the show notes. I thought that was really good. And, and it really is heartening to see how open they are. And you’re right. I mean, I can’t remember anyone from a Australian government agency getting in touch or if they did get in touch, it would be all this has to be confidential, and it wouldn’t be an official email. So I think that’s good about the Bank of England. So that was great to see that. Now, just on some of those points, you raise you mentioned about modelling and that was it one comment that said I Okay, the issue was just the specification of the model. And I think you the way you reacted to that was, was was right. And one of the some of the comments I took out of the ft. Like there was some positive really positive comments in the comment section of the Financial Times. It was one about, ah, this sort of approach could have helped us in the early days of COVID. It could have avoided us from having some of your apocalyptic or Yeah, ridiculous, for ridiculous, and I think there was some criticism of the forecast room from his sage. I think they were sage forecasters. Yeah. That’s right,

Nicholas Gruen  38:20

sage, and was a guy who got himself briefly famous. And then arguably infamous. You put his name in these notes we have in front of us, Ferguson. Yeah, yeah. Yeah. Neil Ferguson. That’s it. And that, and you just had to look into that for a while to see that. The model was an immensely complex model. It wasn’t clear what it was useful for. But it wasn’t useful for quickly trying to understand, you know, ask quick, what if questions, it was an ornery monster of a model that produced a different result every time he ran it, because it was so common. Yeah. Just just not not built to certainly not in that situation. It was not built to help people make quick probabilistic decisions. But because it was a model, and because he was at a university Imperial College, as I recall, I hope correctly, then he had the stamp, you know, you had the brand. And so we spent a fair bit of our time with his model. It was pretty low grade stuff.

Gene Tunny  39:31

And so some of the negative comments or there were some people who are saying, Oh, well, look, you’re not you haven’t taken to account the fact that we’ve made all these advances in economic forecasting, and there are these new techniques and you’re unaware of them. I’m not sure that that’s true. And when I didn’t

Nicholas Gruen  39:47

mention any No, I didn’t mention any. So I mean, I’m sure I’m unaware of some of them, but he had no evidence that I was because what he’s or she is criticising me for is St. totally irrelevant. There is a state of the art of forecasting, the Bank of England or anyone else is either at the forefront or a bit back from the forefront. And the way to get to the forefront is to have a process of integrity, where people who are good at forecasting end up with better reputations than people who are not so good at

Gene Tunny  40:21

forecast. Yeah, yeah, exactly. And the point I would make, like when I read those comments, they were almost as I think they are assuming that it’s the model that gives the forecast that’s published in the Bank of England monetary policy statement or, or in any of these statements from economic agencies, it’s actually a forecast directly from a model. And it almost never is, there’s always an element of judgement, the model is one input into the the actual official forecast. And if you read the bank, the publication’s of the Bank of England, that’s very clear. And so your approach is about taking all of the the evidence out there or different views. I mean, you know, it could be in I think there’s something I was chatting with Warren hatch about, if I remember correctly, Warren was saying that, look, there can be value from having people in teams, like some people, someone has a model than there’s others who are more qualitative. And there are others who are looking at different bits of data you want. You don’t want a variety of approaches, I think and perspectives to get better forecasts.

Nicholas Gruen  41:27

I’d say some, I think that’s absolutely right. But I think you can say something more than that. We exist in a society in which governments and agents and organisations are performing for our entertainment, if I can put it that way, at least under the guise of the media, they’re doing stuff, they’re justifying them stuff. They’re got comms people coming out, saying, This is what we’re doing, and they’re putting over a plausible story. And then you get pundits, I would say, like us, except I try not to do this. But almost all pundits and almost all Twitter pundits, almost all instant experts, they come out. And they say what, really what you should do is x or y. But in fact, what you should do is a very complex and acculturated performance. So it will involve technical understanding and modelling. It will then involve judgments, as you say, but then how do you get the people with the best judgement to make the judgments? Well, we haven’t really solved that problem, we just get the most senior people to make those judgments. So it’s like me saying, I want a good COVID vaccine. And this is the process that we should go through to get the COVID vaccine. What I want is a process that has legitimacy, because I believe that if I looked into what that process was, it would add up it would have integrity. In the words of Charlie Munger, the highest form of civilization is a seamless web of deserved trust. In other words, there isn’t a clear line between the pundit class and what you do. If you’re doing anything difficult building a bridge or dare I say, a nuclear submarine pundits can can’t actually say very much, they can say a few things about what would be really dumb. But there’s so much that goes into this. And the public discussion isn’t had in that kind of way. But that, ultimately, is one of the reasons that I’m such a fan of Philip Tetlock stuff on forecasting and creating forecasting tournaments, because it’s one of the few areas where you can start to build some objective relation between reality. And as poor munchkins working away trying to work out what that reality is, and our social and political institutions have done? Well, the job they’ve done might be the best in history, but when you look at it, it’s not all that great, there are plenty of things wrong with it. So, this is a rare case where there is a better way you can see what it is you can understand its principles and we should really try to implement it and also learn from it how how we could extend that since making reality contacting function.

Gene Tunny  44:31

Yeah, absolutely, fully agree there. So, I mean, one other point I just wanted to make is on that, the forecasting the the whatever the you know, best practice or the in terms of technical forecasting. One of the articles there was, it was linked to in the in the comment section, the Financial Times it was an article that was by a number of forecasting experts and one of them was Jennifer Castle’s, who works with David Hendry. And Henry has been on the show. And if you’re interested in these issues, that would be a good conversation to go back to because David talks a lot about the ways that he tries to get his model based forecast as best as possible. Now, that’s, that can be an input into this a super forecasting approach. It’s not, these things aren’t mutually exclusive. But what he’s doing, he’s trying to build an econometric model that can be an input into the forecasting. For the point I’d like to emphasise is that the forecasts that end up in the reports and then end up influencing budget, so they’re never just the outcome of models, because we know that a model is useful. But you there’s always a judgement involved, you’re always going to be tweaking things to make it because there’ll be things in the model you go hang on that may not be realistic in the current circumstances. Yeah, exactly. Yeah, exactly. Right. Oh, so Nicholas. I just wanted that quick catch up. Because I thought, yeah, that was a great article of yours. And it’s got some excellent feedback. And I think it’s, it’s probably achieved what you wanted to achieve, I imagine.

Nicholas Gruen  46:08

Yeah, absolutely. Even though they told me I only had 650 words, and then they only allowed me 570 words. So my nice paragraphs about what a big fan I was of Andy Haldane, who was no longer at the Bank of England, they were all taken out the likes of fanboy helding while he was a civil servant, was my favourite civil servant in all the world. Very good. Yes.

Gene Tunny  46:36

I’ll put some links in to about Andy Hill died. Did you? Have you written this on your club dropout? Or Nicholas? Your? Um, I’m

Nicholas Gruen  46:44

not sure I have I’ve. Yeah, maybe I should. But But no, I have because I published some articles in the Mandarin, which is an Australian Public Policy Magazine, if you like, which is and they’re always backed up onto my blog, and one compared the Australian Reserve Bank, with the Bank of England and the and particularly the blog notes underground. I think it’s called always good to quote Dostoevsky. I suppose when Greg Clark isn’t quoting, isn’t quoting titles from Hemingway, the Bank of England can be can be paraphrasing Dostoevsky in the name of its blog notes underground, I think it’s called. And it has lots of really interesting think pieces. It’s not very standard academic stuff, although there’s some of that as well. I think it’s a very sad thing that government, certainly independent agent, government agencies around the world don’t do that a great deal more. I may be fondly imagined that Andy was one of the movers and shakers behind that. But certainly he did lead a lot of research showing the costs of too big to fail implicit subsidies for large banks and just did lots of use the, the US the independence of the central bank in a way that was very, very helpful in difficult times during the global financial crisis. And in the years after the financial crisis is people trying to work out what had gone wrong and how to fix things. Yeah, absolutely.

Gene Tunny  48:23

It’s, it’s interesting that Yeah, I agree about the Bank of England, probably being the best central bank certainly has the best museum. I guess there’s that literary connection. Yes. And I only learned about this when I went to the museum, Kenneth Graham work there, the author with the willows. Hmm, yeah, I work there. I mean, I have relatively senior position there in the Bank of England because they’ve got a little display about Kenneth grime in there.

Nicholas Gruen  48:53

I missed it. I missed it. I’m sorry that I missed it. Because I have seen that museum. It’s quite small. It’s just a few artefacts as I recall a room or 2am I

Gene Tunny  49:02

wrong. Yeah, it’s a maybe a few rooms, but there’s that great display where you can lift up a bar of gold, you stick your hand in a glass glass box, and you’re gonna lift up an actual gold bar, which I thought was pretty cool. And you know, they’ve got all the currency. Yeah, he got up to the rank of Secretary in 1908. So I don’t think he was he wasn’t the governor, but he got up to a senior position. Excellent. Very good. Okay, Nicholas, thanks. Again. That was such a it was good to catch up because, yeah, good. always interested in economic forecasting, because we’ve had such a, unfortunately a mixed record of it in Australia and around the world. So it’s, it’s good to talk about a new approach and well done for doing your best to advance one.

Nicholas Gruen  49:50

Thanks very much

Gene Tunny  49:53

rato thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch match, I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if you’re podcasting outlets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

50:40

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey. Head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Exploring the Energy Transformation: A Conversation with Tucker Perkins, Propane Education & Research Council – EP206

Tucker Perkins, head of the Propane Education and Research Council (PERC), talks about the energy transformation we are currently experiencing with Economics Explored host Gene Tunny. Tucker advocates for renewable propane and for other sustainable liquid fuels in the future energy mix. The conversation also touches on the potential role of nuclear energy in achieving net zero emissions. 
Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored.

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Tucker Perkins

Tucker is the president and chief executive officer of the Propane Education & Research Council (PERC), and his vision for the future is best explained by his own podcast’s title: “Path to Zero.” A firm believer that climate change is real and man-made,Tucker advocates for all energy solutions that will create a cleaner and healthier environment today and into the future. 

Zero emissions is a goal we can all get behind,but how do we meet the world’s growing energy demands AND reduce carbon in the atmosphere? Tucker believes the best and most realistic wayforward is a wide path that incorporates renewables and clean liquid fuels, such as propane, to accelerate decarbonization and reach our climate goals as soon as possible.

Tucker’s insights and theories are backed by his 30+ years of work in the propane industry. He operated his own propane retail company, Premier Propane, and has held executive positions at Columbia Propane, CleanFuel USA and Inergy Propane. Tucker is active with many industry organizations, including the National Propane Gas Association, World LP Gas Association, Industrial TruckAssociation and Outdoor Power Equipment Institute.

What’s covered in EP206

  • [00:05:43] Energy transformation and low carbon fuels. 
  • [00:09:24] Propane-powered trucks and environmental impact. 
  • [00:13:30] Cruise ships moving to LNG.
  • [00:18:21] The role of gas in the energy transformation. 
  • [00:21:13] Choosing cleaner energy options. 
  • [00:33:16] Nuclear power and the grid. 
  • [00:38:40] Energy transformation and renewable fuels

Links relevant to the conversation

Tucker’s Path to Zero podcast

Transcript: Exploring the Energy Transformation: A Conversation with Tucker Perkins, Propane Education & Research Council – EP206

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Gene Tunny  00:06

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show. Hello, thanks for tuning in to the show. In this episode, I chat with Tucker Perkins about the energy transformation that we’re going through. Tucker is head of the Propane Education and Research Council perk, and he’s the host of the path to zero podcast. In our conversation, Tucker argues strongly for renewable propane, and for other sustainable liquid fuels being an important part of the energy mix in the future. According to perc, the most common form of renewable propane today is a byproduct of renewable diesel and sustainable aviation fuel made primarily from plant and vegetable oils, animal fats or used cooking oil. Stay tuned to also hear Tucker’s thoughts on how the energy transformation is going, and whether we should consider nuclear energy in the transition to net zero. If you have any thoughts on what Tucker I have to say in this episode, then please let me know. You can email me via contact at economics explore.com. Okay, let’s get into the episode. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Tucker Perkins. Tucker perkins, welcome to the programme.

Tucker Perkins  01:53

I’m going to enjoy being with you today. Thanks so much for having me.

Gene Tunny  01:57

Oh, of course, Tucker. Yes. Lots to talk about, given that your background and your position. So you’re the president and chief executive officer of the propane Education and Research Council P. C? Or is it perk, PRC or perk,

Tucker Perkins  02:17

we’ll call it perk for the rest of this talk. So

Gene Tunny  02:19

very good. Could you tell us a bit about your journey to perk, please Tucker? How did you end up becoming the president of what what what’s your you’ve got a background in the industry?

Tucker Perkins  02:32

Obviously, it’s you know, as I reflect on it backwards, you know, it’s been the culmination of kind of everything I did up to this point. But let’s start at the beginning. Like so many people that so in the US, we’ll call it propane, but the rest of the world and Australia included you gonna call it LPG, right. But you grew up in a into a household or my father ran a propane company that was a fairly good sized regional company. So I’d watch him go to work and saw what he did and seem to have a good living and enjoy his work. So always something I did in the summers as I was growing up, went off to college and was an engineer, and didn’t want to work for my dad at a college. I wanted to do something else. He was the president. And I didn’t really want to be the son of the President. So I worked I was a consulting engineer doing today. Now when I look back on is really relevant work, land use planning, water conservation. You’re really thinking about how urban areas should evolve walkable cities, livable places. And now it’s really to me forefront of so much we do is around conservation, right? Conservation of energy, conservation of water, how could we drive less, I mean, things that are really relevant. So I did that for a while but pretty quickly was recruited to go to work in the natural gas industry. He’s kind of a, an engineer on a pipeline, designing pipelines, building pipelines, operating them. We then built and operated in a liquefied natural gas facility, actually operated facility that turned butane or propane into natural gas. So really got great exposure in the natural gas business from drilling through the golf or Appalachian mountains, and to cleaning it up and then transporting and ultimately putting it on to ships if that’s what it took for LNG, so great, great support. But eventually, I wanted to do something I was a bit more entrepreneurial, and found my way back into the propane business, and ultimately worked my way to be the chief operating officer of the fourth largest propane company in the country. We then sold that and I started myself the smallest propane company in the country. Just me then me and a driver than me a driver and a service person. Then we added and I grew that business up and then we sold it in to a larger public company where I worked with them, so really ever had such great experiences in natural gas, natural gas liquids, you know, multinational work, you know, smallest company in the world. And ultimately, I went in and was a manufacturer for a while we were actually manufacturing propane systems. And at the conclusion of that, a job came up at the propane Education and Research Council to be in charge of all the business development. And I took that job, and then not long after that became CEO, oh, and not long after that became CEO. So it’s been a great, it’s just a great transition. And now really, just the last couple of years, you know, we’ve really started talking about how do low carbon fuels like natural gas and propane or LPG? How do they fit into this energy transformation that we talk about routinely? So having an engineering background being real familiar with natural gas, LNG, LPG really helpful to kind of set up for this last phase of my career?

Gene Tunny  06:11

Yeah, yeah, very good. Okay. So we’ll get on to that energy transformation in a moment, I’ll I should know that you’ve got your own podcast path to zero, which is great. So we’ll talk a bit about that later. Before we get on to that, I just like to ask a bit more about perk. This is an is IT industry funded Tucker it what’s the mission of the perk?

Tucker Perkins  06:35

Broadly, a perk is industry funded, we take a small percentage from every gallon sold in the US. So we have a very us focus. But again, the technologies we’re developing, we really encourage him to be used worldwide. I mean, it’s, it’s good for everyone. To see this technology is expanded way beyond the US. But we’re funded and our funding comes into about $50 million a year. And then we take that money and deploy it really one of three ways. First is around safety and training and safety and training for the industry. For the consumers of propane, we want to make sure that our industry and those people who touch propane, use propane, understand how to use it safely, that it’s installed safely in accordance with the codes. And we really, I’m so proud of where we have come over the last five or six years in digital training, helping helping you whether you want to work for a propane company and become a driver or service tech or even a customer representative. Or whether you’re filling cylinders at the local filling plant, or you’re a consumer and you need to know what to do when you smell the odour of gas. So safety and training, top of mind, a lot of marketing and awareness, you know, just talking about the value of propane, renewable propane as a part of the energy mix. And then the last piece of that really has been technology development to embed in the different markets agriculture, transportation, power generation, residential commercial, to embed into those markets, and see where the gaps are, and to see how LPG can fill those gaps. And it’s been amazing. I mean, I know I talked with you earlier. And, you know, 15 years ago as as a world body, we saw that ship fueling was dirty, filthy. In fact, it from a mission standpoint, inexpensive, powerful, but filthy. And we realised that propane offered a much better way to fuel his ship. today. We’ve had a monumental movement in using propane aboard ships, something that has been adopted way greater pace than I thought. But you know, we work with farmers every day about how to use propane today not only to dry green, or perhaps propel their tractor, but how to use it for flame techniques so they could become more gain. It can use less herbicides, pesticides, we work with builders, we’ve got some innovative products coming out that generate power and heat. And maybe our most exciting programme right now is with Cummins and a programme that I hope you see in Australia soon. Really the crazy powerful 6.7 litre propane purpose engine that can power medium duty trucks and do it in a way that’s probably more cost effective than any other option. And we cut greenhouse gases 25% from the next best technology on the market today. So you know, just actually literally putting our money where our mouth is and bringing innovative products to the marketplace that actually make consumers comfortable. Give them an affordable energy source yet do great things for the environment. Hmm,

Gene Tunny  10:06

right. Yeah. Okay, there’s few things I want to follow up there. First, just for, I just want to make sure I understand. So LPG or propane. Where would most people be coming into contact with that now? Would that be it when they’re doing they have that having a barbecue, they get the, the cylinder for their barbecue? Would that be one of the uses?

Tucker Perkins  10:28

Well, everyone comes into contact with it, they’re when they’re having their barbecues. Hopefully, we’ve all moved past charcoal now but So yeah, that’s where that’s where the typical consumer, but you know, a farmer touches it every day in December anyways, animal heat, green drying. We see it in in the US. We are fairly dominant in residential heating, hot water cooking, clothes drying, same for commercial segment. And then in transportation, and few people realise, but we’re really the third most widely used fuel in the world for transportation beyond diesel and gasoline. The next the next most widely use fuel is propane, or LPG.

Gene Tunny  11:14

Yeah, I know a lot of taxis here. have used it in Australia. So yeah, absolutely. Okay. And what about with, you’re talking about shipping? So what type of ships are we talking about? And what is it replacing? Is it replacing diesel? What’s what’s going on there?

Tucker Perkins  11:34

Yeah, well, or generally replacing even the next dirtier version of diesel first, so bunker fuel. So that heavy, that Heavy Diesel that ships used, where it will again, it was inexpensive, it’s powerful. But, you know, when you look at the emissions profile, intensely Laden was particulate matter, co2, NOx emissions, nothing that we really want to be spewing into the air, and rightfully the international community, you know, said we, there’s got to be a better way, we’ve got to fuel our ships, because again, here’s an area where ships use, you know, gargantuan volumes of fuel on an annual basis, right. So that’s an area where cleaning up the emissions truly makes a difference in our environmental footprint. So the other movie, these ships are moving from bunker fuel or diesel, to generally either natural gas, propane. You read some about ammonia, or methanol, or those kind of the, those are the four fuels that are in play right now for a ship of the future.

Gene Tunny  12:44

Right. So what types of ships are we talking about cargo ships, ocean liners, what about the oil tankers? What sort of sort of ships are we talking about? So most

Tucker Perkins  12:54

of our ships are currently carrying LPG. So those would be LPG carriers. And they could be vlg seas, very large gas carriers. But, you know, propane has moved so much around the world. And though that’s the first choice, because they already had their vessel full of propane, and so it’s relatively easy for them to to migrate to propane engines. But it certainly won’t stop there. We’re seeing some cargo ships there. I do think the probably the last in the line will be cruise ships. But we see some cruise ships now moving to liquefied natural gas. And so it’s only a matter of time. I think before all styles of ships. One style we really are interested in something very prominent in actually Australia would be ferries work boats, tugboats, fishing boats. If you go to Chile today, a lot of the fishing vessels in Chile are powered by LPG much cleaner, much easier to store for them, and much less expensive. And so for a fisherman, they actually could twofold right? They cut their costs and improve their emissions. So, you know, depends on a little bit where you go in the world to see how it’s being used. But it’s so versatile. It’s highly used in engines,

Gene Tunny  14:17

Rod, okay, and so how does it compare? What’s the right terminology pound for pound or I’m just trying to think so You mentioned a 6.7 litre propane engine for the for trucks. If I fill up the truck, will I get a similar range? If I’ve compared with if I build it with diesel? Do I get the similar amount of power? How does it compare?

Tucker Perkins  14:42

So the energy content of a gallon of propane is about I don’t know three quarters of the energy content of a gallon of diesel. Right but fuel managers tend to think about things in terms of cost per mile. Yeah, or opera. Reading cost per mile. And it’s shocking to me where we are, we’ve always been cheaper than. But now we are significantly cheaper than in fact, in most in most. And I probably have looked at 100 or 200. Operating statistics over the last month or two, we’re always half of the cost of diesel or more, in a diesel right now has been fairly elevated in price, propane has been fairly depressed in price. So it’s not unusual for us to see 60 70% savings in a cost per mile, moving from diesel to propane. And that’s really, you know, that’s important in a medium duty truck. Right, medium duty trucks are our breadbasket. They’re delivering goods and services to us, and to be able to cut their costs by 60, or 70%. While we cut their emissions, while we quiet the engine, it’s monumental benefit to the driver, to every community they serve, and ultimately to the people who are paying for those goods and services they deliver. So massive benefit.

Gene Tunny  16:08

Yeah, is there any difference in the frequency at which you have to fill

Tucker Perkins  16:11

up now, you as a designer of those engines, we, we almost always make sure that we have the same range. So your diesel truck had 600 miles of range, then we make sure you have 600 miles of range, you know, we found is this conversation goes around electric vehicles and, you know, we, we really highlight, you know, that you probably have to change to drive an electric vehicle, certainly a medium duty electric truck, you’re going to change something you’re gonna it takes you longer to refuel, you won’t be able to go as far, you know, we just don’t find commercial businesses are really able to do that they need, they need to demonstrate significantly better than before they’ll leave diesel or gasoline. And I think with propane, we demonstrate significantly better than cheaper, more powerful, frankly, quieter, and much better emissions.

Gene Tunny  17:08

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  17:14

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you Frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  17:43

Now back to the show. Right Oh, so you mentioned before about the role of gas, so propane and other and other gases in this transition in the energy transformation. So as we head toward Net Zero, how do you see that broadly Tucker? What’s the what’s the role? Is it just as transition field as we move toward more lower carbon sources? Is there a permanent role for gas? How do you see that their role in that energy transformation?

Tucker Perkins  18:21

You know, probably I probably answered your question, in a funny way. Because when we started, certainly we thought this, that gas would be a transition. But as as we really studied, where we believe hydrogen goes, maybe we’re wind and solar goes. And wind and solar are going to be completely captivated by how fast we get the battery storage and energy storage, right? We we really cannot have appropriate wind and solar without being able to store that intermittent supply that really relevant relates as well to Evie vehicles, right? It really gets to about can we make a light enough battery that charges fast enough that holds that energy that lets us have four or 500 miles of range? How long does it take for the engineers to come to those answers? And by the way, as a technologist, I certainly believe we come to those answers, right. But I think what’s interesting to me, as we really think, again, I keep the goal in mind. The goal in mind is to reduce carbon. And we can fool ourselves by saying I drive a zero emission vehicle. But the only time that vehicle is truly a zero emission is when it’s at rest, right? The minute we have to charge it and we have to really think about that system. What I’m excited this A is as we really studied both renewable natural gas and renewable propane. We find that even under the most optimistic scenarios that we can craft for electricity, there will always be a benefit to using a powerful liquid Fuel, like renewable propane or renewable propane blend in an efficient engine. And perhaps gene engine might be a hybrid engine me, that vehicle may be the best of electric drive and internal combustion drive. But I really pivoted my answer to say, No, I think there will always be a place for low carbon and renewable fuels. And the last piece is about this is economics, because we don’t really want to, you know, openly address the cost of this transition. But in the US, we talk openly about 3 trillion, I’ve talked openly on a worldwide basis that it probably looks to me more like 30 or $40 trillion. And a few outside banking agencies have kind of verified that number. Now. That’s a lot of money. And we have to think about, I think often about, are we deploying those dollars in the right place and a world where we need better medicine, better schools, better highways and bridges? can we really afford to spend that kind of money when we have some of these clean solutions right in front of us. And that’s a conversation that we’re going to have a lot of over the next decade. But I would say to you, I am perfectly comfortable. That to choose propane today or choose natural gas today, knowing that it was a 25 or 30 year solution. I can really be intellectually honest, it says that fuel can still be cleaner than any other choice of energy I have. Because we’re we’re migrating not only our conventional fuels cleaner, but our renewable blends are carbon zero or less. And so for example, I’m perfectly comfortable talking about carbon zero propane, perfectly comfortable.

Gene Tunny  21:48

Okay, how does it become carbon zero? Tucker, I have to ask you about that. Because when you hear that you think Hang on, how is that? It’s propane. It’s so hydrocarbon how on earth? Can it be zero? Kava? What’s going on there?

Tucker Perkins  22:03

Yeah, I agree. And actually, as a person who I think we’re all better to be naturally sceptical, you know. And so the first time I talked about some modern fuels that had a carbon intensity of minus 273, I’m like, How can that be. But let’s use one example that where we think renewable propane, some sources could have a carbon intensity of minus 300, minus 300. And that would be you know, we’re working on ways to take methane today that escapes into the air. Think about gas drilling, or well drilling, where you just have fairly large amounts of methane that are just skate escaping into the air, because they can’t deal with it any other way, to be able to capture that escaping methane and convert it into a usable product. The scientists have really said consistently, I should give you credit for that, without your innovation, that methane would have escaped in the air. So I’m going to give you credit for now capturing that methane, and doing something with it. And if we can do that something converted into renewable propane efficiently, you know, don’t use a lot of energy, don’t use a lot of land, then the way we would score that today is minus 300. The renewable propane we’re making today, some of the agricultural styles, they they score today is as seven. And I’m, I’m comfortable that by using some renewable power, and by being more efficient in the process, that will end up being carbon zero as well.

Gene Tunny  23:37

Right? So it’s renewable because you’re taking methane that’s otherwise going into the atmosphere. And you’re using renewable energy to extract the propane from that is, is that right? Right.

Tucker Perkins  23:53

So again, I mean, just even go up a level a little broader. We’re taking waste products, and converting them as efficiently as possible. And by the way, all inputs considered, there’s no, you know, there’s no black box where he just stick it over there and say, No, we don’t count once in that black box, everything’s considered. In fact, even as we think about moving these grains from where they are grown and harvested to where we convert them to propane, we have to figure the carbon intensity of that train, then move those grains, but we take waste products, essentially, and effectively convert them to energy, and we calculate all the inputs. And so you know, a good example, we’re growing a product that would be very applicable in Australia camelina plant, we grow it on fallow land, we don’t irrigate it. We don’t put a lot of nitrogen on the soil, and we very efficiently converts to energy. So that’s right now the government here’s corps that has a carbon intensity of six And, and I believe by the time we perfect the process will be zero. That’s that’s how you get to those numbers, rock.

Gene Tunny  25:06

And so where are we with renewable propane? Are we in? Are we still in the r&d or the demonstration or commercialization phase of it.

Tucker Perkins  25:15

So interesting that, you know, we’re making it today in the US we’re making it today we’re selling it today, it is eligible for a lot of the same credits that you get from us from buying renewable diesel or sustainable aviation fuel. And, you know, I’m proud to say I think we’re really, we’ve probably seen the market grow seven fold or eight fold in the last year. And that’s just really all around the activity from making renewable diesel or sustainable aviation fuel. Those other things, I’m talking about agricultural based versions from camelina plan or some other really interesting, a non food cover crops, capturing methane that we’ve talked about early, those are now moving, you know, out of the lab, past the pilot plants and into real production. So if you and I had this conversation a year ago, I would have talked to you about renewable diesel, and sustainable aviation fuel making renewable Propane is a part of that. That’s, that was where the conversation ended. Today, I probably have 13 or 14 other pathways that all have, you know, really strong commercial potential. Yeah. And there are a few really exciting possibilities into the lab that are being heavily funded. So we’re excited about the fact that there’s a lot of waste material. And a lot that easily converts think about agricultural waste, whether it’s animal waste, something, you know, you, you certainly have your share that, you know, in Australia that today has been how we make a lot of renewable natural gas, right, but forest waste, how easily can we convert that, and I’m convinced Gene, that it will be converted to some renewable energy, it won’t all be converted to renewable propane, renewable natural gas, some of it will turn into ethanol and methanol. And I’m a huge advocate of allowing the feedstock that most easily converts into a product. That’s how it should happen. And then we need to find uses. methanol, ethanol, natural gas, propane, renewable diesel sustainable jet. You know, it all has a need in our society.

Gene Tunny  27:31

Yeah, yeah. Gotcha. Can I ask about the renewable dude, so I’m clear, where does the renewable diesel and sustainable aviation fuel come from? How do we make that?

Tucker Perkins  27:41

So today, we make it almost exclusively from used cooking oils, vegetable oils, you know, we could we could make it from a variety of crops, soybean oil, palm oil, something that you know, really is, we don’t we don’t talk about we don’t use it just it’s not really fashionable to talk about palm oil. So today, it’s basically soy beans, and a lot of used cooking oil, that’s really been the primary feedstock for

Gene Tunny  28:12

just on palm oil, you mentioned is not fashionable. Is that because of concerns about the environmental impact? Absolutely. Yes. Gotcha. Yeah. Yeah, it’s a big issue in Indonesia, of

Tucker Perkins  28:24

just, you know, from just from an environmental standpoint, and not really good ability to control the source and to be, it’s to me, it’s a little bit like lithium, right? Or cobalt? Yeah. If we’re really honest, about how we source cobalt today, we have a long ways to go to think about responsibly sourcing these materials. And again, at some point, we’re doing all this to improve the planet to improve our health to improve the quality of life for all in concerned. Right. And I don’t know how you turn your back on, you know, the miners of cobalt in the Congo, right? I mean, we have certainly not improved their lives, in many respects and the things the same probably draws out the palm oil.

Gene Tunny  29:09

Yeah, gotcha. Okay. So, as we wrap up, Tucker, how do you what are your thoughts on how the transition is going? I mean, there’s a lot of talk about the need to get toward Net Zero, obviously, how do you see the energy transformation going in the US? So I’ve covered it in Australia quite a bit on the show. I’m just interested. How do you think it’s going in the states there?

Tucker Perkins  29:33

Well, first off, I compliment you and calling it a transformation and not a transition. Right? You know, that’s a hot button to me, because it’s not a transition transitions are smooth and easy. And you hardly know when you transition. And in the transformation, people fall and stumble and hit their head and some people, you know, thrive and other people lose and that’s exactly what we’re gonna do here. So, I love the fact that you call it a transformation because it is, you know, we’re on the one year anniversary of our inflation Reduction Act, which is really that first massive influx of money in, you know, I said an interview earlier this week, we can see how much money we’ve spent. But it is quite hard to see any benefits we’ve reaped. Now, in fairness, one year is a very short time duration to be measuring results. But I think it’s pretty clear to say that we’re not seeing benefits. And I think that’s one of the areas that we love to talk about, is we’re stepping over easy short term wins to benefit the environment. In this quest for this magical electric grid that could appear, or this magical use of hydrogen, in a new Australia’s light years, I feel like ahead of most in both those areas, frankly. But you know, we’re really a long way from having a hydrogen economy, we’re a long ways from having a true, resilient, affordable electric grid that just produced from solar and wind. And so I’m loving the fact that the focus is coming in on how to how to get to a cleaner climate. And I feel like wherever you go, responsible scientists and engineers are working towards a common goal. I would say in the US, I find often that fossil fuels aren’t equal, right? It’s, it’s quite interesting to me that we talked about coal, oil and wood is dirty. And then we use a lot of coal, oil and wood to generate electricity, which is going to be the next solution. Right? So fossil fuels aren’t equal at all. And I think propane natural gas are two that have a long runway in it just transformation. And, but I love the technology that I’m seeing developed. And I’m loving seeing the market niches that we see propane can play. years ago, we really didn’t talk much about LPG in power generation. And now if I took you around the world, you’d be so shocked how we’re industrially powering facilities in Puerto Rico. We are, we’ve moved so far past residential backup. Now we’re into some prime power applications, residentially and commercially, just today I met with a college that’s going to choose propane for a significant portion of their energy system, because it offers them the best combination of environmental benefits and cost, reliability and resilience. So where we are clearly not even in warm up of you know, where we’re going to be. But I see now engineers, scientist, and really the financing community pulling together to get to a good spot.

Gene Tunny  32:56

Gotcha. Okay. And finally, what about pumped hydro and nuclear? I mean, there I mean, pumped. Hydro is something we’re pursuing here in Australia, nuclear, there’s talk about it, we probably won’t have it. There’s a lot of community resistance to it. But there are some people arguing very strongly for it. Do you have any thoughts on either of those Tucker,

Tucker Perkins  33:16

probably probably have strong thoughts. I don’t really think we ever get to where we want to be with the power grid, until we learn how to make nuclear power, until we learn really how to make it as safely as possible, and how to deal with the waste. But I really think nuclear is going to have to be a part of our solution. Because one, one thing is evident, we’re going to continue to use more and more power, right? Where we’re we want to use our computers, we want to use our data centres. Now. We want to use artificial intelligence. And nobody talks about how that in fact ratchets up our power demand exponentially, right? And yeah, you just don’t really get there without having a significant nuclear base. Now, maybe one day we’ll be talking about fusion. But I’m just not an adult. We don’t have that long to wait. We cannot wait any longer for the silver bullets. We got to take action now. Right. For it’s interesting to me that you’re talking about hydropower, because I want to be such a champion of hydroelectric power. I want to I want to be, but the realist in me knows we’re not going to build any more dams. We’re not going to dam up more rivers just not going to happen. And at least in the US, we haven’t seen even though the pumped power projects we have here are magnificent. I don’t see enough on the drawing board here to create a blip in the supply. And so for us, I find pump storage and pumped power. Something that’s not really even in the conversation right now. I’m glad you all are talking about it. Because as a way to store power and use power when you have a lot of it, and to store it for a time when you need more of it, it makes a lot of sense.

Gene Tunny  35:18

Yeah, we just hope it works out because we’re, we’re betting a lot on it, that we’ll get the pumped hydro to help back up the grid. But one of the projects we’ve got as a snowy 2.0, and it’s just way behind schedule, it’s going to be like five times the original cost. It’s delayed by 10 years. It’s it’s not going well at all.

Tucker Perkins  35:36

You know, we’re seeing that we’re seeing that right now in offshore wind, right. I mean, all the financial models that really were built around offshore wind, those financial models changed significantly, everything became more expensive. And really, right now the projects that are moving forward are the ones that just really felt like they had no choice but to move forward. But those are, again, things change, right? labour costs go up, material costs go up, maybe technology shifts, and gives you every once awhile, a favourable result. But, you know, I think that’s one of the things few people think about in this transformation as well, is just how dynamic everything is right? What’s the cost of power? How long are you willing to contract it? I was thinking today about just mining and thinking about, I just don’t know, Australia is certainly a huge mining centre, it’s a part of your culture, you have a lot of land, that is a part of your culture, no other way to say it, you embrace it to the extent you can, I just don’t think we’re going to embrace it and in the US, right, like you do in Australia. And so I think it has significant impact on our ability to really think about how we’re going to produce lithium, or copper. And so we have to really think about that, I think as a global basis, but we can talk in the US about how we’re going to become independent for lithium or copper. He I don’t believe it for a moment. And it’s not that I don’t want to believe it. But is that I’m well aware of, you know, not that many people want to lithium mine in their backyard, or in their neighbourhood or in their state sometimes.

Gene Tunny  37:20

Yeah, yeah, absolutely. There’s some some big issues there, for sure. Okay, Tucker, any final thoughts before we close?

Tucker Perkins  37:29

No, I mean, I love the opportunity to have this conversation with you. I love the fact that we’re about as far apart geographically as you can be. But we share, we share the exact same desires right to get cut our carbon would be able to live our lifestyle afford, you know, our families a better lifestyle, then, you know, perhaps we had his children. And it is nice to have partners in that in that conversation. Because from this conversation, we’ll get to solutions. We will cut through the politics, we’ll cut through the rhetoric. And I think we’ll get to solutions that were

Gene Tunny  38:05

absolutely, Tucker, I think that’s a great note to end on. I agree with you about the need to be great to cut through the politics on these issues. And yeah, really appreciate all the great conversation and just learning so much about propane, and this renewable propane and how these renewable and sustainable fuels are created and getting your thoughts on their role in this energy transformation. I think I pinched that from you, Tucker, they were in our pre conversation you. You mentioned it is really a transformation rather than a transition. And I’ve chatted with other guests. And their thought too, is that the nature of it is it’s not going to be smooth. It’s it involves lumpy investments, there’s going to be disruptions at times. And yeah, we’re starting to see some of that. So yeah, Tucker, it’s been terrific really value, your perspective on this and your information. So thanks so much.

Tucker Perkins  39:05

I really appreciate you having me. I hope you have a great day.

Gene Tunny  39:08

Thanks DACA rato thanks for listening to this episode of economics explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@conomicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

39:57

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Gigi Foster estimates COVID lockdowns cost young people 116x any benefits – EP205

Professor Gigi Foster talks about her paper “COVID’s Cohort of Losers” which argues that COVID lockdowns and other restrictions disproportionately imposed costs on young people with few offsetting benefits. Gigi is a Professor of Economics at the University of New South Wales, Sydney and was named the 2019 Young Economist of the Year by the Economic Society of Australia.
Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored.

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Gigi Foster

Gigi Foster is a Professor with the School of Economics at the University of New South Wales, having joined UNSW in 2009 after six years at the University of South Australia.  Formally educated at Yale University (BA in Ethics, Politics, and Economics) and the University of Maryland (PhD in Economics), she works in diverse fields including education, social influence, corruption, lab experiments, time use, behavioural economics, and Australian policy.  

Gigi’s research contributions regularly inform public debates and appear in both specialised and cross-disciplinary outlets (e.g., Quantitative Economics, Journal of Economic Behavior and Organization, Journal of Population Economics, Journal of Economic Psychology, Human Relations).  Her teaching, featuring strategic innovation and integration with research, was awarded a 2017 Australian Awards for University Teaching (AAUT) Citation for Outstanding Contributions to Student Learning.  

Named 2019 Young Economist of the Year by the Economic Society of Australia, Gigi has filled numerous roles of service to the profession and engages heavily on economic matters with the Australian community.  As one of Australia’s leading economics communicators, her regular media appearances include co-hosting The Economists, a national economics talk-radio program and podcast series premiered in 2018, with Peter Martin AM on ABC Radio National.

What’s covered in EP205

  • Intro to the cost and benefits of lockdowns. (3:22)
  • Quality adjusted life year (QALY) and WELLBY. (8:07)
  • Fear and the crowd. (13:47)
  • The history of the cordon sanitaire. (16:58)
  • How many lives were saved? (22:14)
  • The cost and benefits of lock-downs. (27:25)
  • The economics of the lockdown. (34:24)
  • How do we determine the severity of pandemics? (36:25)
  • The difference between the 1918 flu and COVID-19. (41:18)
  • Citizen juries. (46:35)
  • New laws about misinformation and disinformation. (49:45)
  • Health and good nutrition. (56:01)

Links relevant to the conversation

Gigi’s paper for CIS:

https://www.cis.org.au/publication/covids-cohort-of-losers-the-intergenerational-burden-of-the-governments-coronavirus-response/

Information on WELLBYs:

HM Treasury’s Wellbeing Guidance for Appraisal: Supplementary Green Book Guidance

Transcript: Gigi Foster estimates COVID lockdowns cost young people 116x any benefits – EP205

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It was then looked over by a human, Tim Hughes from Adept Economics, to pick up any clangers that otters sometimes miss in their rush to catch fish. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Gene Tunny  00:06

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory, evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show.

Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. In this episode, I catch up with Gigi Foster to talk about her thought-provoking new paper “COVID’s Cohort of Losers”, in which she argues that COVID policies massively disadvantaged young people with few offsetting benefits. My occasional co-host, Tim Hughes, took part in the conversation too. Gigi is Professor of Economics at the University of New South Wales. She was named 2019 Young Economist of the Year by the Economic Society of Australia. She has an undergraduate degree from Yale, and a PhD from the University of Maryland. Okay, let’s get into it. I hope you enjoy our conversation with Gigi Foster.

Professor Gigi Foster, welcome to the programme.

Gigi Foster  01:30

Thanks so much for having me, guys. It’s a real pleasure to be here.

Gene Tunny  01:33

It’s terrific. Gigi. I’ve got Tim Hughes with me, Tim, good to have you in this conversation, too.

Tim Hughes 01:43

Yeah. Good to be here. Nice to meet you Gigi again.

Gene Tunny  01:47

Yeah. So I mean, both Tim and I saw Gigi at a event in Brisbane on First Tuesday Club when we, you presented on your book, The Great COVID Panic, Gigi so after that you’ve, well, among other things, you’ve produced a paper for a Centre for Independent Studies. So that’s an organisation I’ve got a connection with. I’m an adjunct fellow there. And you’ve written this great paper “COVID’s Cohort of Losers, the intergenerational burden of the government’s Coronavirus response”. So to start off with Gigi, I’d like to ask you about this estimate, you’ve got in your paper, you estimate that the COVID policies Australia pursued. So we’re talking about lockdowns, keeping kids home, keeping them away from school, those COVID policies have cost the nation’s youth at least 116 times the value of any benefit that they could have received from these policies. And you’re, you say that this is a conservative estimate? Could you tell us please? I mean, how do you broadly just broadly to begin with, how do you come up with a number like that 116 times the value of any benefit.

Gigi Foster  02:50

So basically, the approach I take in that CIS report, which came out a few months ago, is very similar to the approach I take in my cost benefit analysis of Australia’s Covid lockdowns, generally for the entire country, which was published by Connor Court in late 2022. That’s a book now that is co-authored with Sanjeev Sabhlok, who you may also know of through his anti-lockdown statements during the past few years, he used to be a Victorian Treasury economist. And then he parted ways with the Treasury in I think, September 2020. And fortunately, he was between jobs. So I was able to partner with him and producing this larger cost benefit analysis. And then CIS, well Matt Taylor at CIS asked me to produce a kind of focused report specifically on the cost to youth. So the mechanisms that caused damage during the COVID period, that were really the, the main ones I was worried about when we started with the lockdowns are the fact that when you lock people down you’re making them stressed and unhappy, right? So there’s that one immediate negative effect. And then also the fact that because we followed up lock downs with these large fiscal stimuli, the Jobkeeper programme in particular, that we were going to be racking up debt, we’re also creating inflationary conditions, which I mentioned at the time, but that seemed to be something nobody wanted to hear. But certainly the debt is basically signing us up to not be able to spend as much on other things in the future. And so for children or young people who are going to be around in the future, of course, that means that they’re going to have a less good life in the future, because we have accumulated this debt during this period, that three years ago, the COVID period were the two years really, which is what I’m analysing in the report and in the cost benefit analysis. So 2020 and 2021. And those two types of damage, those two mechanisms of damage are the major ones that are that are making up the large amount of costs, which is $116 billion. I believe that I estimate that the youth will have paid because of our COVID response. Now, of course, doing a cost benefit analysis, as the name suggests means that you also need to enumerate the benefits and so, of course the benefits that were touted when the lockdowns came in or that we would save people from COVID. Right? And as it turns out, and this was true in March 2020, if you actually looked at the data COVID is mostly dangerous to the elderly or people who are comorbid. So in fact, the average age of COVID death or death with COVID is basically the life expectancy in Australia right? And so, you know, really, if you’re thinking about the benefits to use of lockdowns, they’re not in the form of saving people from COVID deaths. They are actually more in the form of a few people not dying in traffic accidents or homicides who otherwise might have if we hadn’t had the lockdowns, those are benefits that were not sold as part of the marketing package for the lockdowns initially, but they are benefits. So there are fewer people go into pubs. And of course, the young people who go to pubs and sometimes get drunk and accidentally off each other. And then there were also fewer people driving cars. And so there were a few fewer deaths from that. So you know, those, those were the kinds of benefits that if you were looking for benefits to the young, it would count. Now, of course, the question then is, well, how do you compare these costs and benefits? Right? Because it sounds like you’re being more stressed when you’re sitting at home because of lockdowns is not really in the same category. It’s not in the same currency as a benefit. That means no, okay, I’m not gonna die from a homicide in a pub, right? So in order to do this, we have to choose and this is true for any cost benefit analysis that anyone has ever conducted, you have to choose a currency in which you are able to basically express or quantify the costs and the benefits of the policy or policies that you’re evaluating. And so for my cost benefit analysis of Australia, for Australia as a whole, and for the CIS report, what I choose to use is something we call the WELLBY or the well being year. And this is a new currency, reasonably new, we came on the scene in about 2018 or so it was the production of a bunch of researchers at the London School of Economics. And it’s built from a question that asks directly about life satisfaction. So there’s a there’s a question that appears on many life satisfaction surveys around the world across time that says overall, how satisfied are you with your life nowadays? Now, you know, you can argue about whether that actually captures everything that is important, right. But I think in terms of the immediate effects of the lock downs, it’s not bad, it’s probably better than alternative statistics that we have access to, like, you know, how many people were thrown out of work? Or how much is GDP expected to decline because it is really directly about human welfare, human wellbeing. And that to me, certainly as an economist, that is the most defensible maximand of government policy. It’s the maximand that I try to go for when I’m when I’m making policy recommendations. I want to recommend policy that has that is going to maximise human wellbeing, human thriving from the scarce resources that we’ve got, right? So I like the currency for particularly for that purpose for figuring out how much people suffered during lockdowns directly. And so the WELLBY is built from this question, the question’s answered on a zero to 10 scale. So zero is not at all satisfied and 10 is, you know, completely satisfied. The average answer to that question of somebody in a place like Australia when they’re feeling pretty good and healthy is about an eight. And the average answer of somebody who is kind of indifferent between life and death, because their life is so difficult and painful, is around a two, though there is some disagreement about this, some people say one I use two, which means that eight minus two being six, WELLBYs, so each increment there on that scale is one WELLBY, so six WELLBYs enjoyed for one person for one year, is equivalent to basically enjoying one year of healthy life. And one year of healthy life enjoyed by one person is also expressible, as what many of your listeners may already know, as the quality adjusted life year, the QALY, this is a currency that’s used a lot in health policy research, right? And health economics and decisions about what drugs to buy and this kind of thing. So the TGA, our drugs administrator, they use this QALY measure in order to bargain with the drug companies, when drug companies have new things to offer. The TGA says, Well, how many QALYs will I get from this drug? And if the number of QALYs is you know, let’s say 10. Then the TGA says, Okay, well, we’ll buy that drug if the cost is no more than 10 times some threshold value that they’ll pay per QALY. And that threshold value tends to be somewhere between 50 and $100,000 per QALY. So that shows you right there what the sort of social willingness to pay for a healthy life year is in Australia. And that value, by the way is higher in higher GDP per capita countries of course, then in lower GDP per capita countries. So as we increase our GDP per capita, so too, does our willingness to pay for a socially for an additional life year increase. That’s why GDP per capita is something we sometimes target in economics, right? We want to be able to afford better and more and you know, we want to be able to pay more for the good things in life including more healthy life years for our citizens. So what that means is that you can basically translate from WELBYs to QALYs to dollars that enables me then to capture other costs, like the debt, for example, in its native currency like dollars and translate back to WELBYs if I want to translate forward, and you know, there are some caveats around that translation which of course, you know, I discussed but, but that’s basically the method and that’s the method that I use in both the report and the CBA for lockdowns and I find that lockdowns were, as everybody else who has done a serious cost benefit analysis around the world is bound lockdowns were enormously more expensive than they could possibly have delivered in benefits, particularly for our youth who really had nothing to gain from them.

Gene Tunny  10:43

Yeah, I mean, certainly, during some of the lockdowns we had, if I was asked zero to 10, yeah, it wouldn’t have been eight for sure. So, yeah, yeah. So yeah, I can understand how the logic. Tim, do you have any questions for Gigi at this stage?

Tim Hughes  10:58

A lot of my interests and I find fascinating using WELBYs and QALYs and referring those to dollar value. I think that’s really interesting and a good way of quantifying responses and how we might have a better response. My main interest Gigi is in using whatever we went through to sort of determine what might be the best way to respond to something like this, if and when it happens again, because so much has been said about the response. And everyone’s got an opinion, which I fully understand. I’ve got my own opinions as well. I think the best thing that can come out of it is well what should we be doing the next time this happens, like what protocol can we put in place? And also, for instance, like to compare it to bushfire protocol, most people are quite familiar with what we would do in a bushfire, it’s going to come around more regularly than a pandemic, but is there something that we can learn from all of this that we can put into place to put in a better response, especially in the early stages?

Gigi Foster  11:58

Well, I think that’s a very, very important question. And I certainly like to think that the answer is yes, we can learn. But I would say that the the lesson is not as much in the space of quantification of benefits and costs and the technical side, it’s much more in the space of politics and psychology. Because if I were going to put the finger on what were the aspects of the, of the crisis that really drove this destructive response, they were very much in the areas of politics and psychology. And I and you know, some people will say, Well, you’re an economist so don’t talk about that, right? Well, fair enough. I mean, I studied ethics, politics and economics in university, actually. So I have a bit of a broader perspective, I suppose on the discipline and on social science, generally, than a lot of my fellow economists and my mother was a psychologist, you know, I kind of know a little bit about psych, I took psych in school, too. So for me as a broad-minded social scientist, the COVID era has been the most amazing lesson, the most amazing time to live it through, right, because I have not only sort of honed my existing theories of human behaviour and group influence, which has basically been the driving curiosity of my life, but also learned new things like for example, the power of crowd psychology in a moment of crisis to drive destruction. And we saw that, of course, we’ve seen this, you know, in the history books, right. I mean, we saw it in the witch hunts in the US, for example. We’ve seen it in 1930s, Germany, but I had never lived through something like this the creation of a cult and creation of crowd thinking, such that you literally had people whose minds had been hijacked by the crowd narrative, which in this case, you know, it’s an obsession, a crowd obsesses. That’s kind of the defining feature, it obsesses about one thing, right, and you’d have a conversation with these people who had basically had their minds taken away. And their minds were simply then in service to the defence of the crowd logic. And you would try to tell them logical things, you know, sensible things about real facts and things, you know, and they were just, they just couldn’t hear it literally couldn’t hear it. It was like talking at complete cross purposes. This is why early in the crisis, all of us who thought we saw what was really going on what the data really showed, which was certainly not that this was the black death or the Spanish flu. And, you know, we should probably protect the old people and try to figure out ways to minimise their likelihood of catching it. But basically, let everybody else keep going and develop natural immunity so that we could more quickly get to a point where we could protect the older people through natural immunity. That’s what we were all thinking, or at least many of us. But, you know, we were looking at the rest of the world and you know, these other people in our lives and thinking, wow, I just don’t seem to be able to reach this person anymore. I mean, am I going crazy? Or is this person going crazy? So that was a really interesting lesson. So all of that is to say that the answers to how do we prevent this from happening again, are really about how to control that fear so that the crowd is less likely to form, so that you don’t have that kind of obsession that drowns out out everything else that matters in normal times, right, which is why we were able to do this destruction blindly. Because we literally were blind to the destruction that we were doing. And and also how can we make the people in authority at such times more accountable to what is actually good for the people as a whole. Now, that’s a, that’s a difficult area because of course, the people were clamouring for lockdowns. In fact, that’s why they were delivered. Right. I when I gave the seminar about this yesterday in Macquarie that was, that was one of the points raised and it’s a very valid point, it’s not that the politicians came up with this whole lockdown shenanigans on their own, you know, and then we’re like, oh, you’re you have to have this everybody we’re gonna have to, you know, sorry, it’s, it’s a tough pill to swallow. No, no, no, the populations of the West became incredibly frightened. And they were demanding protection from COVID. And the politicians who were in charge at the time, read the writing on the wall, and basically thought to themselves, well, if I don’t do something big, I’m gonna lose my seat. And I’m going to potentially be blamed for, you know, not saving the country from what is perceived to be a mortal threat. And, you know, in such times that the character of a person really comes out, you know, and, and there is, it’s not like, there’s an easy way to tether actions back to the true interest of the people in that time, because so many people are caught up in this fear, right, but job one should be to reduce the fear. That should job one. And that actually happened in some countries, right. Sweden did that. So they tried to tamp down the fear. And then another thing that’s very important, of course, and then I’ll be quiet, is to try to make sure you’ve got independent voices, voices that are alternative, dissident voices about what’s going on. So you actually have kind of a, you know, some kind of a check on this mono vision that’s that’s barreling through the policy fields, which is what was happening in March and April, everybody thought the same way. And anybody who would say anything different was pilloried or or denigrated. I mean, I was called a neoliberal Trump cannot death cult warrior and Granny killer and a piece of human excrement. I mean, so many, I have a whole jar full of these epithets. And, you know, it’s like, why, all I was saying, was that what we’re doing has costs. You know, that’s all I was saying. So it’s, it’s a complicated question, what to do next. And, and I think we need to really think about that as a society, but not just in the area of technical costs and benefits.

Gene Tunny  17:25

Yeah, Gigi, what I’m wondering is if you thought, I agree with you, by the way on lockdowns, and now I see that it was, the cost far exceeded the benefits for COVID. But could it be the case that for another virus or another, say if we had, you know, if we had the plague again, I mean thankfully we don’t, that’s not really a prospect, but if it was something worse than COVID could lockdowns make sense then?

Gigi Foster  17:50

So that’s also a really great question. I’m actually at the moment writing a paper together with Sanjeev Sabhlok and Paul Frijters who I’ve both written with before as you know, about the history of quarantines. The history of quarantine policy whether quarantines, lockdowns, basically, or you know, cordon sanitaire, as they’re called in French, whether they actually have a track record of working in response to other disease threats over the ages, including the Black Death, and many other diseases as well. Now, what we are discovering, and this is really down to Sanjeev’s amazing historical work is that, in fact, in the 1800s, there was a movement that developed based on the the scant evidence that quarantines did anything positive and a huge amount of evidence that they were very destructive, there was a movement of the developed called the sanitarians movement, which aimed to basically beat quarantine as an idea out of the public health system and replace it with the idea that what we need to aim for in public health is clean water, clean streets, clean air, sanitary living conditions, basically, because in such conditions, of course, as we now know, germs are less likely to thrive, you have lower viral loads, you’d have more health for you know, individual people, it’s just more immune-supportive, if you can breathe free, you know, freely and fresh air and all this and drink clean water. So it’s really about supporting the immunity of the people and reducing the load of the infectious agents, rather than separating people according to whether you think they’ve, you know, been exposed or not, or certainly in the case of COVID, even people you don’t think have necessarily been exposed just whole healthy populations, locking them down, that that just you know that that’s not nearly as effective as the as sanitary measures. So there was a figure called Charles McLean, who was an advocate of the, in the sanitarian movement, and basically did a lot of the research showing that quarantines basically fail, and that really what they are. And this was the interesting, particularly interesting part of his work, that what they are is a tool for control that is often pressed upon populations by public health bureaucracies. So it’s much more about, here is something we can do. And we can justify our jobs by having this thing in place. Because I mean, my goodness, the bureaucracy and you know, COVIDeaucracy, that grew up during the COVID era was pretty large, you know, you had to hire more people and, you know, get them to help you enforce these various policies on the population. But in terms of actual effect on disease is pretty minimal. In my cost benefit analysis, I estimate that maybe we extended the lives of maybe 10,000, mostly elderly and comorbid people for a few years. That’s what we got out of lockdowns. And what we paid for that was way more than the roughly 6 million sorry, $6 billion, that in normal times we’d be willing to pay for that amount of of benefit, that is to save a few live years of about 10,000 people. So you know, so basically, the quarantine, so lockdowns, do not have a good track record. And that was already embodied in the pre 2020 pandemic management plans in place, not only in Australia, but around the world in the West, that said, look, locking down whole populations is just very, very costly, unlikely to be beneficial. And so we should avoid it. And we should target protection measures instead. So So basically, I like to tell people who say, Well, you know, what else were we supposed to do? You know? Well, the question is, you know that lockdowns don’t work. So what are you going to do? Right? Everybody’s scared. You need to find something to do, so that you don’t run headlong into a into a speeding truck, which is what lockdowns are. That’s what you don’t do. But of course, you have to take some action. Now, if you ask me, Is there any disease that one could potentially create or imagine in one’s head for which lockdowns might have more benefit than cost? I mean, even for the Black Death it’s questionable, compared to the other things that could be done, sanitary measures, right, compared to everything else we could do. It’s not like we have to let it rip versus lockdown. There’s a whole spectrum of possible response. And we really didn’t investigate that spectrum at all during COVID. So I think the answer is really usually it’s nuanced. It’s customised to the disease in play, it should be updated as we learn more information about that disease, and it should be targeted to the people who are truly vulnerable.

Gene Tunny  22:13

Yeah. Gigi. Can I ask you about that? Those numbers you cited regarding how many lives? Or how many years of life were potentially saved? Did you do that modelling? Or did you rely on modelling by epidemiologists? And how did you do that? Because I mean, you’re an economist rather than an epidemiologist, I don’t mean to be critical at all. But have you had pushback on that? Have people said, Oh, well, you have a model that why should we believe those estimates? I mean, because you you’re criticising this estimate from the Prime Minister, the Prime Minister Scott Morrison claimed, while campaigning before the May 2022 election, his regime of COVID policies had saved 40,000 lives, you’re, in my analysis, so your analysis shows this figure to be a significant overestimate, even being generous to lockdowns, potential deliver benefits, how confident are you in that assessment, Gigi?

Gigi Foster  23:08

I mean, I’m as confident as one could be based on the data that we used, I very expressly did not use model simulations. And by the way, that was one of the big errors of this time. In mid March, you may even recall Neil Ferguson’s ICL modelling came out saying that, you know, 60 million people around the world were going to die or something. And of course, as we know, the COVID death count, even now is, you know, an order of magnitude less than that. And, and by the way, Neil Ferguson had been wrong in the past, right? These epidemiological models that are run in a simulated environment in a computer that necessarily do not include all the real world variables that are actually relevant to whether people die or suffer from diseases are notoriously exaggerative of the bad outcomes that may occur from the new disease threat. Right, that has happened again and again and again. We’ve had SARS and the swine flu and the you know, all these different flus that have been modelled and they’ve basically always, there has been some coterie of doomsaying epidemiology people who have said “based on my model, everybody’s gonna die.” Right? That’s just a common thing it happens, right? And you know why? Because the, you know, the media loves that stuff. It’s, you know, if they get ahold of a guy like that, who will, you know, put on a bleeding headline, that’ll get eyeballs, right, and they get status, and they get to be the person who really cares about people, because if you care about people, then you know, don’t you care that they’re all going to die, or I mean, that becomes this whole narrative. And it really crowds out actual science. Actual science is based, at best on real data, real data, right? Of course, we have theories about what happens and we need to use those to structure our understanding of our world but our world is so incredibly complex and dynamic and there are endogenous factors that are happening and shocks that we can’t predict. There’s just so much going on, that all models are wrong, as somebody said in my discipline, but some are useful, that’s how you should see a model. So what I did in order to produce that estimate of how many people in a counterfactual non lockdown Australia would have succumbed to COVID is I looked with Sanjeev, we looked at the countries in the world that had low restriction levels. So obviously Sweden is one. But we also used another counterfactual, which was about six I think other countries, with populations over a million that had low restrictions, mostly in Europe, I think that oh, Taiwan might have been in there as well. And we basically took, you know, the average deaths from COVID. This is real data, real data, what they actually experienced, not something that comes out of a computer generated simulation, but actual data, because we just believe that much more. And then we of course, adjusted for population and then applied it to Australia. And we say, well, this is our best guess right? Now, even if you think that I’m under balling that low balling that, in fact, even if you think the Prime Minister’s estimate of 40,000, people who would have died is correct. If you look at the cost of lockdowns, they still weren’t worth it. Right. So even if I’m totally wrong, the Prime Minister’s right, the lockdown still shouldn’t have been pursued. Right? But I also think that the Prime Minister is using these simulation models, these SIR models or something like this, you know, from the Doherty Institute, or some other kind of, you know, institute that was supporting the narrative and coming out with these doomsday scenarios, to come up with that figure and make himself look like a saviour.

Gene Tunny  26:26

That’s fair enough. I was just just wondering what you did that seems to make sense to me. What did you find about the deaths of young people? So if we go back to the study “COVID’s cohort of losers”. How are we defining young people? And how do you recall how many young people did end up dying of COVID in Australia,

Gigi Foster  26:46

So young people are 25 and under, that’s the estimate. And look, there will have been a few that were 25 and under who died of COVID, but it’s going to be very, very small. And they they may have died of something else anyway, because these people almost to a man or to a woman or child will have been already sick with something else, you know, diabetes or a bad illness of some sort. So I think it’s very debatable whether there was any direct COVID related benefit to these younger people, from the lockdowns as I say they, you know, people in their young 20s and late teens are exactly the ones who may get into car crashes, and they get into bar fights. So really, if I’m looking for benefits from lockdowns, that’s where I’m gonna look for the on not not in terms of COVID deaths,

Gene Tunny  27:31

Right, and just wanting to just check this Gigi, you’ve got these figures in your paper somewhere, have you where, because the calculation you’ve done is this, you’ve got this 116 times the value of any benefits. So you’ve got an estimate in wellbeing of what the cost was to young people. And then you divide that by the benefits to young people to get that 116 times and that’s also in WELLBYs. So is, that’s in one of these tables is it?

Gigi Foster  28:03

So I mean, I don’t have the report up at the moment. But yeah, there’s a table of all of the costs. And then we also tabulate the benefits and then you simply take the ratio of one to the other, obviously, you want to make sure you’re using the same currency. So whether you’re using WELLBYs or dollars to get that ratio in the cost benefit analysis for Australia as a whole, I know the ratio was 68 times, as I recall, it was a bit higher. I, as I say don’t have the report open, but I think it was a bit higher for the young. But basically, the benefit just wasn’t as high. But there was some benefit. So you know that this as I say I keep saying that the traffic accidents was (inaudible)….

Gene Tunny  28:39

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  28:45

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  29:14

Now back to the show.

Yeah, so you’ve got estimated cost to the Australian Young of the 2020/21 COVID lockdowns and you end up with an estimate in WELLBYs of looks like it’s over 7 million, over 7 million WELLBYs so that’s saying that the costs imposed on the young, so there are 7 million years of poor wellbeing for young people.

Gigi Foster  29:45

Not exactly so a WELLBY is one increment on that satisfaction scale, right? So your probably thinking of a QALY, so if you divide that number of WELLBYs by six, then you get to the QALYs and that’s the the currency you’re thinking of, which is the number of healthy years. Okay? And but you’re right in terms of that, that is that does roughly the, you know, the way to think about it is that this is the amount that was deducted from the well being of the young, okay? And that’s in terms of number of years but also the health of those years. And again as I mentioned at the start, the two main components of that are one, the direct life satisfaction damage done during lockdowns because people reported less satisfaction. And by the way, we see that in the data for Australia. So these this question about life satisfaction was asked during lockdowns by the ANUPoll survey people. So we literally use that, their findings to calibrate how much we think there was as a detriment to life satisfaction during the COVID period. And then the second big element of that cost is the debt, which will crowd out future expenditure which would have otherwise made the lives of our young people much better in the future. Now, you may ask, you know, what about the school closures? You know, wouldn’t you think that would be a big thing? And, and it is a thing, but it’s interesting, a bit of a complication here. So I was seriously disturbed at the the degree to which school closures were just immediately adopted. And everybody thought, oh, yeah, this will be fine, we’ll just have everybody working from home, you know, doing the, you know, classes from home and all this. I mean, it obviously was not the same. And it put our teachers under an enormous amount of pressure, by the way, as well. And, of course, I mean, I would have naturally expected that, in that situation, those kids who are already initially before COVID, in a disadvantaged or stress situation are going to be seriously left behind, right? Now the more advantaged kids, you know, kids of mine, for example, if I had had small kids at the time, they would have been fine. And I had young, young adult kids at the time, and they were fine. Because, you know, we have the resources to be able to support them and help to mitigate the damage that otherwise would have happened. But it’s the people already at the bottom of the food chain who suffer the most right? Which, which really makes me angry, because that’s, you know, that’s the last thing we need. Inequality is so unhelpful. And and it’s just a horrible thing, when you know, these, these people in cushy government jobs and bureaucracies, who don’t have any problem with job security are pushing this on people who then suffer and they’re, you know, they’re already suffering. So it’s just really heartless. Anyway, so you might think, well, that’s going to, of course, limit the degree to which these kids are going to be able to learn whatever it is that they’re learning, whether they’re what we call in economics, their human capital, you know, what’s in their brains from their years and years of schooling and experience will be necessarily less and that is true. But what we have to do then to figure out the the sort of cost that has been eventually imposed upon them in terms of their WELLBYs or their QALYs is work out, well, how much is that productivity loss going to be reflected in lower wages when they get to be adults, and of those wages, how much is actually likely to then be spent on things that would have otherwise made them healthier, better off, you know, more satisfied, et cetera, but that we are not going to be able to spend now because of the fact that they don’t have as high wages? Well, it’s, you know, it’s not just the full wage of those kids that you want to count. Because as it happens, when we spend privately, we’re often spending on things like status goods, you know, we’re not always but particularly in a country like Australia, we’re spending to keep up with other people. So it’s not that every extra dollar that these kids would have earned would have actually led to increases in life satisfaction, you know, you you spend in order to keep up with the Joneses that doesn’t make you more satisfied, it just keeps you at the same level sort of thing. So what really you want to count is the fraction of those extra wages, counterfactual wages that would have been accumulated by the society as a whole and spent on public goods, like more health, better education, better infrastructure, and that sort of thing. So that’s basically the tax take. So that’s what we do to estimate the negative, the damage from the loss of schooling, the disruption to schooling, in terms of WELLBYs in the future for these kids. And as it turns out, that amount tends to be you know, it turns out to be much less than it would be if we counted that whole forgone wage. And so you know, that that’s a bit of a surprise, perhaps, to some people, but it’s just because of this interesting feature of the way in which our private spending is or isn’t related to creating more life satisfaction for us.

Gene Tunny  34:24

Yeah, yeah, absolutely.

Tim Hughes 34:26

With the whole economics of it, which, of course, is what you two are trained in and experienced in. And so yeah, the figures are pretty damning for any of the responses around the world, apart from those who took a lighter, a view of it like Sweden, for instance. And I think it was really good that different responses were taken around the world so that they could be compared and whatever would come from that, like I said at the beginning, my main interest in all of these conversations, really is to see what could we do better next time, in view of what happened? And that’s still largely the case because clearly, I mean, I’m a lay person, that’s my role in this scenario, you guys are economists. Clearly, we would all listen to epidemiologists, medical people who would have their views on this too, because, for instance, in the early days of COVID-19, from the pictures that were being seen from North Italy, for instance, the, you know, the scenes from the hospitals there, it seemed extremely dire. And I didn’t feel for instance, everyone’s got a unique perspective of the lockdown and what happened. I didn’t see or feel any great fear in Australia, we were a long way from it. So geographically, we’re a long way from that kind of action. But (cough) sorry, long COVID, bad joke. So, yeah, my feeling would be that one of the first things with this, because I saw not panic or fear, especially over here in Australia, but people just complying and sort of concerned but just going along with what appeared to be the best decisions at the time. You know what can we do to protect the hospitals and the doctors, nurses from being overwhelmed was one of the driving forces, and some of the logic that a layperson, like myself might see in a lockdown. So for instance, and if that turns out to be not the best response, then I’m really open to see what would be the best response because everything done and said, What are we going to do next time when this comes around? And there seems to be at an early stage of any of these pandemics? We mentioned SARS and MERS, Ebola, for instance, they all have different CFRs, so the case fatality rate, and how likely to die are you if you contract this? And they have different R naught scores, which is something I learned about as we did some background for this, the transmissibility of it how easily transmissible is it? And so there must be at some point, an area in early days of any of these viruses where we’re not sure, we don’t know. And so the first thing would be, I would have thought to say, Okay, well, how soon can we have any kind of certainty as to what we’re dealing with? How? What was the case fatality rate? How easily transmissible is it? That would be, I would imagine one of the first things we can do, and then let it unfold from there. Like I mentioned before, like if some sort of protocol that we can have in place that we’re not, I mean, everyone, all of us now have some experience with this, from what we’ve gone through for good or bad or whatever. And I don’t think, I think it was a one trick pony, for the amount of lockdowns that happened. Even the most patient person would be less compliant if this was to happen fairly soon. And so the next one will be different straightaway, you know, so what is it we can put in place that everyone can be generally okay with, that would be a good response? But like I said, sorry, going back to an initial point, how do we determine, you know, what would be that, that first response of like, just how bad is this? What are we dealing with?

Gigi Foster  37:56

Yeah, so I mean, it’s, it’s interesting to hear you talk about and having in place protocol, you know, so that we know what the steps are, everybody can agree to them. That is kind of what the pandemic management policies that we already had before COVID, which…

Tim Hughes  38:09

Which nobody had known about. And like, that didn’t seem to be any, it seemed to catch everyone by surprise.

Gigi Foster  38:14

Well, I mean, I think that people who, whose job it was to know about them knew about them, you know, the department’s of health in the various different states and the Commonwealth, I mean, that they would, of course, know about their own pandemic management policies, right? People, as all might not have known about them. But that’s because, you know, we don’t know a lot about a lot of things that go on in the back rooms of government that are just handling stuff, like, you know, do we know, how many steam rollers are purchased every year for the infrastructure projects? No, you know, I mean, there’s a lot of stuff we don’t know. And they’ve came to the fore that these pandemic management policies existed really, quite a long time after the lock downs were implemented, right? Nobody was talking at the time about, Hey, why are we doing this? Look, it says in the plan, we’re not supposed to. Nobody was saying that, right. So your your desire for a protocol, which everyone can agree, I mean, we had that and it failed. Unfortunately, that’s from my perspective. That’s why I say the key things here are politics and psychology. Those are the two things that we need to focus on if we want to get a better solution going forward. And, you know, on the point of the overcrowded hospitals and overworked nursing and Doctor staffs, I mean, yes, it is true that in times of great disease, and you know, the the influx of a new bug, hospitals sometimes become very crowded, and the workers in health care systems sometimes become very overworked. This is something that they deal with on a semi regular basis. There’s surge, capacity protocols that these hospitals have and that the staff have as well. And you know, that you can bring in more people. It’s like, if it’s like, if you have a war, you know, and you and you have to mobilise, right. There are ways we do this. And as an economist, I might make a dry observation that if you never have your hospitals overcrowded then you’ve got too many hospitals. Right? If you always have a spare bed and some spare hands hanging around, then you should redeploy the money that you’ve spent to hire those beds and that those workers to some other area that can support human wellbeing and thriving, right, because we only have so many dollars, right. And so you don’t want to have spare capacity underutilised. So there is just this natural ebb and flow of sickness and illness that and you know, and injury as well that hospitals have to manage they manage this in maternity wards, for example, right? A lot of women give birth, when it’s raining outside, you know, I’d have particular pressure or whatever causes people to go into labour. And that means that you sometimes have to, you know, basically employ a lot more people, doctors and nursing staff or whatever, at a particular moment. And then there’s less demand later. I mean, hospitals know how to handle this. So that’s, that’s point one about the hospital overcrowding. Point two, we’ve been through this exact kind of problem before the 1957 flu was very similar. We didn’t lock down whole healthy populations for that thing, right? We didn’t have the media that we have today, we didn’t have the global media spreading all of these scary stories about Italy, as you mentioned, or China, you know, people falling over in the streets or in New York City with the mass graves and all that. So we didn’t have the fear generation mechanism that we have today. But we did have a virus that was pretty similar in terms of its virulence.

Tim Hughes  41:22

I hadn’t heard of that one actually, the 1957 one, yeah okay…

Gigi Foster  41:24

Just another flu. Yeah, no another flu. And the thing about COVID, that really was different than some of the analogues that were being used was not only that it was less lethal, but it was also just not killing kids. Right? 1918 flu was scary, because it was killing everybody. Alright, kids as well, that’s really scary, right? Like, one of the worst things gonna happen to you as a human being is you lose your child, right? So that’s very bad. That was just not really happening during COVID. Except for children who are already seriously ill. And even then, you know, less likely. And even for some people, I mean, people were the exact risk baskets, they were still surviving with more than, you know, 50% likelihood but it wasn’t like it was a complete death sentence. So. So anyway, the second point on the hospitals thing is just that you’re presuming that going to the hospital is the thing that you have to do when you have COVID. That’s the only way we can treat it or the best way we can treat it. As it turned out, going to hospital was kind of a mixed bag, in a lot of cases with COVID, right. And if you put people on ventilators, Mechanical ventilators, they often have worse outcomes. Not always but frequently enough, it wasn’t a panacea by going to hospital didn’t mean that you’d be cured. In fact, it was, you know, kind of much of a muchness in a lot of cases. And sometimes so as the, as the panic wore on, and the protocols became more entrenched about, you know, how are we going to count COVID, and how much money goes to hospitals that have COVID cases, it became financially advantageous for hospitals to label somebody a COVID case, and then follow a particular protocol to treat that person which really might not have the best outcome for him or her. Right, so hospitals were a real mixed bag. And what we weren’t told was all of the other myriad things that one can do if one wants to: A, avoid getting ill, and B, if one is ill, to limit the the probability that you’re going to progress to a disease stage where you really will need to go to hospital. So there were plenty of things we could have done, you know, including all the stuff we already knew before COVID, about how to fight respiratory illnesses, you know, take lots of vitamin C, go outside, get your Vitamin D, have, you know, fresh drinking water and have lots of sleep and eat fruits and vegetables. And as it turned out, over time, we were learning about more things, the important role of zinc, and the important role of, you know, sort of other prophylactic measures, which were just suppressed. And in fact, you know, the crowning achievement of that suppression was the TGA, blocking ivermectin, which has been proven to be a useful prophylactic, and very useful in the early stages. But why did we block it? I ask you, that’s not public health. That’s not protocols. That’s politics, right there, that’s power politics. And so if we want to fix this, if you want a plan going forward, I think what we need to do is work on our political system, we need to revive the accountability of the people making decisions at times of crisis to the people as a whole and a representative bunch of people that need to be sort of responsible in some way for those who are in authority or the decisions or overseeing those decisions. So I’ve suggested a number of different avenues forward in both “The Great COVID Panic” and on some blogs that have come afterwards on Brownstone Institute sites, Brownstone is my publisher for The Great COVID Panic. So brownstone.org, you can see those blogs. One of them I’ll mention here is the citizen juries idea. So at the time of COVID, we saw a lot of bureaucrats who were unelected and completely unaccountable, who were basically driving policy. So you know, health health ministers, for example, around the around the country, right? Remember, Brett Sutton, who basically became a sex symbol. Yeah. And Brad Hazzard and a few other ones. And you know, these people were doing things and advocating for policies that never went through Parliament. They never they never got the tick expressly from the people, now the politicians will say, well, but the people were clamouring for more and more protection. And you know, that is true to a certain extent. But these guys were appointed by politicians. So there was also this element to which they were all kind of playing into each other’s game, right? Everybody was following a playbook, rather than really having anyone looking out for what was really in the long term interests of the people. So I, with my co authors, Paul Frijters and Michael Baker, we’ve proposed that instead of having those positions, like the head of the Ministry of Health, be political appointments, we have them instead be appointments by citizen juries. So we already use the jury system in the criminal justice system, right? The idea would be that everybody in Australia, every citizen gets put on a jury role and an expectation once in your life, you have to spend two to three months working with 20 to 30 of your peers. And your sole job is to appoint the next Minister of Health or Minister of the Environment, or Minister of Immigration or whatever it is right on top of the public service. And if we did this over a few years, and you know, kept replacing all of the various heads who needed to be replaced at the state level and the Commonwealth level, with people appointed by the people as a whole rather than politicians, we’d end up with a burgeoning cadre of people making, you know, in positions of authority, able to make decisions, and hopefully more responsive to what is actually good for the people, because it’s the people who would have appointed them, right, rather than the politicians. So that’s one suggestion to try to hack away at the bad politics of this whole situation. So that maybe the next time those people would feel a bit more of a duty to be responsive to what was actually good for Australia.

Gene Tunny  46:35

Yeah, very good. Gigi. I’ve had Nicholas Gruen on the show and we’ve talked about citizens juries in the past. So yeah, absolutely. Think I think they’re a great idea. Did you have a follow up Tim?

Tim Hughes  46:46

I heard that episode, that conversation you had with Nick, Nick Gruen, and yeah, the idea of citizens juries I find really interesting. It’s along the lines of what Warren Hatch, from Good Judgement is talking about with super forecasters to have skilled generalists, as opposed to experts. I mean, obviously, we need to listen to everybody. I think listening to different perspectives and different opinions is really important with all of this. And that that feeds in with the citizens juries is to have that diversity of opinion in these areas of selection. So I think that’s a really, really interesting point.

Gene Tunny  47:19

Just one more Gigi, Yeah, this is great. I’ve really enjoyed this and learning a bit, there’s, learning a lot. So particularly about your methodology, I find this whole WELLBY methodology fascinating, because it’s not something I’ve used myself. And it’s something that’s different from standard cost benefit analysis. So I’d just like to ask, I mean how has it been received worldwide, this WELLBY methodology, is it being applied for, what policy issues is it been applied to?

Gigi Foster  47:47

Yeah, it’s a really good question. And the one of the reasons I use it is because it is actually getting some traction. So right now in the UK Green Book, which is the kind of , I don’t know, guide for how to judge, how to evaluate policies or you know, what we should be going for, as a government. They talk about WELLBYs, they talk about how to produce WELLBYs through government spending. Government programmes have been evaluated against the metric of how many WELLBYs on net are we getting from this programme, and that programme can be something like, you know, mental health provision, mental health service provision, which by the way, has a very, in, at least in the UK studies I’ve seen, has a very high benefit to cost ratio. So you should do that, if you’re a government mental health support is very important thing. And you can also evaluate anything else that the government might do, like, bussing old people up to Stonehenge to have a look, you know, or taking people out, you know, disabled people out to lunch every week, or whatever the thing is that you’re hoping that that might help people. And you kind of want a measure of that, you know, are we really delivering higher quality of life to our people with this policy? So it’s being accepted, I think, more broadly as a reasonable and defensible metric, to which governments can be tethered there, they can be held accountable. There have been a number of cost benefit analyses, actually of COVID policy that have been conducted in WELLBY terms. So not only in Australia, but I think in about six other countries around the world, there have been these CBAs that have used WELLBYs, but of course, there have also been a lot of other CBAs that have US Dollars or QALYs, and we all come to the same conclusion, you know, broadly qualitatively, but it’s really lovely to see that diversity you know, as you’re saying before, you know, diversity is an incredibly important strength of our, of our modern societies, if we could only harness it, right? And what we did in COVID, of course, was we suppressed it you know, we kind of killed that that golden goose whereas another thing we really need to focus on is how to not move in the direction of suppression and censorship. So for example, these new laws about misinformation and disinformation I think these things are toxic. That’s awful, you know, because who is going to decide what is disinformation and misinformation? I mean, my gosh, it’s puerile right, and just the idea the conceit you know, the hubris, that somehow the government knows what the truth is. I mean, when has that ever been true? Right? Like nobody has has a monopoly on the truth. I don’t have a monopoly on the truth. You know, I, I would love to be proven wrong on some of these things during lockdowns, I was thinking to myself, My God, I hope I’m wrong, like God, I hope I’m wrong, right? Because if I’m not, we’re killing people, you know, these policies are killing 1000s of people. And and it’s just it’s too too horrific to imagine. So, you know, I, I would like to have more discussion of these if these issues are crossed aisles of belief and perspective and experience. So we need to relearn how to have tolerance for that, you know, this, this cancel culture dynamic we’ve got going on today, is extremely toxic. It suppresses one of the greatest strengths of our civilised post enlightenment societies. And, and it basically just means that you have a lack of innovation, right? Innovation comes from somebody in a minority, at that time, having a new idea, right? And saying, Hey, guys, why don’t we try this? That’s That’s what innovation is. And if you if you quash alternative voices, you’re quashing innovation and innovation as a source as you know, of all growth. So, right, that’s the wrong direction to go. If we want to build healthy, vibrant societies with gains in human life quality, which is what I’m going for,

Tim Hughes  51:22

Completely agree, I think, you know, healthy debate and having those guidelines around what healthy debate is, and the ability to listen to different perspectives, and avoiding the echo chambers, which I agree, I think that’s what the cancel culture encourages, is to people to go to their little sort of support groups and say their things amongst each other without any serious sort of challenges to their ideas or hearing new ideas. So I fully, I fully agree with that Gigi.

Gene Tunny  51:50

And I think, I think certainly young people, if you look at the cost versus any benefit that they obtained, yeah, it’s going to far exceed that, that benefit, I agree with that. You’ve come up with seven new, over 7 million WELLBYs as a cost, and around 60,000 WELLBYs as a benefit. Now, it’s going to be some multiple, large multiple of, of any benefits I agree with that? Have you thought about whether, you know, young people may have been willing to pay that? Because they thought they were protecting their grandparents or elderly people? Have you thought about that Gigi and how you might incorporate that in your analysis?

Gigi Foster  52:27

Yeah. So I mean, the the question there is, would the government in a counterfactual world have been able to take policies that would have readjusted people’s expectations towards the truth in the moment of crisis, because the truth was that it was not going to be protective of their grandparents to do all of this stuff. In fact, it would be more protective, if they went out, licked a lot of lamppost tried to get COVID got immunity, and then we’re on, you know, not dangerous to their grandparents anymore, right. That’s what we were doing. I mean, in my family, we were trying to get COVID every which way. And we didn’t manage to until finally last year, I got it. But you know, it was sort of the young, healthy people, you know, on paper, they just wanted to get immunity as quickly as possible. That’s what that’s what would have best protected their grandparents. So the reason why people believed that was the misinformation promulgated by the government. Right. So if you ask me, Well, you know, should we just have gone along with that? Well, no, you know, I like to think that we can have a society where the government isn’t pushing propaganda. You know, that’s, that’s, that’s not what in a democratic society, I look to the government to do, the government is our servant. It’s our servant. And it should not be stuffing our throats with, you know, wrong think., and calling it right think and calling everybody else who disagrees the people who are the wrong thinkers, right? I mean, it’s 1984. So, you know, you get no, it’s ugly, I think. And now, now, the issue of however, is that because we have now lived through this, many people have become psychologically tethered to the narrative, they have been themselves in part of the agent of a lot of this destruction, right. And in their own mind, their identity is swept up with this. And they took actions against their own family, often, that they thought at the time were protective, because of course, most people act, you know, in a way that that upholds their self image as being a good person, of course, right. But now that that’s being revealed not to have been true, we have got a massive psychological problem on our hands, massive. People are unable to talk about this in an unemotive way. They’re scarred psychologically, they are, the the actual realities are so shocking, that if they were to face them, I think many people would would just fall into a really deep hole, psychologically, and so that is, in my mind, one of the big problems that we have to deal with now, in the post COVID, you know, period, is to reconcile across the aisles. And it’s not the people like me, who were pilloried at the time, who took the most psychological damage. Like I can handle it, it’s fine, right? Whatever. I knew I was doing the right thing I sleep well at night, no problem. But for the people who were part of the damaging structure, including those who were, you know, calling each other out about the masking, you know, you don’t have enough mask on or, you know, dobbing people in for going to school when they had a sneeze and or whatever it was, you know, they were being the agents of this distruction. You know, they’ve now learned Oh, okay, the 1930s, I would have been part of the regime, right? That’s the scary realisation, and for them to really face that is just going to cause a huge psychological shock. So that, for me is is one of the big things we have to work out. How are we going to help those people going forward? And because history will eventually put this period down as one of the most tragic in history because of the mismanagement of the crisis by the government, and all the people who went right along with it, will have to, you know, read that in the history books. And that’s going to be really difficult for them. So yeah, I have a lot of compassion for those people.

Gene Tunny  55:55

Very good. Tim, your, well, we might end on your intelligent observation, assuming it is intelligent.

Tim Hughes  56:01

Well, thanks. I shouldn’t talk it up too much. It was more of along the lines, actually of a couple of things you said earlier, Gigi, about health and good nutrition, being able to go out in the sunlight and everything which of course, was restricted at times with some of the lockdowns of course. And something that we can do straightaway, to help us through any future pandemics is to become healthier, improve our immune systems naturally, which has all these multiple benefits as well. So going along with any psychological issues that we may be facing as a result of the pandemic, then to eat well, and exercise well and sleep well would go along with that fabulously and what I was going to put forward do you guys being economists, see what you think about subsidising the cost of vegetables and whole foods, so fruit, veg and meat in their natural state, so without being processed, and put a tax on ultra processed food to be able to pay for that subsidy. So instead of Pringles being whatever they are double the price of that and use that money to subsidise. So people can be encouraged to eat more healthily.

Gigi Foster  57:12

Yeah, I mean, this is a typical kind of economist response. Right. So it’s a sin tax basically, you know, we have at the moment as you know, a GST which applies to you know, a lot of goods and services but not the food’s you know, foodstuffs of various sorts, you could you could have, you could have exclusions for you know, fresh fruit and fresh vegetables, whatever, and then have a GST in place for anything processed. There’s all sorts of things you could do, if you wished. My reading of the closest thing to that, that I’ve seen elsewhere, which is the tax on sugary drinks experiments, right, that’s been run elsewhere, is that it does collect money. Yeah, you do collect money and it does reduce the purchasing of those beverages, those sugary drinks, but it usually doesn’t actually change the underlying issue, which in those cases is obesity. Right? It doesn’t really have a measurable impact on the amount of people who are obese the fraction of people who are obese, how obese they are or whatever because what happens is people switch to other things. They may not buy the coke but they instead buy the muffins and then you know they’re getting just as bad so in the case of the the taxation on you know, different goods, I just don’t know really. Partly it’s because I think that some of the reason if not the bulk of the reason why some people are not as healthy don’t choose as healthy habits as others is psychological. Okay, it’s not just about the resources that are literally available to you like do you have enough money to buy the fruits and vegetables? It’s a bit of that perhaps and certainly in some food desert areas it will be that and there’s a cultural element of course which is you know, if your family doesn’t eat this way how can you do that but then that’s is that really going to be that affected by you know, taxes? Probably not. So my my sense I mean, obesity is a mental health problem from my perspective. And I think that low immunity is also to an extent that as well. If I think about myself for example, I have this incredible luxury of you know, being able to have a nice good job, well paying job I, mean they haven’t fired me yet thank goodness, knock on wood, for saying all the things I’ve said during this period, I love my job. I love teaching, I love doing research, I love doing these conversations. I have the luxury of being able to afford kitchen appliances which let me make beautiful smoothies every day from fresh fruits and vegetables I buy from the store. I have great sleep every night, I you know I can run, I can exercise, I got sex every day I want and all these things that are obviously promotive of immunity. But I also have something that people don’t mention a lot which is huge amount of mental resources. Why? Because I am loved. I am supported. I was, I feel accepted. I feel I’m making a contribution to my world. I’m also healthy, naturally. So you know, because I’ve been investing in my health I can use that health surfeit to put more effort into being healthier right? A lot of people who are in places of disadvantage or not looking after their health do not have those kinds of advantages. They’re in dysfunctional families. So we’ve got multiple overlapping problems, you know, substance abuse and domestic violence. They’ve got unclean, you know, living environments that you know, hail the sanitation people again. So you know, those people, are they really going to respond to having to pay 10 cents less for a, you know, a carrot, or something? I don’t know, I think the problems are bigger than that. So I’m not saying don’t try it. But I think that the problems are, again, wider than just, here’s a protocol, you know, in terms of the COVID stuff. Similarly, with being healthy, it’s not just the costs, it’s also other entrenched problems, which have to do with psychology and culture.

Tim Hughes  1:00:39

No, fair enough and, and yeah like anything, it’s not straightforward. But for most of us, it is something within our control that we can sort of focus on and do better on. So it’s certainly something I think can be emphasised by governments and whoever is looking to improve responses and everything. It’s the foundation of our natural immune systems, which isn’t impervious to all of these viruses, of course, but certainly gives us a fighting chance.

Gigi Foster  1:01:00

Yeah. Totally agree

Gene Tunny  1:01:04

Absolutely. Okay, Professor Gigi Foster. It’s been terrific. Thanks so much for your time. I really enjoyed chatting with you. And yeah, it was great and thanks for answering our questions. And yeah, I really look forward to your future work. So thanks so much, Gigi.

Gigi Foster  1:01:20

Thanks so much for having me on. It’s a, it’s a great pleasure to speak with you.

Tim Hughes  1:00:23

Thanks Gigi.

Gene Tunny  1:01:24

Righto, thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

1:02:11

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey. Head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

Business as Unusual: No such thing as Business as Usual anymore? w/ Rick Yvanovich – EP204

Serial entrepreneur and executive coach Rick Yvanovich talks about his new book “Business as Unusual: How to Thrive in the New Renaissance.” Rick argues that the world is continuing to undergo a massive shift and that there is no going back to normal. He shares his insights on the mindsets, habits, and skills necessary to succeed in this new era. The conversation also touches on Rick’s journey to Vietnam, where he currently resides, and what it was like living in Saigon during the pandemic. 
Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored.

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest:  Rick Yvanovich

Entrepreneur, Techie, Brit, baby boomer, bean counter in: supermarkets, accounting profession, breweries, newsagents, defence manufacturing, IT, Talent, F&B, property development and BP, in the UK, China, Singapore, Switzerland and Vietnam. Posted to BP China as Finance Manager, then to BP Vietnam in 1990 making him likely the longest Brit and one of the most seasoned expats in Vietnam.

Fellow Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), Chartered Global Management Accountant (CGMA), Fellow CPA Australia, MSc Strategic Business Management (Manchester Metropolitan University, UK), Certified Coaching and Mentoring Professional (CCMP), Certified Master Coach (CMC).

Treasurer & Board Member BritCham Vietnam, Vice-Chair AMCHAM HCMC DEC (Digital Economy) Group, Chairman Industry Advisory Committee RMIT Vietnam, founder/co-founder/investor/advisor of multiple start-ups.

Regular speaker for Talent, Coaching, Accounting, Digital Transformation, Project Management, Doing Business in Vietnam.

For further info about Rick, check out:

https://www.rickyvanovich.com/about/

What’s covered in EP204

  • [00:01:45] Rick’s career and journey to Vietnam
  • [00:08:00] Business as Unusual. 
  • [00:13:27] The great reshuffle. 
  • [00:16:29] The impact of lockdowns in Saigon. 
  • [00:25:01] Technological advancement. 
  • [00:29:19] Climate change and AI. 
  • [00:33:24] How to Thrive in the New Renaissance. 
  • [00:36:11] How AI helps you overcome the tyranny of the blank page. 
  • [00:41:06] Reflecting on life during COVID. 
  • [00:46:19] Zoom calls as a lifeline during COVID. 

Links relevant to the conversation

Rick’s book Business as Unusual:

https://www.rickyvanovich.com/books/bauu-book-series/

Article on “How AI is helping airlines mitigate the climate impact of contrails”:https://blog.google/technology/ai/ai-airlines-contrails-climate-change/

Transcript: Business as Unusual: No such thing as Business as Usual anymore? w/ Rick Yvanovich – EP204

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. It was then checked over by a human being, Tim Hughes from Adept Economics, to pick up any clangers that potters… sorry, otters might have missed. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Gene Tunny  00:06

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory, evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show.

Hello, thanks for tuning into the show. In this episode, I chat with entrepreneur Rick Yvanovic about his new book “Business as Unusual How to Thrive in the New Renaissance”. Rick argues that nothing is going back to normal and in Business as Unusual, he gives us his thoughts on the mindsets, habits and skills we need in a world in which there’s no more business as usual. Okay, let’s get into it. I hope you enjoy my conversation with Rick Yvanovich.

Rick Yvanovich, welcome to the programme.

Rick Yvanovich  01:17

Thanks for having me, Gene.

Gene Tunny  01:19

That’s terrific. Rick, keen to chat with you about your new book. “Business as Unusual, How to Thrive in the New Renaissance”. So very interested in that. To start off with I understand you’re coming to us from Vietnam. Could you tell us a bit about your journey to Vietnam, please, Rick, how did you end up there? In terms of your career trajectory?

Rick Yvanovich  01:47

Oh, great question. Gene. Yes, I am calling in today from Vietnam from Saigon or Ho Chi Minh City, as it’s known as today, you might be detecting from my accent that it’s from Britain. So I’m a Brit, although people do accuse me of having an Australian twang, but maybe your listeners would dispute that. How do I get here? How do I how do I get from where I actually started off with which was in a supermarket in the UK, I used to work in as a as a as a management trainee in a supermarket chain. When I left school and didn’t quite make the grades to go to university. And having worked in a supermarket for some months, after about six months, I realised I sort of felt brain dead. As in, I wasn’t applying my brain. Because I’m a numbers person. And, you know, I was a good student at school apart from when it came to those last exams. And for some reason, I suddenly decided, you know, work in a supermarket wasn’t for me, working with people wasn’t for me. I want to become an accountant. Okay, I don’t know where that came from. Maybe the numbers, or maybe it was a careers advisor at school who told me Oh, you’re a numbers guy, Rick you should become an accountant. So I went back to accounting school, became an accountant, joined an audit accounting firm, which I really didn’t like. So switch to management accounting and worked for a brewery, which was far more exciting. I think it’s the only company I’ve ever worked with where they, they gave you free beer and wine at lunch, and encouraged you to drink it. And then that led me on to other things. You know, I moved to defence, manufacturing, defence electronics, and then Facilities Management, or an IT Bureau, which is today known as cloud and cloud computing. And then I moved to real estate. And then I moved to oil. And when I was working for that oil company, they moved me to China. And then they moved me to Vietnam. So that was all the way back in 1990. So I’ve been here for a while. It’s been a it’s been a long and and unusual journey.

Gene Tunny  04:21

Right. Yeah. So you’ve worked across a diverse range of industries and you were in oil, but you no longer in in oil. You’ve been doing your own thing or running your own business. Is that right? And that’s what you’re doing now?

Rick Yvanovich  04:33

Yeah, that’s right. I mean, back in. In 94, I was gonna get shipped back to London, oil price was running at about $15 which was ridiculously low compared to today, and it was going even lower. So that obviously changed all the economics of those companies. And having been in Vietnam for some years, I hadn’t met my previous five bosses. So it would be very dangerous to step onto that plane and step off the plane in London and walk into the office because that will be a very short journey, I think. So I found out about a voluntary redundancy package and I retired. So I actually retired back in 1994. I am a workaholic, though. So that lasted for about five seconds. And I started up an IT company. And we’re still doing what we started literally 30 years ago or 29 years ago, so 30 years next year, which is to implement accounting systems, I’m an accountant, implement accounting systems, seems a bit obvious. And we do it in about 80 different countries around the world today.

Gene Tunny  05:39

Very good. Okay. As an economist, yes, I could, I’m very supportive of my cousins, or my fellow people in the accounting profession, and I understand the value of it. So that’s, that’s good stuff. Righto, well Rick I’d better ask you about your new book Business as Unusual. So with the title Business as Unusual, what are you driving at there? What is the, the genesis of that title? Could you explain that, please?

Rick Yvanovich  06:09

Well the genesis of of that was, you know, the book was birthed, as it were, in about 2020. I’ve always had this, you know, on my life goals list, you know, might be or could, may have been a life fantasy list, you know, go write a book. And it’s been that for years. But if we go back, you know, some years if we can all remember, not pretty sure if everybody listening can remember, 2020 is when we had that COVID pandemic sort of sprung upon us by surprise. And it was during that that period, that I actually, because I had time on my hands, funnily enough, I started writing a book, and got it actually published earlier this year. But you know, as, as we were locked down, and I know in Australia, you know, you locked down the country for some years. And here in Vietnam, we effectively locked down the country for some years as well. So as an expat here, as a foreigner, I could leave, but I couldn’t come back, necessarily. So that was not a good idea to leave. And so therefore, I actually worked out from the start of the pandemic, when they started the lock downs, which is tail end of the first quarter of 2020, I didn’t move more than about 10 or 15 kilometres away from where I live for two years, literally for two years. As this is was all happening. And as things started falling apart, and all the wheels fell off everything people kept saying, when this is over, when we you know, go back into the offices, and it goes back to business as usual, when you know, this is just the new normal, you know, we’ll get over this and everything can just go back to the way it was before. And this just sort of annoyed me more than anything else, but there’s nothing remotely normal about any of this, there is no business as usual. And especially here in Vietnam, you know, where the clamp downs were pretty tough, you know, confined to apartment, you know, you need a permit to literally walk out your front door and go down to go down to the shop once a week or twice. So we really, really, really tightly controlled and it was open, close, open, close, open, close. And this went on for a while. And each time people thought it’s over, and we can go back to the office. Something else happened, oh, we got another lockdown or another another. And I said, there is nothing usual about this. This is all unusual. And that’s where the where the title came from business as unusual. Because shock after shock or surprise after surprise kept hitting us whether it is another lockdown, or, you know, other things we’ve experienced. There’s a bit of a war going on and you know, in Europe isn’t there. You know, we have the economic turmoil that’s hitting some countries, we’ve had the great resignation or great insert word that you want. All these things are happening and have been happening. And, and it’s not over yet. This is just unusual.

Gene Tunny  09:34

Yeah, yeah. Yeah. Certainly since 2020. I fully agree with you. I’ve got a couple of questions and a few things I want to explore. So Rick, you said you know things aren’t going back to normal? I mean, what have you noticed what things have you noticed haven’t really settled down in in say, the way we work or the way we live? So the economy society, what have you really noticed that hasn’t gone back to normal?

Rick Yvanovich  10:03

There are a few things. So when we look at normal, and what do we really mean by that? So you could say that’s linked to a bit business as usual. So that business as usual doesn’t have to be in a work context. It can just be an a non-work or a life context. And I think this is all very much linked to this, this great resignation or reshuffle or whatever you want to want to call it. Pre-pandemic, pre all of this happening. Normal, one could argue, was the, you know, we get up, we go the office, we sit in our cube, you know, we go home, we get on with life. So married with our job, married to our job, maybe married to our mortgage, got bills to pay, right? Kids in school, all that kind of stuff. And I feel that there was a as an acceptance that we might be a bit bit like that hamster on a wheel at work, and we’re in a cube, we’re in a cage and we’re not going anywhere. COVID comes along, and they took the office away, they threw the cube away, and they threw that wheel away, you know, are we any better off? Well, we don’t even have a wheel to run around. And you know, we’re not even in that cube anymore. We’re just somewhere else which might be your home, or whatever you ended up being. Because at the end of the day, when the lock downs happen, it’s like musical chairs, isn’t it. And I know people who were on a business trip, and they couldn’t get back into Vietnam. They also couldn’t get back into their country of origin either. And they were just stuck wherever they were stuck. And you know, it’s crazy. I know some people who are stuck literally for six months or 10 months in a third country where they didn’t want to be in in the first place, but they couldn’t move. Anyway. So I liken it to they’ve, you know, we’re no longer that hamster or whatever, running in circles in a wheel going nowhere. I feel that people feel that they’re not too sure what direction to go in anymore. And so it’s more like, we’re still that hamster, or any other animal you want to call yourself. But we’re trapped in a maze. You know, there are lots of different directions we can go in. But they’re not necessarily leading anywhere. And it’s a bit like the, the Cheshire Cat in you know, Alice in Wonderland. And Alice comes to the crossroads and sees the cat and says, you know, which way should I go? And the cat’s sort of saying, well, it really depends where you want to go. And Alice is replying well, I really don’t know, the cat’s saying, well, it really doesn’t matter where you’re gonna go? Because you’re not going to go anywhere. And I feel that’s what the great resignation is all about. You know, some people have been forced to resign because their industry has collapsed, or the company they’re working for has gone bankrupt, and it’s collapsed. Or they didn’t like how they’re being treated when all this was happening, and so they’ve been, they’ve had to resign, or they were terminated, or they walked with their feet, because the grass is always greener. The only problem is, is people have found that the grass isn’t greener. And they’re still moving around. And so the ripple effects of the Great reshuffle as it’s, you know, as it morphed into, a still happening and is, you know, it’s happening across the world. So the way that we look at work has changed. And we can see this by the yo yo that we had, maybe it’s less this year, but especially last year, when companies opened up again, hey, you can come back to the office. Yeah but we’ve been working remotely for a year and I like working remotely, and I don’t want to come back to the office. So you know, if your company allows you to work 100% remotely and you like it, you know, you’re quids in right? But no worries. However, what happens if you know, you’re forced to come back to the office and you’re told you must come back to the office? Or you must be in the office for X days, when you want to not be in the office? Conversely, what are those? What about those people who really, really miss the office, they missed all that collaboration, all their friends and they want to go back to the office, okay, but they’re told no, no, we got rid of the offices we worked out we can save loads of money by having no offices, go work from home or wherever you want. So the whole way of working is changing and some companies are enforcing it. Some people are sitting on the fence, you know, and that’s really confusing. Okay, it’s really, really confusing. And so not only does that affect each one of our citizens as an individual, Hey, what is our company doing in which we may agree or disagree with? Working within that? Okay? Because I’m I’m seeing that more and more or I don’t know what the percentage is, but I feel it’s very high, very high percentage of companies have some form of remote work now or hybrid work. And the way that you work in a hybrid situation is new to a lot of us, okay? Like, hey, we went to the office and like we sit around the watercooler, we go out for lunch, we have a coffee, we go for a beer or whatever. That’s how it works. But how do you do that when half the people aren’t there? So how do we communicate? And today we’re on we’re on a zoom call, which maybe two years ago, and we weren’t that expert zoom. Whereas today, well come on it’s a basic skill to be expert on Zoom and Teams and all the other video conferencing platforms, it’s just a new tool the you absolutely must know. So all how do we work? Well, that’s a tricky one. What’s the best practice for companies? Oh, that’s a tricky one as well. How can there be a best practice when we’re still trying to work it out? And that’s just work. Now, if we look at, but from another point of view, how about our lives, okay, in the year or so, depending on what country you are in, and whatever restrictions that you experience, you know, if your work, the way you work has changed. How has the way you live changed? You know in a lot of countries is especially what I found here in Vietnam, having been locked down for so much. There’s some really basic things that I started missing. You know, I’m not a tree hugger. Okay. However, once them doors were open, you could actually go outside. Hello, gosh, there’s a tree. Let me touch it. I haven’t seen haven’t touched one of these for literally months. Okay, and then you know, what, when things are taken away, maybe we, we start appreciating, and we start noticing things that that we actually missed, going for a walk in the woods, silly thing like that. Or, you know, walking on the grass in bare feet or going down the beach, you know, strike going down the beach and striking up a Barbie. You know, all of these things were taken away.

Gene Tunny  17:35

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  17:41

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost benefit analysis studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  18:10

Now back to the show.

As a matter of interest Rick, can I ask you about Saigon? Because I don’t know a lot about it. I mean, other than I mean, it’s a large city. So if it’s like other Southeast Asian cities, then it could be very difficult to go outside and just walk around and go on a nice relaxing walk. But what is it like? I mean, is it? Are there places you can go? Are there parks? If you do get outside? Or do you have to travel further afield.

Rick Yvanovich  18:39

Ho Chi Minh city, officially then 9 million people, okay 10 million people in a place with 10 million people. There’s one thing you’re guaranteed. They’re always people about? Ok? And the weird thing during COVID was the the city turned into arguably a ghost town. Okay, because like any other sort of urbanised city, where are the people really from? Are they native to the city? Or do they come from outside the city? So the big challenge that that I feel the Ho Chi Minh city face and its impact on people, was that yes, it’s you know, the bustling, the biggest Metropolis there is in the country. And it’s also the employer of an awful lot of people in in in the whole province of Ho Chi Minh city because the city itself is a province is so big. There are multiple industrial zones, and there are hundreds of 1000s if not millions of workers there. Those are not native to the province. They come from elsewhere. So when the pandemic hit, and they say stay at home. And if you’re a factory worker, and a home is the room that you’re sharing that you happen to live in, because you work in a factory. Okay, home is miles away. And as as they tighten down restrictions. And you know, we had things like tent cities emerge as an Yeah, if your company can provide you a place of sleeping a tent, literally, which could be set up in a factory or even in your office, then you can stay there, you don’t actually have to leave that office or building. And that happened for a while. But what what happens if you employ 50,000 people? It’s been tricky, right? So there was mass migration, when they shut it down. And hundreds of 1000s of people were fleeing the city. Okay, so the city sort of shrunk because a lot of people left. And it was literally a ghost city. And whereas on a normal day, you have to look both ways very, very carefully to cross the road. And, and if you go into the busy streets, you might even learned, need to learn how to cross the road, because there’s so much traffic, at this ghost home, you can do what I used to do back in the early 90s when I first arrived here, you could lie down in the middle of the street, and nothing would happen because there was nobody there. So it’s weird. So for me, it was like Oh nostalgia. There’s no one around this is wonderful. There’s an I can’t hear anything. There. No, no, guys, there’s no toot toot there. No, no, there’s no noise control here, either. And so there’s constant noise all the time. And it was like, it was wonderful. I loved it. So it also remind me what I miss what I missed what I’ve been missing.

Gene Tunny  22:00

I mean, it’s good that we’re out of lockdown and restrictions and even if we’re not getting back to normal, even if we’re in this business as unusual. I think it’s still preferable to, to what we had during the pandemic with all the restrictions. Right. Can I ask Rick about a are you arguing or your you think that we’re in a phase now we’ve we’ve left the pre COVID world, and we’ve just got to get used to this unusual, you know, unusual things happen? Or maybe we were deluding ourselves pre COVID. And we forgot that things unusual things can happen. What’s your take on that? Should that just be our basic operating principle, you should be careful assuming things are going to be business as usual. There’s a debate about whether in the past we ever it ever made sense to do that. We should expect volatility, we should expect shocks, so to speak. What’s your take on that, Rick?

Rick Yvanovich  22:57

Yeah, I agree with you. It’s the VUCA mindset, isn’t it? Which was penned a long time ago? Yeah, the VUCA as in volatile, uncertain, complex and ambiguous, so that VUCA mindset. Now, if we had a VUCA mindset with COVID, you know, we’d be highly resilient and agile to it and like whatever, we’d be able to cope with it. But not many of us knew that mindset. And therefore, like, you know, somebody moved all the goalposts. And you know, what do you mean, I can’t go in or out of the country? What do you mean, I can’t walk down the road? Can’t walk my dog or whatever? I mean, this is ridiculous. Yeah. So all of those personal freedoms that we have taken for granted. I think we have got a rude awakening that will okay, this is an unusual situation with we’re taking them away. And there’s huge backlash to that. So anyway, I believe that there is no going back to normal. Okay. That’s why I call it business as unusual. I think we need to embrace the unusual no matter what anybody says COVID is overall whatever you want to class it. Look at what’s happened just this year with a generative AI. Yeah, you know, that took people by surprise. Like, where did this come from? Well, okay, it’s been brewing for more than a decade, guys. But you know, it that that has hit the world by storm. So that’s yet another you could say it’s another shock. Okay. It’s another huge shock on top of all the other shocks that we’ve had. So do you want to call it a shock? Do we want to talk call it technological advancement, okay, because that’s what it is, is just some bright sparks dreaming up some more great, innovative ideas, and it’s called generative AI and the world is embracing it in fits and starts. Okay, so some people are advocating oh this is terrible legislate against it. And other people are, you know, the first movers are embracing it and racing ahead. That’s just version one you could say of generative AI, what’s next? It’s going to keep on coming and coming at us. So how we live, okay? And how we work needs to be adaptive to that. Because we’re either going to get steamrollered and squashed by it, or we are going to be resilient to it, we’re going to be agile to it. And we’re going to embrace it and use it to keep moving forward.

Gene Tunny  25:43

Yeah, well, the take up of it is, is extraordinary. And I mean, all sorts of people are finding uses for it. And I mean, I find, I find it’s helpful, you have to bear in mind that it’s a not very good intern, I think, as Kevin Kelly described it, so you do have to be careful what it gives you, and it says that all you look at it, it doesn’t necessarily give you factual information, if it’s if we’re talking about Chat GPT. And sometimes the images that things is it mid journey, the the generative AI, image creator, but whatever it is, they can do quirky things like creative, you know, give people extra fingers and things like that. So you have to be careful with that as a first start on things. It’s just extraordinary. And I mean, the risk is if you know, we, AI guess you know, if it’s, if it makes it easier for people to commit scams to hack to and then you know, if you think of all of these nefarious or these worst case scenarios where the AI becomes what did Skynet become in Terminator 2 become sentient or became conscious. Takes over a bit. I think that’s probably a bit outlandish. But yeah, I agree with you AI is one of the things we need to that’s a huge, huge development. And yeah, we’ll have we’ll have to see how it all develops. And I mean, potentially, we will need some regulation around it. Anyway, that’s just a comment rather than a question, Rick, but if you did want to respond in any way,

Rick Yvanovich  27:15

It’s true. At the end of the day, AI is a tool. And like any tool, it can be used for different things, you can use it use it for good. And you can use it for not so good. And then unfortunately, there will always be not so good folks around doing not so good things. But we shouldn’t let that overshadow all the wonderful things that AI can actually do. I mean, there’s so many positive applications to it today. And I think as people become more aware of it, and it becomes more readily available and more cheaply available, not just for individuals, but for organisations as well. It can really, really, really help. And at the end of the day, you know, I like your comment that I agree, it’s like a not a very good intern, I would reframe that, I think it’s good to treat it like an intern in that doesn’t know what to do. Okay. So it’s not going to proactively do something until you prompt it. So it really is linked to how good are we in asking it to do what we want it to do? And I think that’s how most people are using the typical AIs that the moment? The next level is already? How do you teach it? And this is even Chat GPT? How do you teach it to respond better? So again, take that intern analogy. How would we teach it to do things better? And if you know how to do that, then it will.

Gene Tunny  29:02

Yeah, absolutely. I mean, we’re, it’s just early days. And already, I mean, it’s helpful. I use it to generate the first drafts of shownotes. episode titles and episode descriptions. And yeah, it gives you somewhere to start. So it’s terrific in that regard. Righto, Rick, what about some other things that could be coming at us? Or that could make things unusual? Have you thought about anything? What other possibilities? There are? I mean, climate change. I mean, if you think about some of the extreme scenarios around that, is that something that concerns you anything else?

Rick Yvanovich  29:39

Oh, yes, climate change should concern all of us. And maybe this is something where AI can actually help us. You know, arguably AI is collective wisdom, isn’t it? It’s all our knowledge. We just have to ask it in the right way. So again, it’s it’s a tool and how we use the tool. So for climate change, there are a couple of things. I read an article the other day about what Google is doing with AI and the airlines, one of the biggest contributors to climate change is air travel. And one of the things that causes a negative climate effect is the vapour trails that an aeroplane creates when it’s flying. Okay? And that contributes, I can’t remember the number but it’s some horrendously high number 30 40% of the pollution that it’s creating. So the challenge was, can we use AI to do something about the aeroplanes trajectory to minimise that, okay? Because it’s the aeroplane going through the different, going through the air, and what you know, what type of air is it, you know, how saturated that air is, how warm it is, how cool it is, and it can cause more or less vapour traps. Keep a long story short anyway, they worked it out, okay? And are trialling getting the air, when when they’re flying the plane is to do some minor adjustments to go a little bit higher or a little bit lower to reduce the vapour trail. And in trials, they reduced it by even as much as 50%. And that’s just a little tweak. You know, that’s not very much. Now other things as well. I mean, we know with the Earth getting a lot hotter. Yes, we all want to whack up that aircon and we’re whacking up the aircon to make our environment cooler. But we’re making our environment cooler because it’s hot. Okay, so there’s other tech out there already to try and reduce the heat. Okay, that a building has. And again, using some AI in their analysis of this. So it’s a bit like the paints that they have created. All right, which will help reflect the right type of rays. Okay, the sunlight, which will, they’ve actually worked out that if they use these panels that they’ve created, which reflects the sun, okay, but only certain wavelengths, it actually cools, it’s cooling. Okay, but it doesn’t block out the sun. It’s only certain rays. And again, AI is being used for for things like this. So there’s an awful lot of good that we can use AI but AI sensibly, and obviously, you know, certain industries like the health industry. And I would expect to see huge, huge inroads in that. Things will carry on changing. And I think with advanced tools like AI coming in and becoming more mainstream, I think the pace of especially technological change is going to accelerate. Yeah, now, going back to the business as unusual. And so without that, that’s unusual. You know, technology is all very well and good. And we all have our attitudes on whether technology is for good or not so good. The second part of the book, or the second part of the title, and our business as unusual how to thrive in the new renaissance. Yes, thank you, you have got a book. And in this business, that’s unusual. Well, you got one, and I still have yet to actually physically touch one. That was another usual thing. But the second half of the, you know, the subtitle, how to thrive in the new renaissance? What’s the renaissance got to do with it? Well, I already touched on technology, in the original Renaissance technology was the printing press, arguably today the new renaissance is technology advancement is Yeah, around the internet, the power of that all the apps we have and now generative AI, you know, the original Renaissance was all about exploration, you know, finding new countries, new lands, these days, it’s find the other things. It’s like going deep inside humans and seeing more inside the brain or whatever is going on inside us. Going into the depths of the oceans, but it’s going beyond the Earth, you know, going to the stars. The other thing, the other Biggie was the challenging of authority. So back on the original Renaissance that was the challenging of the church and the power of the church, in today’s Renaissance is the challenging of political structures and countries and how countries are governed. Okay, Okay. And finally, I think this is the most important thing. And but I left it to last even though I should have said at first, the original Renaissance was about humanism, it was about humanism. And the new Renaissance is all still about humans. And it’s about human potential in the light of all these technological advancements that we have. So that’s why I really believe that the human side is super important. And AI is not a human. And there are quirks about humans that make us human that the AI doesn’t have. So I see AI and other technologies it’s a way to augment our potential, we can do a lot more using AI, for example, you yourself said, Hey, you use AI. And it can dream up a couple of topics for you. That’s wonderful. Yeah. Okay. And it saves you a load of time. Yeah. Which makes you more productive, and you have more time to do some other stuff. That’s wonderful.

Gene Tunny  36:01

It takes you away from what do they call the tyranny of the blank page? Which which can make you procrastinate, so it’s good in that regard. I want to ask you a couple of things about what you said there Rick that, that was all, all fascinating. So one of the things you you talked about was government and so that we’re in this new Renaissance , what are you thinking about with with government? I mean, clearly, there are all sorts of people seem to be more unhappy with government than ever before, there are concerns about? Yeah, I mean, the US in particular is, you know, really problematic. And just looking at it from the outside. It doesn’t look good. What’s going on there. Looks like it’s, it’s cooked. It’s very volatile. I mean, what are you thinking with, with government? I mean, do you see changes in the way we we govern ourselves? Is technology part of that story? What are you thinking? What are you thinking there Rick?

Rick Yvanovich  37:05

That’s a big question. Yeah, I’ll put a caveat around that I’m not political in the slightest. Don’t like talking about politics. It’s always going to upset people. But if we go around the world, and we just look at COVID, I guess the jury’s still out, we can say, on which countries handled it better than others. Okay. And who’s making that opinion, anyway, is that us as individuals? I feel that it really doesn’t matter where we were on the planet during COVID. Each of us experienced, whatever we experienced. And the question is, is, were we expecting some kind of benevolent government to know better, and help and support us? Or should we be more independent, and be able to look after ourselves? That’s a big questions and a loaded question as well. My feeling, my feeling is, a lot of people feel that they need to look after themselves better. Because if no one was looking after them during that period, what are they going to do when it happens again? Because at the end of the day, if we go back to the earlier days of the pandemic, there’s some people saying, well, we knew this was going to happen. Okay, it was inevitable. Yeah, the some kind of pandemic of this scale would happen. All right. And maybe the voices have gone silent, or they’ve been drowned in the noise of everything else that is going on in the world. That, okay, we told you so, we told you, it could happen. And it can also happen again, because we’ve really proven that it can happen. So how prepared are we, for the shock? Or the the new challenge of something similar but different happens again? Yeah, you know, how’s that, you know, how are we going to cope with it? So, going back to the business as unusual, so, how is business as unusual, which is the first in a trilogy is written from an owner an owner leader perspective of an organisation. So how can you make your your organisation more resilient to this kind of shock? You know if you were in the hospitality business, tourism business, you got pretty well beaten up during during COVID. There are certain industries which got absolutely flattened. So how can you be more resilient to that in the future? Now the other two books just so you know, that are in the series? The next one I’m I’m writing is the life as unusual, so I’m looking at the individual, you know how that that needs to change, how we view life needs to change. And it’s all of this, the next two books it’s all already in there in the first book, we’re just going into into more detail and taking a different perspective. Okay? Because on the life one, because you know people used to talk about work life balance, and too many hours at work your’e a workaholic, not spending enough time at home. And some people say it’s not a work life balance it’s a life work balance. I argue it’s neither. Balance is balance, balance is balance, you know, who said life and work are the two sides of the balance there, many aspects of the balance that need to be considered. And this is, I think, the the awakening that I sense has happened during the last few years, is people are reflecting on because they had nothing else better to do maybe, or they were forced to do it on what are they doing with their life? Yeah, so the fact that maybe you couldn’t go out, you couldn’t go for your walk, you couldn’t go down the beach, you couldn’t travel, you couldn’t do the things that you wanted to do. And that was taken away for you for a period of time. How important are those things to you? Some of them, you may realise that, oh, it was irrelevant. Others like ah, I really actually need that. Okay, now as those realisations happen, whether it’s what you do, when you’re not working, the past times, and the hobbies that you have, because you might have had to change them to something that is restricted to where you live, the four walls of where you live, rather than being able to go outside, if he had to go outside to do it. I think we’re having to reevaluate it, what the importance of these things are, because that’s for us as individuals. The other thing that happen, that is, is really acute, I find over the pandemic is relationships. Okay, so how was it? You know, I think what, I can’t remember what the statistic was in the US, but I think the number of divorces went through the roof. Okay, because you’re actually stuck with your partner or your family for a prolonged period of time in a restricted space. So in a lot of cases, it didn’t go so well. And in other cases, it went wonderfully. Okay. But another scenario could be, well, what if you were separated from your family? There are many people who have moved, they might have siblings, they might have parents, they may have their own kids in other countries, and they didn’t see them for a long period of time. Now, what does that do to the relationship? I mean, during COVID, I lost my wife for 10 months. You know some people might be going “Yeah, lucky you!” But she was medivacced in early sort of around March 2020. And then they close the borders in Vietnam, so she couldn’t return. Okay, so I had medivacced her to to a third country, which was Singapore. And she was on rehab, because it was a back operation, they were teaching her how to walk again. And, and so she was in the hotel across the road and just had to go in for to see the doctors and all of that to teach her stuff. And then, as things tightened in Singapore, they commandeered the hotel as a quarantine location and kicked her out of the hotel, to another hotel that happened three times. Also, since to learn how to walk again, they used to take her out outside to walk. They had to stop doing that she wasn’t allowed to go into the hospital because she, she’s an outpatient, she’s not allowed to do that. So she was stuck there for about four months before I managed to move her to her country of origin, which happens to be Switzerland. So she managed to get in there. So for it took me several months to get the right permits when they allow people with the right permits to return to Vietnam. So it took me 10 months to get her back. And my daughter was at University at the time, and yet another country. So for for a long period of time, I had my daughter and my wife in two other countries and I was here with my with my son. And by the time I connected my son and my daughter again, we’ve got got us all back in the same country. They hadn’t seen each other for two years. That’s pretty unusual. And I guess in that case, well, our whole idea of the relationship changes the whole idea. I mean, this Zoom. I remember we had a bunch of interns, because we’re big on internships. And our interns come from overseas. So we brought them over from overseas, and they will work in Ho Chi Minh City. And we used to take interns with a big cohort from Denmark. So we had about anything from about 10 to 15 of them at any point in time. And their government recalled them all. You know, they gave them advice, hey, come back home, come back to Denmark, okay. And they were arranging, like other governments, Australia did the same. You know, they’re arranging flights to bring their country people back home. And we did have some went and some didn’t. But going back to the, to the interns, in this period of time, where some of them moved back, and some of them didn’t, there were there were some quarantines as well, because some of them happened to have got COVID. So they’re put into quarantine. And, and we started doing these zoom calls, to check in on people on a regular basis. And the thing that really hammered it home into me is one day, one session we were having, an intern, turned around and said, these calls are my lifeline, do you realise you were the first people outside of quarantine, that I’ve spoken to this week. You know, it’s, you know, things that we can’t imagine, things that we might get from the history books, or, you know, our great great great grandma parents or whatever, who tell us them old stories of the hardships when they were young, things that that we would think would never ever happen to anyone we would ever know, in this day and age, especially in the more developed worlds that we live in, can actually happen to us.

Gene Tunny  46:57

Very true. Very true.

Rick Yvanovich  46:59

Things will remain unusual.

Gene Tunny  47:01

Yes, Rick. So that was the second book. So you said so your first is business as unusual, then life as unusual. What’s the third one going to be?

Rick Yvanovich  47:09

Work as unusual.

Gene Tunny  47:11

Work as unusual? Got it.

Rick Yvanovich  47:12

I’m leaving that to last because the jury’s out and I’m not really too sure where the dust will settle? Because it hasn’t settled yet. It really hasn’t settled yet.

Gene Tunny  47:21

Yeah, I agree with you on that. Now, before we wrap up, I’d just like to ask, What do you think of the key takeaways for organisations or for CEOs or, you know, managers reading business as unusual? What are you think of the major takeaways for them? Top two or three. Are you able to summarise it in that way, however many you think are the most important.

Rick Yvanovich  47:51

Yeah, I think it’s really around a core belief that I hold really dear, is, I believe that every one of us has the potential to be the architect of change. Now, we live by all these weird technological, and non technological transformations that are happening. And our task, our challenge is not just to keep up and exist, but to actively shape the path forward. Okay. And every single day, our actions, whether they’re big or small, shape our future, because our action is a choice we choose to do, or choose to not do. And therefore each one of us needs to remember, we are our own brand. And every single one of these choices, every single one of these decisions we make is part of the unique story that makes us human, that makes us us, or makes me me and makes youyou, okay, how we react, how we adapt, and how we innovate in the face of change will define not only your story, but your legacy. So that’s, that’s the background to it. So to reflect on the takeaways that I believe that are in the book, because the book is it gives you a framework. So you can shape your life in any way that you wish. But I give you a framework. And within that framework, you know, the framework uses the metaphor of a castle. And within the framework, I’m just hitting you with a shedload of tools. These are all the tools that I use myself. But a lot of the tools that I use are a synthesis and multiple other tools. So I just say here all the tools are a bunch of tools, you know, yeah, five tools, try them all and find out which one resonates. So going back to your original question, you know, I want people to remember that we’re not just a participant in today’s ever changing world, we’re the architect. And as architects, we are shaping the course of our own lives, our own careers, and the world around us. So I encourage all of us as individuals. And if you, you know, if you have more impact, like you’re the business owner or a business leader, I encourage you all to embrace the change, but define it, rather than just adapt to it. So be that catalyst in this in your own business as unusual world.

Gene Tunny  50:39

Yeah, absolutely. And, yeah, expect the unusual, I think I mean, that’s what I would be. I would be saying, Yeah, you’ve got to get across the new technology, so you don’t get left behind. You’ve got to stay as alert and as healthy and fit as possible to be able to make sure you’re, you can play the game as best you can. Yeah. Because I think you’re right. I mean, I think we are in this business as unusual world, just the extraordinary amount of change we’ve been seeing. It’s absolutely. Rick this has been great. Any final thoughts before we conclude?

Rick Yvanovich  51:18

Yeah, I, I, of course, encourage the people to go out, go out and get the book.

Gene Tunny  51:27

Absolutely I’ll put a link in the show notes. Yeah.

Rick Yvanovich  51:30

And, but more important to that is, you know, change transformation starts with each of us. As individuals, it’s, it’s ourselves that has to decide to change, or not, okay. And as we change, we transform because that’s what transformation is, that’s change, you can’t go back after you’ve changed and once the, once the caterpillar is a butterfly, it can’t become a caterpillar again, it has transformed, okay. And this is really important. And I think the journey is only beginning. So I’m really, really curious to hear about your journeys. So as as your listeners embrace this, they try it out. I really encourage them to, you know let Gene know, let me know, reach out to us. And tell us about your journey, because I’m sure they’re going to be absolutely fascinating.

Gene Tunny  52:21

Yeah, that’s, that’s good. That’s a good point recommend. I’d be interested. If you’re listening, and you’ve got thoughts on or how things have become unusual for you and how you’re responding that would be that would be very useful and yeah to the extent that you are that you have adjusted, you’re adapting then. Yes. And some thoughts on that would be great. So yeah, Rick, I think that’s a really good spot to conclude. And I’d like to thank you for, for your time for your, your thoughts on business as unusual. And for the book, which does Yeah, it. I think you’re onto something here with business as unusual. And you’ve got some good, good tips and good tricks, good bits of advice in that that book. So good work on that. And I think yeah, I think the idea of doing a trilogy is terrific. And yeah, I learned a lot from the conversation, learned about your experience in Vietnam, during the pandemic, and just how disruptive that was. And also, that’s the info about Google and AI with the flights and reducing the greenhouse gas emissions. I’ll find that online and I’ll put a link in the show notes below. That was really, really neat. So, again, Rick Yvanovich, thanks so much for your time. I really enjoyed the conversation.

Rick Yvanovich  53:42

Gene thank you, too. I’d like to express my gratitude for for allowing me on your podcast today. It’s it’s been a fascinating conversation, some great questions. I hope our listeners have enjoyed it as much as I have. And to all your listeners, all our listeners, I really appreciate your time and attention. And just like Gene, I look forward to hearing from some of you from learning from your experience, and perhaps giving us the opportunity to share more in depth future discussions. Thank you again, Gene, and to all our listeners for this wonderful exchange. Until next time, goodbye

Gene Tunny  54:22

Righto thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com Or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

55:09

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey, head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Categories
Podcast episode

How to improve housing affordability and why the Greedflation thesis is wrong w/ Simon Cowan, CIS – EP203

Host Gene Tunny and Simon Cowan from the Centre for Independent Studies discuss housing affordability and greedflation in the CIS’s Sydney HQ. They delve into recent articles written by Simon on these topics and explore the factors contributing to unaffordable housing (e.g. zoning and other supply restrictions) and why the greedflation thesis is wrong. 

Please get in touch with any questions, comments and suggestions by emailing us at contact@economicsexplored.com or sending a voice message via https://www.speakpipe.com/economicsexplored

You can listen to the episode via the embedded player below or via podcasting apps including Google PodcastsApple Podcasts and Spotify.

About this episode’s guest: Simon Cowan

Simon Cowan is Research Director at the CIS. He is a leading commentator on policy and politics, with a regular column in the Canberra Times newspaper, frequent interviews on Sky and the ABC, and multiple appearances before parliamentary committees discussing the budget, citizenship, taxation and health policy. He has written extensively on government spending and fiscal policy, with a specific focus on welfare and superannuation policy. He earlier work focused on government industry policy, defence and regulation.

His latest work includes Attitudes to a post-Covid Australia and Millennials and Super: the case for voluntary superannuation. Some of his other works include a co-authored report on pensions, a deep dive into the Universal Basic Income, and a 2012 piece arguing that Australia should acquire nuclear submarines from the Americans.

What’s covered in EP203

  • The problem with housing affordability. (4:56)
  • High property prices and housing affordability. (10:02)
  • Should we cap migration to improve housing affordability? (14:24)
  • The role of public/social housing. (19:12)
  • Shared equity schemes. (24:15)
  • Home ownership as a key milestone on the way to retirement. (29:09)
  • Local government regulations and housing affordability. (35:06)
  • The Greedflation hypothesis and why it’s wrong. (39:04)

Links relevant to the conversation

Simon’s Canberra Times articles on housing affordability and greedflation:

The Coalition can create generational voting change by tackling housing affordability – The Centre for Independent Studies 

‘Greedflation’ myth hides real causes of inflation – The Centre for Independent Studies 

Images from the Bill Leak room including a poem from Sir Les Patterson (i.e. Barry Humphries):

Sir Les with Bill Leak.jpg 

Sir Les’s poem about Bill Leak part 1.jpg 

Sir Les’s poem about Bill Leak part 2.jpg 

Past Economics Explored episode discussing wage-price spiral mentioned by Gene:

https://economicsexplored.com/2022/06/14/stagflation-be-alert-not-alarmed-ep143-transcript/

Transcript of Q&A session following Phil Lowe’s speech in Brisbane in July 2023 during which Gene asked the RBA Governor about Greedflation:

https://www.rba.gov.au/speeches/2023/sp-gov-2023-07-12-q-and-a-transcript.html

Transcript: How to improve housing affordability and why the Greedflation thesis is wrong w/ Simon Cowan, CIS – EP203

N.B. This is a lightly edited version of a transcript originally created using the AI application otter.ai. This was then looked at by a human, Tim Hughes from Adept Economics, to pick up the bits otters might have misheard. It may not be 100 percent accurate, but should be pretty close. If you’d like to quote from it, please check the quoted segment in the recording.

Gene Tunny  00:06

Welcome to the Economics Explored podcast, a frank and fearless exploration of important economic issues. I’m your host Gene Tunny. I’m a professional economist and former Australian Treasury official. The aim of this show is to help you better understand the big economic issues affecting all our lives. We do this by considering the theory, evidence and by hearing a wide range of views. I’m delighted that you can join me for this episode, please check out the show notes for relevant information. Now on to the show.

Thanks for tuning into the show. Today, I have the pleasure of catching up with my colleague at the Centre for Independent Studies, Simon Cowan. We’re in the CIS offices on Macquarie Street in Sydney. And we’re going to be chatting about some recent work that Simon’s done on housing affordability and greedflation, Simon, so good to catch up with you.

Simon Cowan  01:06

Yeah. Welcome to the Bill Leak Room here at the CIS, our little office here in Macquarie Street. It’s fantastic to have you here in our facilities with our totally real plants and our wall of photos.

Gene Tunny  01:19

Yeah, well, it’s great this room. So Bill Leak was a famous Australian cartoonist, and there’s a there’s actually a poem about Bill Leak from Les Patterson, one of Barry Humphries characters. Yeah, just it’s terrific. So I might put a link in the show notes. I’ll make sure I take a photo of that before I go. But yes, Simon, you’ve written some great pieces recently, they were both published in Canberra Times on housing affordability and greedflation both topical issues and I thought I’d be good if we could chat about those.

Simon Cowan 01:40

Yeah, for sure.

Gene Tunny 01:43

Your piece on housing affordability was in the Canberra Times on third of July 2023. “The Coalition can create generational voting change by tackling housing affordability.” I’d like to start off by asking you about the context of that piece because CIS Centre for Independent Studies, it’s a non-partisan Think Tank. The way it’s pitched, it’s pitched as how the Coalition can create generational voting change. Now I know this is this relates to some recent research. Could you tell us a bit about the context of that piece, please?

Simon Cowan  02:29

Yeah, sure. So one of my other colleagues, a man by the name of Matt Taylor who’s actually working out of our Canberra facilities, we’re stretching our tentacles across the country with Brisbane and Canberra and Sydney. He did some work that looked at the prevalence of centre right voting patterns amongst younger people, in particular, millennials and Gen Z. And right. And now in Australian politics, the Coalition vote is a proxy for for the centre right. And, you know, to the extent that the Coalition embodies what you might describe as classical Liberal values and policies, then they’re, you know a proxy of some sorts for classical Liberal voting patterns amongst younger people. And the concern that we had as an organisation and I think it’s been heightened by Matt’s research, is that it’s not just that we’re seeing, you know, that traditional voting pattern of younger voters voting left and older voters voting, right, but that each generation that comes into the electorate is more likely to vote for left wing parties, so not just Labour, but increasingly, the Greens. And for Gen Z, in particular, what we’re seeing is, they’re actually moving further left, compared to the average voter as they get older, which is an unusual pattern, both in Australia and globally. So millennials are moving to the right, they’re doing so at a much slower rate than previous generations. They’re starting from further left, Gen Z started from way further left than the millennials and are becoming more left wing. So the end result of this is that we’re seeing a roughly 65% of that younger cohort is voting for left wing parties, roughly equally Labour and the Greens and that the centre right is attracting for Gen Z in particular, as little as sort of 10% of the vote. Now, our issue isn’t so much for the Coalition’s political fortunes, I’m sure that that’s a concern for them. But for us, it’s to the extent that the Coalition is more likely to implement classical Liberal reforms than the Labour Party, which I think is a reasonable deduction. To the extent that’s true. The fact that young people have no interest in centre right politics and therefore classical Liberal ideas is a real concern of ours.

Gene Tunny  04:56

Okay. So is part of the reason that Gen Z has these left wing views to the extent they do, is that related in part to this issue of housing affordability, the fact that younger people aren’t able to purchase their own homes, to the same extent that previous generations, particularly baby boomers, and to a lesser extent, Gen. Gen X, were able to, is that part of the story?

Simon Cowan  05:24

I think that’s a very big part of the story and Matt’s now working on some more research that will look into that issue more, more specifically around what the actual triggers of that, that are. But I think there’s definitely a problem with millennials and Gen Z, in particular, around housing affordability. The issue isn’t just, and this is, it’s a very important issue. It’s not just that they can’t afford to buy a home, it’s that the prospects of them ever being able to afford to buy a home, and ever being able to move out of that cycle that that sort of rental cycles seems very remote to them. So, you know, they’re not just moving into the market later than their parents, for example, there’s a real fear amongst Gen Z in particular, that they won’t ever get into that point, that they’ll be basically trapped as renters for the rest of their lives. And a number of people have sort of made this observation in the past. If you’ve got nothing to conserve, there’s no reason to vote conservative.

Gene Tunny  06:19

Yeah. And what do you think of that concern Simon, do you think that’s a legitimate concern on their part?

Simon Cowan  06:23

I think in part, it certainly is. There are some people who will be rentals forever, probably more so than was true in previous generations. I mean, if you look at the sort of Baby Boomer and then the previous generation to them as well, almost 95% of that generation ended up buying home at some point during their their lifecycle, once you get into retirement, you see that almost everyone, there’s sort of a core of 10 to 15% of people who who don’t own a home, in retirement, most of the current cycle of retirees own their home, the vast majority of them own it without a mortgage. So far the trend is increasingly people coming into retirement with mortgages, rather than having paid off that during their working life, I think we’ll also see, though, a generation of people, a larger percentage of them will be renting for far longer. And the issue there is, at least in part around the enormous difficulty of saving enough money to get into that first rung of the housing market. And also, you know, those affordable entry level houses are now, so much further away from the CBD of the city, that if you’re someone who works in, you know, if you’re working in the city, it’s very difficult for you to have a young family and commute from two and a half hours away each day. And that option, like if you’re gonna buy a home, you have to, you know, you’re now looking at that two hour commute each way, that becomes a very difficult prospect for a lot of people.

Gene Tunny  07:53

So you’re talking about in Sydney, there’ll be people who are doing that in Sydney.

Simon Cowan  07:57

Yeah, absolutely, so if you go back a couple generations a long commute was was sort of from what is now the sort of almost not necessarily the inner ring of suburbs, but there was a sort of middle density ring of suburbs around, you know, the Canterburys, the Bankstowns, etc, that were all, you know, still 30 or 40 minutes commute from the city, but the prices in those suburbs are now well beyond the entry level, you’ve got to go another 20 kilometres from the CBD before you start to get to places where people can afford to buy houses in that entry level of, you know, even as far as sort of Blacktown and places like that you’re seeing median house price is well over a million dollars. So that becomes very difficult and you end up with a situation like we’ve seen in London, for example and other places, too, as far as I’m aware, people who do essential jobs that are not particularly well paid, you know, your teachers and your nurses in inner city areas can’t afford to live within commuting distance of the places where they work. And that then becomes a real problem for society. If you can’t get teachers for your school, because they can’t live within two hours of your school, you’ve got no teachers.

Gene Tunny  09:10

Yeah, this is the key worker problem isn’t it that they talk about, you know, the key workers can’t find affordable places to live…

Simon Cowan  09:18

There’s always a slight risk that some of this is overstated, right? It’s not it’s not an absolute catastrophe. But things have changed enough that it’s having a significant impact on voting patterns and that’s probably where we’re at now. If things continue to get worse, if the trends that we’re seeing of you know, systemic underdevelopment, particularly in the parts of Sydney where people want to live. If those trends continue, then things will definitely get far worse. Right now we’ve got a problem, not a catastrophe. But there’s a real problem and it’s not yet clear to me that particularly the centre right, there’s been a sufficient level of engagement with this problem, that they’re willing to look at solutions that might actually work.

Gene Tunny  10:02

Okay, okay. Australia does have high property prices relative to median income, we must be one of the highest in the world are we are, you know, particularly for Sydney and Melbourne that I’ve seen some of those ratios, I might dig them up and put them in the show notes. But yeah…

Simon Cowan  10:19

Yeah we’re top, so regularly, so Sydney, Melbourne in particular have been regularly in the top 10 least affordable cities in the world, at various points other Australian cities have snuck in there. So I think at one point, Perth managed to make its way in at the height of the mining boom that it was, you know, one of the most unaffordable cities, so New Zealand has a similar problem, as well, around that, that issue of affordability comparable to us. And then I mean, you’ve got a lot of American cities, and then your Tokyos and Londons as well.

Gene Tunny  10:49

Yeah. But what’s extraordinary is like, based on what you were just saying then, it’s not just, you know, there are some exclusive suburbs in Sydney here say out at Double Bay or out in the Eastern suburbs, and you’ve got places worth 10s of millions of dollars, but this is, you’re paying a lot of money just for property in, in what was traditionally a working class area. I mean, over a million dollars, whatever your…

Simon Cowan  11:12

Yeah, absolutely and places like you know, the Northern Beaches, suburbs, which are a fair way from Sydney. And, and we’re never I mean, they’re not they weren’t poor areas, by any means, right. But they weren’t, they weren’t the areas that the elite and rich of Sydney lived in. But now, many of the homes in that area are way outside the price range for a young family, particularly if you’re in a situation where one of your partners isn’t able to work full time. Or if someone’s in a job where you know, they’re not in a professional capacity and being paid six figure salary, it’s really hard for them. And the thing that becomes even harder, it’s largely about getting over that that initial hurdle of having to save, you know, you need 20% deposit for a million dollar home, you got to save $200,000 of after tax income. When you know we’ve got cost of living spiralling out of control at the moment, we’ve got, you know, 11% of your income’s being diverted into retirement savings. And you’ve got to somehow find $200,000 plus of post tax income. It’s yeah, I mean, it’s a real challenge.

Gene Tunny  12:13

Yeah, yeah. And what do you think’s caused this housing affordability problem we have in Australia Simon?

Simon Cowan  12:19

So the evidence on this is actually really clear, despite the fact that a lot of people really didn’t want to accept that this was true. It is abundantly clear from the work that my colleague Peter Tulip, and others have done that the issue is overwhelmingly restrictions on supply. So people want to say that it’s about demand, it’s about immigrants, it’s about negative gearing, capital gains, they have very minor impacts on price what’s having by far the biggest impact on price is the restrictions on bringing new properties to market, on redeveloping existing properties, it’s zoning and taxes and government restrictions that are aimed to stop people developing, and in Sydney, in particular, and a number of suburbs around the city. But also on the major arterial train lines, you’ve got councils that are simply refusing to allow development. And my colleague has highlighted some of them have massively undershot housing targets. But we see time and time again, things like heritage restrictions and zoning restrictions. And, and you know, even you can’t build high density housing around train lines. If you can’t build high density train on train lines, where are you going to build it? And the answer is, well, for them, at least build it way out in Western Sydney, don’t put it anywhere near where I live. And that attitude is pervasive in the eastern suburbs, in inner West and where I’m currently based in the North Shore, some of the councils out there are actively and very hostile to development of any kind.

Gene Tunny  13:52

Right. Okay. On immigration, do you think that what doesn’t have a major impact on housing affordability? Because that’s one of the things that people are concerned about, because we’ve had a record level of net overseas migration in Australia of 400,000. And there are concerns that, like, it’s just, we should be slowing that down while we let the housing stock catch up, on infrastructure catch up. Do you have any thoughts on that level of immigration we have at the moment?

Simon Cowan  14:24

Yes so my take on this, and I’ll be the first to admit there is, there are differing views on classical liberal amounts of immigration, but for me, personally, I would have almost uncapped skilled migration, I would be happy to take as many skilled migrants as we can get, because I think the economic benefits of skilled migration outweigh the costs. Now, the flip side of that is that we have to provide sufficient infrastructure and build sufficient houses to have those people, give those people somewhere to live. But I think you go, you’ve got it completely backwards if your approach is we’re going to stop migration because we can’t build fast enough when we could build faster, the roadblock, the handbrake on house prices is coming from that refusal to allow development, trying to take some of the pressure off so that councils don’t have to fix their obvious contribution to this seems like just the wrong way to go about it to me, I’d rather have more great migrants and way more housing, and I think you can do it that way. And the economic benefits of doing that way outweigh the costs of it. One of my other colleagues a few years ago, did some work around the sort of, what are the outcomes for skilled migrants in Australia? On average skilled migrants are they earn a slightly higher income, they pay higher taxes, they’re more likely to own a home, they’re more likely to be married, they’re more likely to have kids than the average person. So there’s a there’s a benefit to society beyond just the economic benefit of having more skilled migrants. There’s an issue around housing supply, I would fix the issue around housing supply rather than trying to create alternatives to remove some of that pressure.

Gene Tunny  16:02

Yeah, gotcha. Okay. In your article in the Canberra Times, you wrote that Labour’s signature housing affordability policies have huge problems. So Labour being the federal Labour government led by Anthony Albanese, the Prime Minister, first locking future generations into renting their homes from union-controlled super funds. What’s going on there, Simon? What’s, how to, how would the labour government’s policies lead to that outcome? And what’s the, what’s your concern there?

Simon Cowan  16:40

Yeah, so for long time, Labour was convinced that the issue was, was greedy landlords and negative gearing and capital gains. And Gene, you did some fantastic work for us on that issue, in fact, I think you did a an analysis, not necessarily for CIS, but previously that looked at the impact that those capital gains and negative gearing policies had on housing affordability and found it was what like 4%, almost nothing. Yeah. So for a long time, Labour believed that that was the issue, and then started to come around to thinking about this as a supply side problem. But the solutions that they have, they have two main supply side initiatives. And there’s been some more movement more recently. So this is at least as positive, but their main initiatives were: one they were going to encourage institutional superannuation investors to build residential properties for rent. So that meant in practice, I think it meant that they would incentivize the large super funds, which are overwhelmingly controlled, they’re overwhelmingly industry super funds, which have a 50% union 50% Business control. But overwhelmingly, those funds would be then encouraged, incentivized, to invest in and build rental properties for lease. And the other policy was around building a whole bunch more public and social housing. So rather than allowing, having, they’ve identified the right market block, but instead of removing that block and allowing the market to function, their solution is how do we use government incentives and government money to build additional supply? It just seems extraordinary to me that you would create a situation where individuals couldn’t use their own superannuation money to build their own home, but their super fund could use their super money to build a home for them to rent. And that just I mean, one of the reasons why this policy, I think, has been dis-emphasised by Labour is that there’s almost no one who actually wants that outcome. Super funds don’t want to do it, because they’re seeing the the noises around rent controls and increasing tenant rights and think this is a bad investment for my Super fund. And people are like, well why would I want to rent from my super fund with my money? Why can’t I just use my money to buy my own home? So I think that that policy has just got so many flaws to it, that even Labour’s now started to sort of move away from that.

Gene Tunny  19:07

Ok so they’ve moved away from that, but they’ve, they’re investing more in social housing and it sounds like well, reading your article, you’ve got concerns about social housing as the solution, would you be able to go into that please?

Simon Cowan  19:21

Yeah, you’re gonna get me started on talking about social housing. So look, there is a role for public and social housing, but it’s not the role that the government keeps pushing for it, right. So social housing is very important for people who are temporarily homeless, particularly people say who are fleeing domestic violence, they need emergency accommodation in the short term, and they don’t necessarily have access to funds that would allow them to rent a property go through, you know, the hoops that you need to go through to get a rental property. So you’ve got, you know, people who are in, fleeing violence you’ve got people say, who have, you know, sort of sickness or mental illness issues that need accommodation, you’ve got disability support accommodation, those, those are completely appropriate uses of social and public housing. Now, the difference between social and public housing, public housing is government funded social housing is funded by not for profits. What the government is talking about, though, is providing long term government funded accommodation to people. Basically, along the sort of a line you’re seeing in Britain, where you have a council house for decades, and that’s your home and you don’t own it, you are given it by the government. The problem with that is that it’s a terribly inefficient way of providing support for people who need rental accommodation and are on low income. So when you compare, providing a government house to providing, say, rent assistance through Social Security, it’s way more efficient to provide social security. And it’s way more equitable. Because what you have with government housing, as we have here, there’s a 10 year waiting list. And often, people don’t move on that waiting list at all. So you have people who get they spend years on a waiting list, waiting for free housing, they’re disincentivized to take actions that would get them off that list, especially if they’ve got to the top because if they go back on the list, they go at the bottom, you have people who are living in these public houses who are disincentivized, from getting out of public housing, because if they again, if they you know, they take a job that makes them eligible for public housing, and they lose that job in six months, they go to the bottom of the 10 year waiting list. So and then you also have the the way that rent is structured in public housing, where it’s a percentage of income rather than a fixed amount. So the more money you earn, it’s an effective marginal tax rate of 25%, you lose 25 cents of each dollar extra dollar you earn to your public house rent, rather than the rent being a certain fixed amount a month.

Gene Tunny  21:59

I did not know that. Is that how they do it in New South Wales?

Simon Cowan 22:02

Yeah, yeah, well look I…

Gene Tunny 22:03

I’ll have to check what they do in Queensland, other states…

Simon Cowan  22:06

Social housing again I mean it’s all different, but one of our recommendations, we looked at this when they were putting up the last sort of big round of public housing. And one of the things is that, and it’s designed to make it more affordable, it’s 20% of whatever 25% of whatever your income is. So if you’re on, you know, if you’re on Newstart, then 25% of that’s very low. But the problem is when you then start working and earning money, you’ve got an another marginal tax rate from your accommodation.

Gene Tunny  22:32

Yeah. And without, I don’t want to stig, stigmatise or be critical of anyone who’s who’s living in social housing, but because, you know, obviously, there are people are doing it tough and they’re trying to do the best they can. There are a lot of social problems with social housing is that right?

Simon Cowan  22:49

Yeah especially in the, and again, this has experienced the United Kingdom in particular, that social housing estates, particularly where a lot of public housing is clustered together, you tend to find a lot of antisocial behaviour, you find a lot of other problems, there’s a higher rate of crime. And so what you have is a situation where it’s not particularly pleasant for, for people living in social housing but it’s also, you know, a big disincentive for people to live near social housing. And then you have the effect where if there is a cluster of public housing in a particular place that affects property values that people who live around that by so no one wants, public housing, especially not clusters of public housing, anywhere in their suburb. Yet again, you know, we have this disincentive for development, people want the public housing somewhere else. And then in Sydney, we had a particular issue where, and this is largely a legacy issue, we had public housing that was worth just an extraordinary amount of money by virtue of where it was, you know, in The Rocks, which it’s in the, right in the centre of Sydney with views of the harbour. There’s public housing that had been there for 100 and something years, and each of those houses was worth millions of dollars. So you know, you had this this issue of well, do we, we’re giving away this public housing to someone for basically no money, why don’t we sell their public housing and build, you know, a lot more with with the money that it came from? So you’ve got a whole bunch of problems. I mean, fundamentally, I think the issue with this is if, if the issue that you’re looking at is housing affordability, rather than the need for temporary accommodation or something else, if the issue is housing affordability, you’re always going to be better off allowing the market to develop property than trying to do it by government. And there’s, and there’s a filtering effect of adding supply at any point in the market reduces prices of at every point in the market. Because if you think about this logically, even if you put the supply right at the very top end, the people who are buying those $10 million apartments are selling their $8 million apartments and the the effect of that sort of filters down all the way through the market, so adding supply anywhere, increases supply everywhere.

Gene Tunny  25:06

Okay, we’ll take a short break here for a word from our sponsor.

Female speaker  25:11

If you need to crunch the numbers, then get in touch with Adept Economics. We offer you frank and fearless economic analysis and advice. We can help you with funding submissions, cost-benefit analysis studies, and economic modelling of all sorts. Our head office is in Brisbane, Australia, but we work all over the world. You can get in touch via our website, http://www.adepteconomics.com.au. We’d love to hear from you.

Gene Tunny  25:41

Now back to the show.

And what about this this idea of Shared Equity? Labour or the government has a scheme a Shared Equity scheme, there’s concerns about how wide a coverage it is? I mean, it seems like small numbers relative to the total, total need out there. But what do you think of these Shared Equity schemes where the government effectively owns part of your property don’t they? Would you be able to take us through that, please?

Simon Cowan  26:09

Yeah so, there’s a I mean, so part of the problem with a lot of these schemes is that they’re designed to be so small, they can’t have an impact in the sort of aggregate level, because the number of caps are limited. And whenever you see a government policy like this, and it’s, it’s limited to a small number of people, you know, that it’s not a good deal for the taxpayers as a general rule. But so you do have that situation where the government would, in some instances, it’d be providing a portion of the deposit. So that the individual who meets a certain criteria jumps through the right hoops in order to be eligible for the scheme can can apply for a loan and basically buy a property with as little as sort of 5% equity. Shared Equity schemes don’t have a fantastic hit track record in Australia. And it’s not so much around the issue of the deposits. But one of the things that we looked at at the other end of the market was was how you could get into equity release schemes for pensioners. So you’ve got an issue with a percentage about sort of one in five people in the age pension are very, very cash poor and very, very asset rich, and most of them, the main asset they have is property. So when we looked at this 5% or so of people who were on the full rate of the aged pension had more than one and a half million dollars in home equity. But what they didn’t have was an ability to release any of that equity in order to fund their lifestyle. So my interest in in Shared Equity comes much more. And again, there’s, there’s a much bigger tradition of this in the UK, where banks and financial institutions will take over a portion of equity for your home and use that to provide an income or a lump sum to people. So it’s not that Shared Equity itself is a bad idea, where it becomes a bad idea where you’ve got government effectively taking the risk for marginal borrowers. And, you know, people who can’t actually afford to borrow the loans that they’re taking, not just they can’t afford the deposit, but they can’t actually afford the loan. And what we saw in America in the lead up to the financial crisis was exactly these sorts of schemes, schemes where the government tried to manipulate the criteria for eligibility for home loans to effectively give a certain group of people a greater chance of buying a home. And the end result of any of that sort of manipulation around loans was the potential for government to bear, the government to bear losses in relation to home equity. So, you know, it’s a small scheme, it won’t have a big impact for that reason, but it does expose the government to risk of default, which seems like a bad way of doing things.

Gene Tunny  28:52

One thing I should ask Simon is, we’re presuming that the ideal is that people end up in their own home by the time that they’ve retired, would you be able to expand on why that is such an important thing? Or why that’s such a desirable policy goal, please?

Simon Cowan  29:09

Yeah, sure. I’d bring it forward in time. I actually think that, you know, there’s some sort of key milestones in people’s lives, you get married, and then you have kids and buying a home’s one of those milestones and ideally, you know, the ideal situation, I think, is you want to be having that in the middle of those two things. So you know, you you get married and you buy a home together and you have kids and you raise kids in your own home. And that’s sort of the sort of model of of family life that was exceptionally prevalent in Australia and I think it’s, it’s one of those sort of, again, you know, talk about conservatives and for a second, but you know, when you’re, you’re married with kids in your own home, you’ve got something to conserve, you’ve got a stake in society, you’ve got, you know, roots and values there. From a retirement perspective, though, it’s, it’s even more important because Australia’s retirements system was built around a couple of specific ideas. And so one of those is voluntary savings, which is or involuntary savings, superannuation, but another, another one is the age pension, obviously government funded income. But the biggest one in Australia in particular was around the idea that you would own your own home. So the Australian retirement system is actually modelled around people owning a home in retirement without a mortgage. And that takes care of a lot of their basic needs. And what we’ve seen consistently and you know, what we see now in particular, the group of people who are struggling the most in retirement, are overwhelmingly people who don’t have voluntary savings, they don’t have any superannuation left, but they also don’t own their home. And they’re the people who are most risk of genuine poverty in retirement, it’s if you don’t own your home, and you’re dependent on the age pension, and you’re renting in old age, overwhelmingly, that’s a group of people who are right at the bottom in terms of income and living standards. And so, you know, whatever our retirement system is built around this idea that you’re going to own your own home in retirement and own it without a mortgage, then the system has to actually facilitate people being able to do that. And right now we’re starting to see that disconnect happening. More and more people are entering retirement with mortgages. Over time, you’ll see more and more people entering retirement who don’t have a home at all.

Gene Tunny  31:22

Yeah. And what’s really worrying is you’ve got all of these people who are then at risk of homelessness. And you know, people living living in cars or worst case…

Simon Cowan  31:34

Yeah, so one of the biggest, one of the biggest demographics of homelessness, and aside from, and this is sort of the broader definition of homelessness, right like because the the you think traditionally people who live on the streets, are far more likely to be sort of middle aged men, but one of the biggest groups of the biggest demographics of homelessness is actually older single women. And overwhelmingly, that’s the issue. It’s really, you know, they’re dependent on unemployment benefits or pensions, but they don’t own a home. They may have been married, their husbands died, they don’t own their home, they’ve got no income. That’s the group that’s most at risk of poverty and homelessness, was one of them at least. And it’s a big issue.

Gene Tunny  32:12

Yeah, yeah. Okay. What about tapping into your own Super? I think you were alluding to this before. What are your thoughts on that, Simon?

Simon Cowan  32:21

So one of my colleagues that sort of looks at that issue, and his view is that what you should use super for is guaranteeing a loan, rather than necessarily being able to tap into it. One of the issues with allowing people to take money from Super is that it is effectively just increasing demand. So you do have a, you do have a slight demographic shift, in terms of who is able to buy properties, if you can, you know, you can withdraw from Super to buy your own home, but you can’t withdraw from Super for an investment property, you do slightly shift who owns property at that point, just in terms of the simple should you be able to take money on your super to buy own home? Yes, because it’s your money. It’s your money, it’s your savings, you’d be better off in retirement, if you could do it, will it solve the problem that it’s trying to solve? Probably not without something else attached to it. And that really has to be around sort of that supply side reform. And, and it doesn’t have to be, I mean talk about supply side reform, it doesn’t have to be the cratering of house prices, what it needs to be is more flexibility in what people can do with their own property. And when you increase flexibility for owners, and you increase flexibility for people who want to buy, you have a more dynamic and more effective and more efficient market, and that’s better for everyone. It’s not just the case that one group has to win and one group has to lose.

Gene Tunny  33:43

Yeah. Now with, with what the federal government is proposing to do is one positive thing that they’re proposing around targets for, or they’re trying to incentivize the states to encourage development, is that, am I geting that right?

Simon Cowan  33:59

Yes, so this is one of our recommendations, it’s been picked up. And it’s it’s got a, you know, it’s a policy tradition that’s been around for a long time, which is the federal government has all the money, but not necessarily all the levers. So they incentivize states to make good policy by, you know, giving them either withholding grants from them, if they don’t do the right thing, or giving them extra money, if they do, and in this instance, they’re talking about, you know, states that meet housing targets should be able to access additional government money. And that makes sense, right? If you’re building more houses, more money for infrastructure is probably right. But if there’s a challenge, it’s that a lot of the levers and the need for incentive isn’t even necessarily at the state government level. It’s actually the local government level. And so, you know, we’ve seen a number of states, I think, both in Victoria and New South Wales that appreciate the issue around supply and housing affordability, but they’ve been unwilling to impose the requirements on local government level, where all the incentives work the other way. So, we think it’s a good policy. We think it’s something that we’ve recommended, but it won’t be as straightforward perhaps as it seems.

Gene Tunny  35:06

Yeah, you’re right about that. I mean, a lot of the problems are at that local government level. So in Queensland where I’m from, some of the places where we’ve been able to get the high density, where we’ve been able to get more people in, it’s, it’s areas that the state government zone priority development areas, so formerly light industrial areas around West End or, or Newstead so the state government’s been trying to do its best but the Brisbane City Council goes and bans town, townhouses in you know, a lot of suburbs, there’s all these character, all these character protection, and anytime someone…

Simon Cowan  35:39

Yeah, well heritage is increasingly become, basically an anti development scam, unfortunately. And you can look on Twitter and you can find fantastic examples of things that are heritage listed. Like there was a, there’s a heritage listed electrical substations and heritage listed broken fences, and it’s like, rusting machinery, heritage listed car parks, I mean, there’s not actually any historical value in a lot of this stuff. What it is, though, it’s a valuable as a foil or as a stop to development.

Gene Tunny  36:11

And it seems to be a lot of grounds for people to oppose developments, whether it’s, ah there’s, there won’t be enough car parking, there won’t, you know, it’ll affect local traffic and there’s all sorts of grounds for objection. So yeah, absolutely. agree there.

Simon Cowan  36:24

I tell you what’s interesting, just to leave this point, I think is in New Zealand, what we saw was that they basically changed the zoning rules that allowed you to have medium density as a right, so that you didn’t actually need Council permission to go up to sort of three or four storeys from, from a freestanding dwelling. And that resulted in a massive increase in, in the sort of developments that would be allowed that council used to say no to, and a reduction in relative prices in Auckland compared to Christchurch and elsewhere. I am reliably informed, however, that, that initiatives towards housing affordability in New Zealand are now trending in the other way, in the same way they are here, unfortunately. But it was a really good example of a sort of natural experiment. What happens if you change the zoning rules? So it turns out more supply, lower prices.

Gene Tunny  37:11

Okay, yeah. But I’d be mean to have a closer look at that. Because I know there are some, there’s a bit of debate about those data, but I’m just not familiar with them enough. But I want to come back to that. I’ve read about that in the past and mentioned it. I just know that the like everything there ends up being a debate on it. But I agree. I think that would be what I expected. If they did that. I would expect to see that. And if it didn’t happen, then something else must have happened to have stopped that. I guess Simon I think we’ve had a great chat about your article on housing affordability. Was there anything else in that article or any other thoughts you had on housing affordable?

Simon Cowan  37:49

I’ve got a lot of thoughts on housing affordability, but, but I have a lot of thoughts on a lot of things.

Gene Tunny  37:54

Okay, well, maybe I’ll ask you, in the last 10 minutes or so about greedflation.

Simon Cowan

Yes greedflation!

Gene Tunny

So yeah, this became, you know, this has been topical because of our friends at The Australia Institute have been very prominent promoting this view that inflation is due to greedy corporations. And I ended up asking Phil Lowe, about this, I asked our Reserve Bank governor about this at the lunch he he spoke at in Brisbane, and I asked, well, what’s your, what are your thoughts on this? And, and Phil Lowe said, well we looked at it and we don’t really think it’s a it’s really a reasonable hypothesis. And you’ve written something similar, or two, on greedflation, you’ve, you’ve said if, well, this is in an article in Canberra Times 12th of August 2023, “Greedflation myth hides real causes of inflation.” So Simon, could I ask you, what are those real causes and why do you think this greedflation hypothesis, it’s a myth?

Simon Cowan  39:00

Yeah sure, so let’s, let’s start with what greedflation is. Greedflation is the idea that the cause of our current cost of living crisis across the western world, is that corporations, collectively, and spontaneously decided to increase profit margins, and take additional money from, from consumers somehow. You know, the best explanation that I’ve seen for this, the best explanation, the only actual causality that I’ve ever seen someone try and say is, oh, there was supply side shocks as a result of the pandemic and that gave companies the ability to change the prices and so they push the prices up massively. Now, internally, I don’t think that’s actually consistent as an argument because if, support, if the cost of supply went up, then profit margins would go down, not up. But I don’t think any of this is actually about what causes inflation because what caused the bout of inflation is actually really clear. During the pandemic, particularly during 2021, across the western world, governments and central banks massively over stimulated the economy. In Australia, we saw an enormous increase in government spending in the tune of hundreds of billions of dollars, we saw a massive stimulus from the RBI in terms of basically creating money, we saw that across the western world, huge deficits, massive stimulus. Now, in 2020, you could argue that that stimulus was needed. And there was this significant shock as a result of the pandemic and significant uncertainty. By the second half of 2021, though, we had most of those variables under control, and governments kept spending and Reserve Banks kept printing money. And the result of that, as it has been, every time this has happened across history, was a massive surge in demand and as a result of that a surge in inflation. Now, the idea of greedflation, greedflation is actually measuring a real thing, there was an uptick in corporate profits, that came from, it wasn’t the cause of, it came from that stimulus, that massive increase in demand. It’s a simple supply and demand issue. There was a massive stimulus in demand, supply is limited to a certain extent, maximum capacity of the economy is certain amount once you go past that, it’s inflation, and that’s what happened. That’s what happened in Australia and Britain and America and Europe, over that period of time, massive increase in demand. And the reason why, you know it’s an increase in demand, and not an increase in costs of supply, is the corporate profits went up. And what we’ve seen in recent times is corporate profits have gone down, as inflation has come down. Why? Because across the western world, governments have been tightening budgets and reserve banks have been increasing interest rates, in other words, reducing demand.

Gene Tunny  41:58

Yeah, yeah. I think that’s, that’s, yeah that’s good. Simon. I mean, I, I largely agree. And I think when I looked at this in a previous episode, I, I talked about a study from Chris Murphy. So Chris, has done modelling of this and he came to that view that it’s because of the huge stimulus…

Simon Cowan  42:18

Yeah I think he predicted it was sort of six or 7% inflation and got pretty close to where it actually landed in Australia for that survey looked pretty good. But I mean, the bigger picture issue here, there’s two really important points coming from this greedflation thing. One of the reasons why the greedflation hypothesis is is so popular or being pushed so hard, is connected to this idea of of wages, and who should be responsible for paying for the cost of bringing inflation under control. So if you can argue truthfully, or realistically or correctly or not, that it’s not workers, and it’s not, you know, ordinary people who are responsible for inflation, therefore, you can’t restrict wages, and your government should be providing cost of living support through their budgets, what you’re trying to do is actually shift the incidence of who has to pay for the cost of getting inflation under control. But it’s such a dangerous thing to do. Because what we know is that the thing that will make inflation enduring, and the thing that will cause the biggest problems if inflation is translated into wage expectations, it creates a cycle that makes it exceptionally hard to break. And the unions and to an extent the government are trying as hard as they can to put in put forward this idea that wages should at a minimum keep pace with inflation. And ultimately, that’s a very dangerous sentiment, in my view.

Gene Tunny  43:49

This is the concern about the wage price spiral. So yeah, yeah, I’ve looked at that in a previous episode. So I might, I might link to that. Yes. So you’ve written in your article on greedflation. “The dissidents seek to de emphasise monetary policy, especially the role of monetary of managing inflation in favour of a greater role for fiscal policy and an equal focus on maintaining full employment.” So you, you see this, this greedflation view, you’re, you’re worried about it because it could lead to really bad policy outcomes in your view?

Simon Cowan  44:31

Yeah I think we’re seeing a shift already. And it’s been coming for a little while, I think, you know, we had a period of time where there was a fairly clear settlement, particularly Australia and macro economic management stability issues were almost exclusively a domain of of monetary policy, and then micro-economic efficiency issues and supply side concerns were the domain of fiscal policy. And the problem with that is that that doesn’t really allow a progressive government that wants to, to, you know, put its finger on the scales in various places to use macro economic measures as a rationale for changing government spending priorities. And so there’s this shift. You can see in America, it’s not just, just here, but away from monetary policy being mechanism for micro, macro economic stability towards fiscal policy being responsible for for huge components of economic well being. And it fits very clearly, I think into what the treasurer has been saying about the role or the return of government to more central position in in determining the direction of economic forces and so greedflation, if you take it away from that over stimulus point and bring it back towards a discussion about employment and wages. It allows you to centralise government in that decision making process again. And it was so hard for us to get past that first time.

Gene Tunny  45:58

Yeah. What are the greedflation, people arguing for greedflation, what are they actually, what would they be suggesting price controls or something? Who really…

Simon Cowan  46:07

Yeah, price controls and tax increases and ,there’s a was a retribution component in some respects. But it’s also this idea that, you know, workers weren’t responsible for this. Therefore, they shouldn’t have to bear the costs of it. And I mean, from a, from a moral perspective, that that sounds right. I mean, it’s not it’s not instinctively wrong, the problem is from an economic perspective, the argument they’re basing that on doesn’t make any sense.

Gene Tunny  46:37

Yeah. Yeah. And particularly, and this is the point Phil Lowe made in response to my question, I might, I’ll put a link in the show notes regarding that, because I had a look at some of the data he was talking about. You don’t see this big spike in the profit share of national income other than in mining, you see it in mining because they’ve had a big terms of trade boom. But you don’t really see it elsewhere in the economy. There’s a little bit but it’s not huge. So it’s hard to see how it supports his greedflation hypothesis. I think that’s a fair point. And I like your point about the lack of a causal mechanism, because, you know, people like the Australian Institute people, what they’ve done is that they’ve shown or they can demonstrate they do some decomposition of the GDP deflator. And they argue that it’s largely associated with, with profits rather than wages. Now, that’s a nice statistical calculation, but it’s just they’re showing a correlation. They’re not necessarily proving any causation, which I think’s your point. Yeah,

Simon Cowan  47:40

Yeah, cool, but far more fundamentally, right? What is inflation? Inflation is an increase in prices. If, and it can only come from from two places, right? It either comes from an increase in costs, or it comes from an increase in in profit share. Now, either it’s come from an increase in costs. That’s a supply side driven inflation. And we’ve seen some of that during the pandemic, particularly around the energy costs. But what they’ve effectively triumphantly discovered is that inflation is an increase in prices, doesn’t say anything about what causes that increase in prices. And you often see, I mean, because unions, I think, unions think this way, because this is how unions work in the sense that everyone gets together and they make a sort of centralised decision. And that then flows outwards, they assume that their opposition works the same way. There is no business or collective sort of companies that can decide what the profit level is like they can’t, there is no mechanism by which you can actually do that. So what we’re seeing is that that sort of accumulation of literally 10s of 1000s of individual decisions in individual markets by individual companies, there’s no, there’s no overarching sort of business sector that makes decisions. It’s just a reflection of what’s happening in the market. And that’s why I mean, it’s the biggest reason why this doesn’t work. Like if, if you wanted companies to reduce profits to cut inflation. How would you actually go about doing that?

Gene Tunny  49:15

Yeah, I largely agree. Now, you’re not saying that, I mean, would you recognise that there are some areas of the economy where there may be excessive concentration or or we do need to be conscious of abuses of market power. Do you have any thoughts on that? Like so…

Simon Cowan  49:31

Yeah, I mean, I have some thoughts on that. I do have a lot of fairly uncharitable thoughts about competition policy for what that’s worth. I do think there are issues around efficiency within markets, and that is a problem. But it’s not at all clear to me that any of the people who are pushing the greedflation agenda, have any idea how to make markets more efficient. And none of their solutions would make markets more efficient or resolve any of those issues. So I I’m less convinced that that’s a solution to this problem. But what we have seen, I think, is over the last sort of 30 or 40 years, as you know, international trade has increased enormously as the sort of tyranny of distance, you know, internet, the ability of markets to sort of reflect international trends, competition has become enormously increased in a number of different markets. So the fact that it’s not immediately visible in Australia, because you can only see the Australian companies doesn’t mean that there’s not a whole bunch of potential competition that could arise there. So, but I mean, I think competition is important, and it’s not as efficient as it could be. But and I’d be very much in favour of making it more efficient. But I don’t know you make competition better or more efficient with more government?

Gene Tunny  50:47

Yeah. Oh, yeah. Yeah, we might have to come back to that in a future episode. I just thought of it because I know there’s a lot of talk lately about Qantas. And how close Qantas is to the government. And the government is making decisions in favour of Qantas like not letting Qatar Airways take a route into Australia. And at the same time, we’ve got Qantas coming out in favour of a policy position advanced by the government on the Voice, and it’s given Anthony Albanese, some chairmanship lounge membership.

Simon Cowan  51:17

Yeah well so I actually looked at this issue in the past too, and this is a really important thing, it’s what it comes down to is what the future direction of the economy is. So there’s, there’s a view where you say, you know, it’s big business and big union and big government, they all get together, and they do what they think is in the best interest of the country. Or there’s a model where you say, consumers should be sovereign, and they should make choices and the market reflects whatever people decide to buy with their money. And what we’re seeing is so many more people coming out in favour of that first view, the idea that, you know, the benevolent elites will come and decide what’s best for everyone and that Qantas and, you know, the ACTU and Jim Chalmers can get together in a room and decide what the priorities for the economy should be. And I mean, I fundamentally reject that view. But I think more importantly, my vision is not a business-centric one, it’s a consumer-centric one. Markets are consumer democracy. It’s not about what’s best for business. It’s what about what’s best for people and consumers?

Gene Tunny  52:17

Absolutely. I fully agree. Simon Cowan it’s been terrific. I’m so glad to have caught up with you here in Sydney at CIS’s offices. So thanks again for your thoughts and for your hospitality today.

Simon Cowan  52:30

Appreciate it. Thanks for your time.

Gene Tunny  52:33

Righto, thanks for listening to this episode of Economics Explored. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please get in touch. I’d love to hear from you. You can send me an email via contact@economicsexplored.com or a voicemail via SpeakPipe. You can find the link in the show notes. If you’ve enjoyed the show, I’d be grateful if you could tell anyone you think would be interested about it. Word of mouth is one of the main ways that people learn about the show. Finally, if your podcasting app lets you then please write a review and leave a rating. Thanks for listening. I hope you can join me again next week.

53:20

Thank you for listening. We hope you enjoyed the episode. For more content like this or to begin your own podcasting journey. Head on over to obsidian-productions.com

Credits

Thanks to Obsidian Productions for mixing the episode and to the show’s sponsor, Gene’s consultancy business www.adepteconomics.com.au. Full transcripts are available a few days after the episode is first published at www.economicsexplored.com. Economics Explored is available via Apple PodcastsGoogle Podcast, and other podcasting platforms.

Exit mobile version